Home

Alt-N MDaemon Server for Windows v6.0

1. Show only accounts from this domain AI Domains 7 New en Delete Show more accounts Top Import New account defaults Ok Account List Above the Account List you will see two statistics regarding the list The first number is the total number of MDaemon user accounts that currently exist on your system The second number is the number of those accounts currently displayed in the Account List Which accounts that will be displayed is contingent upon what you have chosen in the Show Only Accounts From This Domain control If you have selected All Domains then all of your MDaemon accounts will be displayed in the list 214 CHAPTER 19 MANAGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS Each Account List entry lists the Domain to which it belongs the Mailbox the Real Name of the account holder and the Mail Directory in which the account s messages are stored This list can be sorted in ascending and descending order by whichever column that you prefer Click any column heading to sort the list in ascending order by that column Click the column again to sort it in descending order Note By default only 500 accounts at a time will be displayed in this list If you want to see more accounts from the currently selected domain or All Domains if you have selected that option then you must click the Show More Accounts button to display the next 500 If you want to be able to display more than 500 accounts at a time then open t
2. 005 138 180 Using MDaemon s remote configuration client67 V Virus Notification messages Protection ccsccssssssssssssessessessenees Quarantine ccsssseeesenseeeenseeeenneseneenee Scanning Updater eicisnecatncanastnnnineecsnacsiemnndennee Warning MeESSage Warning messages ssssss2 1 W WebConfig port s ssssss2122 5 42 Welcome File 2 cscsseeeeseeeneeeenseeeneesseeeeee 275 INDEX Windows address bOOK 209 Windows NT Security Account Integration251 359
3. then the 184 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 ESSAGE IDS Ww Ww LIST ATTAC LIST VIRUS HMENTS RE ES FOUNDS SM ENAME SM SP SSE Ss RIMARYDOMAINS ENTDOMAINS ENTMATLBOXS ERDOMAINS ERMAILBOX CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS HEADER TO macro will expand to joe mdaemon com If the original message has Subject This is the subject then the HEADER SUBJECT macro would be replaced with the text This is the subject As with SHEADER XX above this macro will expand to the value of the Message ID header When one or more attachments are removed from the message this macro will list them When one or more viruses is found in a message this macro will list gt them This macro expands to the file name of the current message being processed As SHEADER MESSAGE IDS above except this macro strips lt gt from the value of the message ID Expands to MDaemon s primary domain name which is designated on the Primary Domain Configuration dialog click Setup Primary Domain This macro expands to the IP address of your primary domain specified on the Primary Domain Configuration dialog This macro resolves to the full address of the message recipient This macro will insert the domain name of the message recipient Lists the recipients mailbox
4. MultiPOP Mail Collection Enable MultiPOP mail collection for this account This switch must be enabled for MultiPOP processing to occur for the account 242 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Server Enter the POP3 server from which you wish to collect mail Additionally if you wish to specify a port to collect the mail from other than MDaemon s current default POP port you can do so by appending a new port value to the host name separated by a colon For example using mail altn com as a MultiPOP host will connect to that host using the default outbound POP port while using mail altn com 523 will connect to that host on port 523 Logon Enter the POP3 USER or LOGON name that accesses the mail account on the specified server Password Enter the POP3 password or APOP shared secret used for accessing the mail account on the specified server Use APOP password field contains shared secret Click this checkbox is you want the Multi POP entry to use the APOP method of authentication when retrieving mail from its corresponding host Note The Password control must contain the APOP shared secret when this feature is chosen Leave a copy of message on POP server Click this checkbox if you want to leave a copy of collected messages on the server This is useful when you plan to retrieve these messages again at a later time from a different location Delete messages once xx or more have accumulated 0 never T
5. cui Miscellaneous Options 21x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MuliPOP WAB Misc GUI properties I Use small display font IV Minimize to task bar I Restrict MDSTATS GUI to a single instance only MV MDSTATS shows queue and mail directory subfolders IV Clear message counts at startup Max number of accounts shown in GUI controls O show all zz Max domains listed in tool window controls 0 show all 50 Max number of log lines displayed before router window refresh 5000 Max number of log lines displayed before session windows refresh 250 Composite log window contains M System M SMTP M IMAP M CFG M DPOP M Routing M POP M RAW M MPOP M CF AV Start MDaemon _ Create sessions IT C Inthe system tray In a minimized window veo In a magimized window In a hidden window In a default window In a default window Cancel Apply Note The controls on this tab do not affect the amount of data that is actually stored in the log files they only affect the information displayed in the router window of MDaemon s main interface 194 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS GUI Properties Use small display font on router amp session windows Enables the small display font on the Router and Session windows Clear message counts at startup When this checkbox is enabled the message statistics information displayed on the main router window w
6. 90 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER RelayFax Integration Alt N Technologies RelayFax Server is an email to fax and fax to email gateway that can be integrated seamlessly with WorldClient in order to provide fax services to your users When this functionality is enabled WorldClient users will be given access to various features that will enable them to compose and send faxes via the WorldClhient client pages For more information about RelayFax visit the RelayFax web site at www telayfax com WorldClient RelayFax Properties 21x Server Options Domain Options Address Book Calendar amp Scheduling RelayFax RelayF ax integration options Tih RelayFas is a powerful fax lt gt email gateway which allows you to send and i receive faxes using WorldClient or any traditional email client For more information visit the RelayFax home page IV Allow WorldClient users to send faxes thru RelayFax If enabled your WorldClient users will see Compose Fax and other faxing options when using WorldClient C Use SMTP to deliver faxes to RelayFax RelayFax server s email address Enter the email address to an account which RelayF ax is monitoring for new faxes Directly deliver faxes into RelayFax s incoming queue If RelayFax is installed on a separate computer please provide the path to the RelayFax APP directory here If RelayF ax is installed on this computer you can leave this field
7. IV Authenticate subscription requests IV Authenticate autoresponder generated subscribers Unsubscribe IV Allow people to unsubscribe from this mailing list via email This switch controls whether or not you will allow people to quit this mailing list by sending UNSUBSCRIBE mail to MDaemon I Authenticate unsubscription requests Authenticate autoresponder generated unsubscribers Time to live global for all mailing lists Outstanding authentication requests expire after 7200 minutes Using authentication MDaemon will create and send a confirmation message containing a uniquely generated password Only when a response to this message is received will the requested action be taken Cancel Subscribe Allow people to subscribe to this mailing list via email This switch controls whether or not the list will allow potential members to subscribe to the mailing list by sending a subscription request to MDaemon Authenticate subscription requests With this switch set MDaemon will attempt to authenticate the subscription request The mechanism employed to accomplish this consists of MDaemon generating a unique password string for the subscription transaction A message is sent to the potential member which contains this unique password Once the potential member responds by replying to this message MDaemon will then add the member to the mailing list s membership Authenticate autoresponder generated subscribers
8. Low Disk Space Warning Send warning to user or address when free disk space falls below xx KB By using this option you can configure MDaemon to send a notification message to the user or address of your choice when disk space drops below a certain level Automatic Shutdown MDaemon will automatically disable TCP IP services if free disk space falls below xx KB Enable this feature if you want MDaemon to disable TCP IP Services if free disk space drops to a certain level Miscellaneous NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 205 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS Delete all files in bad message queue at midnight each night Click this checkbox if you want MDaemon to delete all files from the bad message queue each night at midnight This can help to conserve disk space Backup configuration files at midnight each night Click this checkbox if you want to archive all MDaemon configuration files at midnight each night Files to backup Use this text box to specify exactly which files and file extensions to back up Wildcards are permitted and each filename or extension must be separated be the character Put backups here Use this control to specify the folder in which you wish the backup files to be stored 206 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS 2 multipop GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MultiPOP waB Misc MultiPOP options Sy C Collect MultiPOP mail every time remote mail is processe
9. for example would cause all attachments ending with the EXE file extension to be removed To add an entry to the list type the filename in the space provided and the click Add Exclusions Click Exclusions to specify addresses that you wish to exclude from attachment restriction monitoring When a message is directed to one of these addresses MDaemon will allow the message to pass even if it contains a restricted attachment CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 173 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS File Compression Content Filter Ed Notifications Antivirus AntiVirus Updater Content Filter Admins Attachments File Compression Outbound compression V Enable compression of attachments for outbound messages I Compress outbound local domain attachments Compression options Create self extracting zips Compress only if compression is greater than 25 Compress if total attachment size is greater than 50 KB Compression level Medium Default v Compression exclusions Exclude these attachments Excluded files Exclude these domains Excluded domains Inbound decompression V Enable decompression of attachments for inbound messages I Decompress inbound local domain attachments With the controls on this tab you can cause message attachments to be automatically compressed or decompressed before the message is delivered The level of compression can be controlled as well as several other paramete
10. New Clicking the New button will open the Gateway Editor which can be used to create a new Domain Gateway AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 301 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Chapter Queue and Statistics Manager Using MD Stats MDaemon s queue and statistics manager MDaemon by choosing the Queues Queue and Statistics Manager menu selection MDStats is made up of a four page dialog Each of these pages has been designed to serve a distinct and specific purpose while also maintaining a simple format that makes them very easy i E queue and statistics manager MDStats is accessed directly from within to use Queue Page The default tab is the Queue Page From this page you can easily manage all of MDaemon s standard mail queues as well as the User Account mailbox folders By simply clicking on the queue or user of your choice a list of all message files contained within the specified queue will be displayed along with several key pieces of pertinent information about each message the sender the recipient the content of the Deliver To header the subject of the message its size and how long it has been at its current location In addition controls are provided that make it easy to copy or move messages between folders or delete them completely User Page The User Page displays a list of all MDaemon users This list includes their full name mailbox name the number of messages in their mailbox the amount of disk
11. you enter into your web browser to get to that server or file URLs cannot have spaces and always use forward slashes They have two parts separated by The first part is the protocol being used or 353 INDEX resource being addressed for example http telnet ftp and so on and the second part is the Internet address of the file or server for example www altn com or 127 0 0 1 Uuencode A set of algorithms for converting files into a series of 7 bit ASCII characters for transmission over the Internet Although it stands for Unix to Unix encode it is no longer exclusive to UNIX It has become a universal protocol used to transfer files between different platforms It is an encoding method commonly used in email WAN A WAN or Wide Area Network is similar to a Local Area Network LAN but is usually spread across multiple buildings or even cities WANs are sometimes composed of smaller LANs that are interconnected The Internet could be described as the biggest WAN in the world cC Zip Refers to a compressed or zipped file usually with the zip file extension Zipping is compressing one or more files into a single archive file in order to save space for storage or to facilitate faster transfer to another computer To use a zip file however you ll need to unzip it first with the appropriate program such as PKZIP or WinZip There are multiple compression decompression utilities available both share
12. Content ID headers to RAW messages with attachments Click this switch if you wish to add unique MIME Content ID headers to messages that MDaemon cteates from a RAW file that contains attachments Add For sections to Received headers Click this switch if you want For SMTP Recipient sections to be added to the message s Received header added by MDaemon Strip Received headers from list messages Click this switch if you wish to strip all existing Received headers from list messages This is sometimes useful for Mailing List mail Strip X type headers from local messages MDaemon uses many server specific headers called X Type headers in order to route mail and perform various MDaemon specific functions This switch will force MD to clean up after itself and remove these headers from messages as they ate moved into local mailboxes Hide local IPs when processing message headers Click this option to prevent MDaemon from placing local IP addresses into message headers when it processes mail Authenticate list posters using From header Usually senders to private lists are checked using the MAIL FROM value passed during the SMTP session If you would rather have your system use the message s FROM header then enable this switch Add this header and value to every list message header If you wish to add a static header value combination such as Precedence bulk to all
13. MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 ALT N TECHNOLOGIES LTD MDaemon Version 6 User Manual MDaemon is a product of Alt N Technologies 1179 Corporate Drive West Suite 103 Arlington Texas 76006 817 652 0204 Fax 817 652 0590 www mdaemon com Copyright 1996 2002 Alt N Technologies All Rights Reserved MDaemon WorldClient and RelayFax are registered trademarks of Alt N Technologies LICENSE AGREEMENT Please read this entire agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement promptly return your distribution materials to the place you obtained them for a full refund or delete your trial package ALT N TECHNOLOGIES END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you Customer or Sub Licensee and Alt N Technologies Licensee for the Alt N software product s you are installing which include s computer software online or electronic documentation and may include associated media and printed materials SOFTWARE PRODUCT or SOFTWARE By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA promptly return the entire unused SOFTWARE PRODUCT including all subscription UPDATES that you may have received as part of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to the place from which you obtained it for a full refund and or delete all files related to your trial demonstrati
14. MDaemon server is equipped with an entire suite of list server or mailing list functions and features Logon a unique code or series of characters used to gain access or otherwise identify yourself to a server or machine In most cases a password must accompany the logon in order to gain access There are many terms used synonymously with logon such as ogin username user name user ID sign in and others Frequently logon is also used as a verb For example I am going to ggon to the mail server In that context however the more common usage and perhaps more proper is I am going to log on to the mail server Mailbox An area in memory or on a storage device that is assigned to a specific email address and where email messages are stored In any email system each user has a private mailbox in which messages are stored when that user s mail server receives them It is also common for the term mailbox to be used when referring to the leftmost portion of an email address For example Frank in Frank altn com is the mailbox while altn com is the domain name Mailing List Also called email groups a mailing list is a list or group of email addresses identified by a single email address For example listname example com Typically when a list server receives an email message addressed to one of its mailing lists that message will be automatically distributed to all of the lis
15. Restricted attachment message Sender Virus found message Admins Virus found message Recipient Ge eure Aer er eeu a Virus found message Sender Should you desire to restore one of these messages to its original appearance simply delete the relevant file and MDaemon will recreate it in its default state Message Macros For your convenience certain macros may be used in the notification messages and other messages that the Content Filters generate You may use any of the following macros many of which are listed on page 264 SACTUALTOS Some messages may contain an ActualTo field which generally represents the destination mailbox and host as it was entered by the original user prior to any reformatting or alias translation This macro is replaced with that value SCURRENTTIMES This macro is replaced with the current time when the message is being processed SACTUALFROM Some messages may contain an ActualFrom field which generally represents the origination mailbox and host prior to any reformatting or alias translation This macro is replaced with that value SF ILTERRULENAMES This macro is replaced by the name of the tule whose criteria the message matched SHEADER XX This macro will cause the value of the header specified in place of the xx to be expanded in the reformatted message For example If the original message has TO joe mdaemon com
16. Sm d Y might be displayed in WorldClient as 12 25 2002 Note This setting is per domain Individual users cannot modify the date format used for their accounts Help Click this button to display the list of macro codes that can be used in the Date format above Allow users to create new accounts MDaemon PRO only Click this checkbox if you want a Create Account button to appear on WorldClient s sign in screen when a uset connects to the selected domain This will enable users to create their own MDaemon accounts accessible via WorldClient 82 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER TIP If you choose to allow users to create their own email accounts then you should carefully review the New Account Defaults settings page 216 Use New Account Defaults to designate the degree of control that you will allow users to have over their own accounts New Account creation password Type a password here if you want to restrict new account creation from the sign in screen to only those users who know the password Users will have to type the new account creation password into the Password box on the sign in screen before the Create Account button will allow them to proceed If Create Account is clicked without specifying the proper password a message will be displayed stating that the password is required When the user is taken to the Account Creation screen they must specify their account
17. Support Files Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files New member welcome file Ic mdaemon app MyList wel Browse This file is parsed and sent to all members when they join the list or are added manually to the list Et Apply this suppression file Ic mdaemon app Flammers sup Browse The suppression file lists addresses of people who are not Edit allowed to send mail to this mailing list Apply this header footer file Path to header file rt Browse Create Path to footer file C mdaemon app M List ftr Browse Edit Cancel New Member Welcome File If specified the file listed here will be processed and mailed to all new members just after they subscribe The file is processed and handled exactly the same way as Auto Response scripts and may therefore contain any macro available to them See Creating Auto Response Scripts page 261 Apply This Suppression File If specified the file listed here will be used to suppress messages sent from specified users For a discussion on suppression files see Address Suppression page 109 Apply This Header Footer File The contents of the files specified here will be used as the header and or footer file for list messages MAILING LIST EDITOR 275 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Notifications Mailing List Editor MyLi
18. This action can be used to run a particular program when a message meets the rule s conditions You must specify the path to the program that you wish to run You can use the MESSAGEFILENAME macro to pass the name of the message to the process and you can specify whether or not MDaemon should suspend its operations temporarily or indefinitely while it waits for the process to terminate Further you can force the process to terminate and or run it in a hidden window Send Message Through SMS Gateway Server Click this option to send the message through an SMS Gateway Server You must supply the Host or IP Address and the SMS phone number Copy Message to Folder Use this option to place a copy of the message into a specific folder Add Line To Text File This option will cause a line of text to be added to a specific text file When choosing this action you will have to specify the path to the file and the text that you want to be appended to it You may use certain MDaemon macros in your text to cause the content filter to dynamically include information about the message such as the sender recipient message ID and so on Click the Macros button on the Add line to text file dialog to display a list of permitted macros Move Message to Public Folders Use this action to cause the message to be moved to one or more Public Folders page 102 Search and Replace Words in a Header tUse this option to scan a specified head
19. to refer to junk email is debated but it is generally accepted that it comes from a popular Monty Python sketch in which the word spam is repeated over and over and 352 GLOSSARY periodically accompanied by Vikings singing Spam spam spam spam spam spam spam spam However it may simply be a disparaging comparison to the trademarked Hormel meat product of the same name everybody gets it at one time or another but does anyone ever really ask for it or like it TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP has been described as the foundation of the Internet It is the basic suite of communication protocols used on the Internet to connect hosts It is the most commonly used protocol on Local Area Networks as well It is a two layer system the topmost layer being TCP which manages the disassembling and assembling of files into packets for transmitting over the network IP which is the lower layer handles the addressing of the packets so that they get to the proper destinations TCP is addressed in the following RFC 793 IP is addressed in RFC 791 These RFCs can be found at TCP http www rfc editor org rfc rfc793 txt IP http www rfc editor org rfc rfc791 txt Telnet A command and program used to log on to Internet sites that support Telnet access The Telnet command gets you to the logon prompt of the Telnet server If you have an account on that server you can access your permitted resources su
20. user domain com CHAR SET value for auto generated messages Specify the character set that you wish to be used for auto generated messages The default setting is US ASCII Second machine IP for dual socket binding If you want the Primary domain to be bound to an additional IP address then include it here 204 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS ES Disk Miscellaneous Options 2 x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MutiPOP WAB Misc Disk monitor properties M Enable disk space checking engine When this switch is active MDaemon will monitor the free disk space available on the drive where MDAEMON EXE is located Low disk space warning M Send waming to Postmaster when free disk space falls below 10000 KB Automatic shutdown T MDaemon will automatically disable TCP IP services if free disk space falls below 1000 KB Miscellaneous Tl Delete all files in bad message queue at midnight each night J Backup configuration files at midnight each night Files to backup FINI DATI SUPIMBFIASP Separate multiple file specifications with a character Wildcards ok Put backups here C MDAEMON Backup Contig Browse Cancel Apply Disk Monitor Properties Enable disk space checking engine Activate this checkbox if you want MDaemon to monitor the amount of disk space that is available on the drive where the MDAEMON EXE is located
21. 194 194 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 210 214 214 215 216 216 217 218 221 222 TABLE OF CONTENTS Account 222 Mailbox 224 Forwarding 226 Options 228 Quotas 230 Restrictions 232 Outbound Mail Restriction 233 Web 234 Auto Responder 237 IMAP Mail Rules 240 MultiPOP 242 Shared Folders 245 Access Control List 247 CHAPTER 21 Importing Accounts 249 Importing Accounts From a Text File 249 Windows NT Security Account Integration 251 NT To MDaemon Account Importer 252 NT 2000 Server Properties 252 Accounts to Import 253 Importing Options 253 CHAPTER 22 Address Aliases 255 Alias Editor 256 CHAPTER 23 Auto Responders and MBF Files 258 Auto Responders 259 Creating Auto Response Scripts 261 Auto Response Script Samples 262 Creating and Using MBF Files 263 MBF Macros and Examples 264 Section III Additional MDaemon Features CHAPTER 24 Mailing Lists 268 Mailing List Editor 268 Creating a New Mailing List 268 Modifying an Existing Mailing List 268 Options 269 Members 271 Enhanced List Pruning 272 Routing 273 Support Files 275 10 MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 Notifications 276 Security 278 Subscriptions 280 Subscribing To Mailing Lists 281 Digest 283 Public Folder 285 CHAPTER 25 Catalogs 286 Catalog Editor 286 The PUBLIC
22. Account Editor Frank Thomas 21x Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP Shared Folders Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Mail storage information Message directory C MDAEMONSUSERS mycompany com Frank Browse All mail messages which arrive for this account will be stored as view text files on disk in this directory Storage format Storage format RFC822 7 Edit MBF Select the MBF file that determines the storage format for this account s email MBF files are scripts that allow you to customize the format mail will be stored in Advanced options I Enable automatic extraction of MIME encoded attachments If automatic decoding of attachments is enabled the files which will be extracted from incoming messages will be stored in the FILES directory stemming from the root message directory Mail Storage Information Message directory Enter the directory where inbound mail messages destined for this account s mailbox should be placed Storage Format Storage format This window allows you to attach an MBF to the mailbox message directory MBF files provide a method of mail system compatibility which may be useful in integrating your existing mail system with MDaemon Server v6 For a complete discussion of MBF files and how to construct them see Creating and using MBF files Edit MBF This button will allow easy editing of the account s MBF file Advance
23. Any piece of software can be a CGI program if it handles input and output according to the CGI standard However a CGI program is usually a small program that takes data from a web server and does something with it like putting the content of a form into an email message or doing something else with that data CGI programs are often stored in a web site s cgi bin directory and therefore appear in a URL that accesses them but not always cgi bin The most common name of the directory on a web server in which CGI programs are stored The bin part of cgi bin is short for binary because most programs used to be referred to as binaries In reality most cgi bin programs are text files scripts executed by programs located elsewhere CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing is a new IP addressing system that replaces the older system which was based on classes A B and C CIDR IP addresses look like normal IP addresses followed by a slash and number called the IP prefix For example 123 123 0 0 12 The IP prefix defines how many addresses are covered by the CIDR address with lower numbers covering more addresses In the above example the IP prefix of 12 can be used to address 4 096 former Class C addresses CIDR addresses reduce the size of routing tables and make more IP addresses available within organizations CIDR is addressed in RFCs 1517 1519 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor o
24. Apply Post Connection Process Once connected run this process If a program is specified here MDaemon will spawn a thread and execute the process This is extremely useful for those who require Finger or some other program to unlock the ISP s mailbox Pause server for xx seconds 1 infinite 0 no waiting If the Once Connected Run This Process control contains a valid entry then the server will pause its operations for the number of minutes specified here while it waits for the executing process to return Entering 1 will cause the server to wait indefinitely for the process to return Force process to shutdown after pause interval has elapsed Sometimes the program you need to run may not exit once it has run its course some programs require user intervention in order to close them down This is not acceptable when the software must run unattended If this switch is selected MDaemon will force the process thread to terminate once the number of seconds specified in Pause Server For XX Seconds has elapsed This function does not work when the server is configured to wait indefinitely for the process to return RAS DIALUP SETTINGS 147 CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP LAN Domains RAS Dialup Settings HEI Dialup Settings ISP Logon Settings Post Connection LAN Domains LAN IPs These domains are on my local LAN sA A local domain com Bemove amp LANdomain com New local LAN domain Add IV R
25. Docs logo gif notes D MDAEMON Docs FRelNotes txt Remove Catalog Properties Name 286 CHAPTER 25 CATALOGS Use this field to enter a name for the file catalog Password Use this field to enter a password for the file catalog Note Since MDaemon v3 a password is no longer required for all catalogs You may choose to make catalogs accessible without a password See Mailing List and Catalog Control page 319 Add New File Add file Click this button to add a file to the catalog After choosing the file that you wish to add you will be prompted for the Magic name that you wish to assign File Listing This window displays all the files and their associated magic names currently registered as members of the specified catalog Double click on an entry in this window to remove it from the catalog Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the Fie Lasting The PUBLIC Catalog The PUBLIC catalog is an exception to the normal rules governing access to file catalogs Typically to access a catalog requires a password that has been assigned to the catalog With the PUBLIC catalog the password is not required Files listed in the PUBLIC catalog are available to anyone who knows the file s magic name MAILING LIST EDITOR 287 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Chapter Domain Gateways Adding and configuring domains for which MDaemon will act as a Gateway Gateway menu selection on
26. MyList mycompany com Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Routing options MDaemon will crack list mail Generate a unique Message4D for each copy Using this approach MDaemon will create a separate copy of a list message individually addressed for each list member Route a single copy of list mail to this smart host Host Name Imyisp net IV Ignore errors when spooling list members to host This approach will route a single copy of the list message to the specified smart host using multiple SMTP RCPT TO commands This approach requires at least one foreign list member This host only allows 20 RCPT TO s per message 0 no limit If your smart host imposes a recipient limit you can enter that value here and MDaemon will route around it by creating extra copies of the message routed to subsets of your list members when necessary MDaemon will crack list mail If selected individual list messages will be created and dispatched to each list member This will result in numerous individual messages being created which could affect the server s performance This option is appropriate for a mailing list of around 15 members ot less Generate a unique Message ID for each copy When MDaemon cracks list mail it creates an individual copy of the message for each member If you wish MDaemon can make certain that each copy of the list messag
27. Parsing DomainPOP Mail Collection HEI Routing Rules Foreign Mail Security Account Parsing Name Matching Processing Parsing properties j M Dedupe collected mail using the MessageD field V Parse Received headers for email addresses Skip over the first 0 Received headers J Stop parsing if Received yields a local address J Parse Subject header for address inside and characters Parse these headers for email addresses POP3 RCPT Remove RESENT TO _Beemove TO CC Default New header o a a Cancel Apply Parsing Properties De dupe collected mail using the Message ID field If this option is selected MDaemon will remember the value of the specified header and will not process additional messages collected in the same processing cycle which contain an identical value The Message ID field is the natural header to use but the actual header can be anything you want Parse Received headers for email addresses This switch makes use of a powerful yet seldom used optional RFC 822 regulation It is possible to store the recipient information ordinarily found only within the message s envelope in a message header so that parsers of the mail message will be able to glean the actual recipient address by merely inspecting the headers later MDaemon will attempt to capitalize on this optional rule if you have this switch set by parsing ALL the received headers found withi
28. Stores user information for each user of the system HKEY _ Current_User Preferences for the current user HKEY Current_Configuration Stores settings for the display and printers HKEY Classes _Root File associations and OLE information HKEY Local_Machine Hardware operating system and installed application settings HKEY Dyn Data Performance data When programs are installed on your computer the installer usually writes some information to the registry automatically You can manually edit the registry however by using the regedit exe program that is built in to Windows But you should exercise extreme caution when doing this because altering the wrong setting in the registry could cause your computer to function improperly or not at all RFC Request For Comments is the name of the result and the process for creating a standard on the Internet Each new standard and protocol is proposed and published on the Internet as a Request For Comments The Internet Engineering Task Force facilitates discussions on the new standard and 351 GLOSSARY eventually it is established In spite of the fact that the standard is established and no further comments are requested the standard still retains the Request for Comment acronym along with its identifying number For example RFC 822 is the official standard or RFC for email However those protocols that are officially adopted as standards do have an off
29. This process is usually done automatically by the sending and receiving mail clients All Internet Service Providers ISPs offer email Most also support gateways so that you can exchange email with users of other email systems Although there are many different protocols used for processing email by many different email systems several common standards make it possible for users on virtually all systems to exchange messages Email Address A name or string of characters that identifies a specific electronic mailbox on a network to which email can be sent Email addresses are the locations to and from which email messages are sent Email servers need email addresses so that they can route messages to theit proper destinations Different types of networks have different formats for email addresses but on the Internet all email addresses have the form mailbox domain com For example Frank Thomas altn com Email Client Also called a mail cient or just chent an email client is a software application that enables you to send receive and organize email It is called a client because email systems are based on client server architecture a client is used to compose the email and then send it to a server which then routes it to the recipient s server from which it will be retrieved by the recipient s client Usually email clients are separate software applications installed on the uset s machine but products such as Alt N Techn
30. and enter the path to the setup executable file provided in your MDaemon package then click OK Alternatively you may install MDaemon by using Add Remove Programs located in the Control Panel The installation process will prompt you for some basic information such as a registration name and a root directory where MDaemon files should be created The installation process also provides a step by step configuration wizard that can be used to guide you through the most common configuration scenarios See Primary Domain Configuration page 34 New Account Defaults page 216 See also DomainPOP Mail Collection page 152 28 INSTALLATION MDAEMON S MAIN DISPLAY Chapter MDaemon s Main Display Message Router Daemon s Message Router automatically appears at program startup and gives you important information regarding MDaemon s resources statistics active sessions and queued mail waiting to be processed It also contains controls for easily activating deactivating MDaemon s various servers The Message Router s tabbed frames keep you up to date on how the server and its incoming and outgoing connections are performing Alt N MDaemon PRO for Windows M Router mycompany com 127 0 0 1 Fle Ed Setup Accounts Lists Gateways Catalogs Queues Windows Help l xl TTA EEE E ee E Statistics E Accounts used 19 E Accourits lelt infinte A SMTP rev 12 3 4 SMTP sent 0 Ga DomainPOP reve 0 GA MukPO
31. and the Submission Address with which each one has been associated if any When MDaemon is first installed this area will be empty until you use the Folder name and Create controls to add a folder to it Subfolders in this list will have the folder and subfolder names separated by the delimiter character designated on the Shared Folders tab Remove To remove a public IMAP folder from the list select the desired folder and then click the Remove button New IMAP Folder Folder name To add a new folder to the list specify a name for it in this control set the per user flags and Submission address controls and then click Create If you want the new folder to be a subfolder of one of the folders in the list then prefix the new folder s name with the parent folder s name and the delimiter character designated on the Shared Folders tab For example if the delimiter character is and parent folder is My Folder then the new subfolder name would be My Folder My New Folder If you don t want it to be a subfolder then name the new folder My New Folder without the prefix 102 SHARED IMAP FOLDERS CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Store IMAP message flags on per user basis Click this check box if you want the folder s message flags read unread replied to forwarded and so on to be set on a pet user basis instead of globally Each user will see the status of the messages in the shared folder displayed ac
32. arrives for an MDaemon account the account s MBF file is used to reformat the incoming data before distributing it to the user MBFs are constructed as plain ASCII text files ending with the MBF file extension They are scanned by the server for macros which will be replaced by actual data from an incoming message Lines beginning with the character are ignored and are used for comments Lines beginning with the 5 character are used to control the value of the reformatted message s file name When the MBF processor sees a line that begins with the character it assumes that the text following this character will describe either the prefix or the extension which the processor should use when creating new files The syntax is msg prefix SMF lt cr gt lt lf gt 7 msg ext lt cr gt lt lf gt If an MBF file contained lines as shown above all reformatted mail messages created using the MBF file would take the form SMFxxxx where xxxx represents a random but unique identifier The maximum length of the prefix component is four characters The maximum extension that can be specified is three characters Note that the above example purposely excludes an extension These directives are optional and are not required to be present in any MBF file However their inclusion provides a means of directly manipulating message file names which may be useful in integrating MDaemon Server v6 with an existing M
33. email access to newsgroups and news servers and so on Typically users will connect to their ISP via dial up or some other form of connection and then the ISP will connect them to a router which will in turn route them to the Internet backbone 344 GLOSSARY Java Developed by Sun Microsystems Java is a network oriented computer programming language with syntax much like C C but is structured around classes instead of functions In Internet applications it is commonly used for programming applets which are small programs embedded in web pages These programs can be automatically downloaded and executed by a uset s browser in order to provide a large number of functions that wouldn t ordinarily be possible with just HTML or other scripting languages and without fear of viruses or harm to your computer Because Java is both efficient and easy to use it is becoming popular among many software and hardware developers JavaScript Not to be confused with Java JavaScript was developed by Netscape as a scripting language designed to extend the capabilities of HTML and create interactive web pages It is a highly pared down and easy to use programming language which makes it much easier to use than Java and other languages but also limits it to some degree It spite of its limitations it is very useful for adding a number if interactive elements to web sites For example JavaScript is useful when you want data to be preprocessed before i
34. if any that each queue contains Each control s shortcut menu can be used to process the queue and open the Queue and Statistics Manager which can be used for viewing copying or deleting the contents of the queue as well as a number of other functions The Servers section contains an entry for each server within MDaemon and each entry lists the current state of the server Active or Inactive Listed below each entry is the port on which that particular server is listening if that server is currently active The shortcut menu provides a control for toggling each server between the Active and Inactive state Message and Event Tracking The default right hand pane of the main interface contains several tabs They display the status of MDaemon s various servers and resources and are frequently updated to reflect current server conditions Each SMTP POP IMAP session and other server activity is logged onto the appropriate tab once it is complete so that a visible record of network activity is made available The information displayed on these tabs is mirrored in the log files kept in the Logs directory if you have chosen to log such activity See page 188 for more information The Message Router contains the following tabs System At program startup the System tab displays a log of the Initialization Process which can alert you to possible problems with MDaemon s configuration or status It also displays activity such as
35. reasons why an account might not be imported would include a conflict with an existing account s mailbox name or directory information a conflict with an existing alias to an account or a conflict with a mailing list name See the description of the MD ImportUser nfo andthe MD ExportAllUsers within the MD API HTML file located in your API directory for more information on the field mappings Use the following values in the base line to map to MDaemon account fields 250 Field Name MailBox Domain FullName MailDir Password AutoDecode IsForwarding AllowAccess AllowChangeViaEmail KeepForwardedMail HideFromEveryone EncryptMail ApplyQuotas EnableMultiPOP MaxMessageCount MaxDiskSpace FwdAddress FwdHost FwdSendAs FwdPort NTAccount MailFormat AutoRespScript AutoRespProcess AddToList RemoveFromList PassMessageToProcess MaxUIDLCount MaxMessageSize RecurselMAP Maxlinactive Type string string string string string bool bool bool bool bool bool bool bool bool int int string string string string string string string string bool bool bool int int bool int IMPORTING ACCOUNTS FROM A TEXT FILE CHAPTER 21 IMPORTING ACCOUNTS MaxMessageAge int MaxDeletedIMAPMessageAge int Comments string UserDefined string Windows NT Security Account Integration MDaemon supports Windows NT integration This support consists of a Windows NT user database import
36. requires AUTH Similar to ETAN the ATRAN command allows domains to request their stored mail However ATRN is much more efficient and reliable because the messages are sent immediately using the same connection which makes the request ATRN requests require authentication ESMTP AUTH MDaemon expects the gateway domain name as the AUTH logon name AUTH shared secret s Accounts which connect via SMTP and attempt to dequeue mail via the ETAN command must first authenticate using the ESMTP AUTH command V Dequeuing mail requires authentication I Authenticated requests are valid regardless of connecting IP Cancel Apply ESMTP ATRN Respond to ESMTP ATRN commands for this domain requires AUTH Activate this control if you want MDaemon to respond to ATRN commands from the domain for which MDaemon is acting as a gateway ATRN is a new ESMTP command used in On Demand Mail Relay ODMR which is currently the best relay method available for mail hosting It is superior to ETRN and other methods in that in requires authentication before mail is dequeued and does not require a static IP address A static IP address isn t required because the flow of data between MDaemon and the client domain is immediately reversed and the messages are despooled without having to make a new connection unlike ETRN which uses a separate connection after the ETRN command is sent This enables client domains using a dynamic non static dialup account
37. s menu bar Shared Folders Shared IMAP Folders 21x Shared Folders Public Folders IMAP folder options IMAP hierarchy delimiter character This is the character that separates IMAP sub folders is the default but other recommended characters are and see RFC 2683 section 3 4 10 Public folders IV Enable public folders Click here if you wish to allow IMAP users to access public IMAP folders Public IMAP folders are owned by the system and are not tied to any particular account P Allow users with Write access to also set the Deleted flag When storing message flags on a per user basis you may wish to grant users with Write access the ability to also set the Deleted flag Public folder prefix string ex or Pub it User folder sharing V Enable user folder sharing Click here if you wish to allow IMAP users to share their personal IMAP folders with other IMAP users Shared IMAP folder prefix string ex or User a IMAP Folder Options IMAP hierarchy delimiter character Type the character that you want to denote a subfolder when used in a folder name For example if this character is set to and you have a folder on the Public Folders tab called My Folder then to create a subfolder under it you would name your new folder My Folder My Subfolder Whenever IMAP users connect to MDaemon My Subfolder will be listed in their folders as a
38. select the desired entry and then click Remove Import With the Import feature you can add the members of an existing Mailing List to the list of users with Access Rights Choose the access rights that you wish to grant to the users click Import and then double click the desired list All of the list s members will be added to the list with the rights that you set Access Rights Choose the rights that you wish to grant to individual users by clicking the desired options in this area and then clicking Add for new entries or Rep ace for existing entries You can grant the following Access Control Rights Lookup l user can see this folder in their personal list of IMAP folders Read r user can open this folder and view its contents Write w user can change flags on messages in this folder Insert i user can append and copy messages into this folder Create c user can create subfolders within this folder Delete d user can delete messages from this folder Set Seen Flag s user can change the read unread status of messages in this folder Administer a user can administer the ACL for this folder Post p user can send mail directly to this folder if folder allows Help Click He p to display a list of the access rights and their definitions Note Access tights are controlled through support for Access Control Lists ACL that has been added to MDaemon 6 0 ACL is an extensio
39. the value to the left of in the email address This macro expands to the value of the message s Reply to header Expands to the full address from which the message was sent This macro will insert the domain name of the message s sender the value to the right of in the email address Lists the sendet s mailbox the value to the left of in the email address Displays the text contained in the message s subject CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 185 PRIORITY MAIL Chapter Priority Mail Configuring and using the Prionity Mail feature he Setup Priority Mail menu selection opens the Priority Mail dialog which is used to define what constitutes Priority Mail on your system Priority mail is delivered immediately by MDaemon regardless of scheduled mail processing intervals When a new message arrives MDaemon inspects its headers for a set of header value combinations that you have specified on this dialog If it finds them it considers the message a high priority item and attempts to deliver it immediately H Priority Mail Priority mail engine IV Enable priority mail checking engine 4 message is considered top priority if it contains any one of the following header yalue combinations Such mail is delivered immediately regardless of the existing schedule settings Enter new header value Header Value a IV Trigger even if value is a sub string Current priority mail header va
40. 5 146 Connection WindOW s s 1 1 5 5 33 Contact info sssssssssss222222 5 333 Content Filter ssssssssss2s22222 2 5 165 Content Filter administratorS 172 Context Menu ssssss1s2 Control cecceecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneee Converting Headers c1scsssesseeeeeseneeeeenene Copying mail before parsing Creating a Content Filter rule 0 0008 168 Creating a New Catalog s s s 286 Creating And Installing An Auto Responder259 Creating and Using MBF Files Creating Auto Response Scripts Custom mail Queues sceseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee D Decompressing attachments 0 000008 174 Deduping Mail sssssnnnnn22222 2 Default headers Deleting mail cceceseceseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenee 159 Deleting mail after collection 00008 152 Delivery based on non address text in To field163 Delivery return receipt message 0005 315 Delivery TIMES ssssss1s21 2 2 138 Dequeue Dialup only if Remote Mail is waiting 143 Dialup Profile 2cscesseseseneeseeeeseneeeeeeeeees 145 Display sssssss1s2 2 29 DNS nsnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna nnn 43 DNS Lookup ssssss2121 137 DNS Server 43 DNS Server IP Address ssssssssn2s 2 43 DNS UDP port sssssnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnn
41. Browse Cancel Apply DNS Server Settings Try to use DNS servers defined in windows TCP IP settings Windows sometimes keeps a DNS server IP address in the local TCP IP configuration If this is the case on your computer then you can check this option If MDaemon cannot find a locally maintained DNS server it will continue on and use the ones specified on this screen Primary DNS server IP address Enter the IP address of the DNS server that you want MDaemon to query for A and MX records In order to ensure proper operation this entry must be specified Backup DNS server IP address Enter the IP address of the backup or secondary DNS server that you want MDaemon to query for A and MX records This entry is optional but recommended Retry failed lookup attempts this many times If for some reason a lookup attempt fails this is the number of times that MDaemon will repeat the attempt If you have designated a backup DNS server both servers will be included in each lookup attempt DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 43 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION MX Record Processing Query DNS servers for MX records when delivering mail Enable this control if you want MDaemon to query your designated DNS servers for MX records when it is attempting to deliver mail Use A record IP addresses found within MX record packets Click this checkbox if you want MDaemon to attempt delivery to A
42. CC field MDaemon will collect each of these two identical message files and parse both addresses from each of them This would result in both recipients receiving one unwanted duplicate message To guard against this sort of duplication MDaemon uses a control which allows you to specify a header that MDaemon will use to check for duplication The Message ID field is ideal for this In the above example both messages are identical and will therefore contain the same Message ID field value MDaemon can use this value to identify and remove the second message during the download stage before it can be parsed for address information As a final measure guarding against duplicate messages and endless looping delivery cycles MDaemon employs a means for detecting how many trips or hops a message has made through the transport system Each time an SMTP mail server processes a message it stamps the message with a Received header MDaemon counts all such headers when it encounters a message for the first time If the total number of mail servers exceeds a specified value it is likely the message is caught in a delivery loop and should be taken out of the mailstream and moved to the bad message directory This value can be configured through the Domain Configuration Editor page 45 See Primary Domain Configuration page 34 Content Filters page 166 Mailing Lists page 268 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 151 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COL
43. CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER User Page amp MDaemon Queue Stats Manager lel x Queue Page User Page Log Page Report Page m User Information 5 users phe o o e a Forwarding amp Admin Admin mycompany RFC822 18596 nza amp Frank Thomas FT homas company com RFC822 18894 n a amp Harcourt Fenton M HMudd mycompany RFC822 347862 n a amp MDaemon Server MDaemon MyCompany RFC822 0 nza Michael Ellis MEllis mike mail RFC822 18867 n a User information When the User Page is chosen MDStats immediately loads a list of all MDaemon accounts into the User Information list box This list contains each uset s full name the name of their mailbox the domain to which the account belongs the number of messages it contains its mail format the amount of disk space in bytes that the account is taking up their forwarding address and finally the date that their mail was last checked Given that the information contained in this list is constantly changing it can be easily updated by clicking the Refresh button The list box can be navigated by using the vertical and horizontal scroll bars or you can click anywhere within the list box and use the ARROW keys for navigation You can sort information contained in the User Information list box by whichever column you choose Simply click once on the desired column to sort it in ascending order A Z or click twice to sort it in descending orde
44. Content Filter and Anti virus Filtering messages and scanning for viruses such as preventing spam email intercepting messages containing viruses before they reach their final destination copying certain emails to one or more additional users appending a note or disclaimer to the bottom of messages adding and deleting headers stripping email attachments deleting messages and more Because individual Content Filter rules are created by the administrator and because of their diversity they can be used in many situations and are limited for the most part only be the creativity of the person creating them With a little bit of thought and experimentation this feature can be very useful T he Content Filter dialog Setup gt Content Filter can be used for a large number of purposes MDaemon version 6 has integrated support for MDaemon AntiVirus Alt N Technologies in a joint effort with Kaspersky Labs a world renowned anti virus software developer has developed MDaemon AntiVirus an anti virus engine that can be installed and integrated with MDaemon When MDaemon AntiVirus is installed you will see two additional tabs on the Content Filter dialog These tabs are used to directly control the plug in s features and designate what actions MDaemon will take when a virus is detected To obtain MDaemon AntiVirus visit www altn com See page 177 for more on using MDaemon AntiVirus 165 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Content
45. Create Everyone mailing lists T Honor requests for account information I Auto responders are triggered by intra domain mail IV System generated messages use NULL reverse path I Apply content filter rules to list mail before cracking individual copies M POP IMAP and WorldClient passwords are case sensitive Tl Deleting users via MDConfig also removes their mail directory IV List pruner deletes messages that don t contain parsable addresses T List pruner saves messages which result in list member removal M Honor lt List gt subscribe and lt List gt unsubscribe addresses Subject header for new account welcome messages Welcome to the email system for domain DOMAINS Cancel Apply Enable disk checking for waiting message counts This switch governs whether MDaemon will check the disk to count waiting messages in the mail queues Doing so can cause excessive disk spin over the long term Process check for mail when server is first loaded If selected MDaemon will create a mail processing event when it first loads Use strict quotas count subdirectories and hidden files When this box is checked all files and subdirectories will apply toward any size or message number limitations placed on a user s account mailbox Otherwise only actual message files will count toward these limitations Do not send welcome message to new accounts By default MDaemon will generate a Welcome message based upon the welcome dat fi
46. Enter the address that you wish to suppress Wildcards are accepted therefore badmail com will suppress any message from any user at badmail com and frank will suppress any message from anyone named frank regardless of the domain the message is from Remove Click this button to remove an entry that you have selected in the Currently Suppressed Addresses display Add Click this button to add the designated user to the suppression list Options Refuse to accept mail during SMTP session When this control is enabled mail to the selected domain from a suppressed address will be refused during the SMTP transaction stage No mail to that domain from a suppressed address will ever be stored on your server even in temporary work files When this control is disabled messages will be accepted but then moved to the bad message queue This feature is set on a per domain basis it is not available for All Domains suppressed addresses Inform sender when their mail is rejected If selected a polite message will be routed back to the suppressed sender telling him or her that their message was deleted This feature is set on a per domain basis Note In order for this function to work a copy of the message must be downloaded during the SMTP session so that it can be parsed Consequently this option is incompatible with the Refuse to accept mail during SMTP session switch 110 SECURITY SETTINGS CHAP
47. IP they are using When this control is active currently shielded IP addresses will not apply to users that have been authenticated Mail will be accepted from them regardless of the IP address from which they are connecting Authenticated users are exempt from the POP before SMTP requirement If you are utilizing the POP before SMTP security feature below you may click this control to make authenticated users exempt from this restriction An authenticated user will not need to check his or her email before sending messages Authentication is always required when mail is from local accounts If the person sending a message claims to be from one of MDaemon s domains the account must first be authenticated or MDaemon will refuse to accept the message for delivery Global AUTH password If the Authenticated senders are valid regardless of the IP they are using control is enabled MDaemon accounts configured for dynamic NT authentication must use this global AUTH password for authentication instead of their normal NT password SECURITY SETTINGS 117 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS POP Before SMTP Security Settings 21x IP Shielding SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP POP Before SMTP a MV Local sender must have accessed mailbox within last 30 minutes Click here to force local users to check mail with POP IMAP or WorldClient before MDaemon will accept a message from them IV Messages collected via ATRAN are exempt from thi
48. MultiPOP mail collection Wy M Enable MultiPOP mail collection for this account kA MultiPOP will collect mail from other mail servers and pool it into your MDaemon mailbox Current MultiPOP host list for this account Password En Enabled weHNj DK Yes No amp mail myisp net myhome gt Server mail myisp net Add Logon myhome Password e Remove IV Enable this entry Enable M Use APOP Password field contains shared secret Replace V Leave a copy of message on POP server Delete messages once 200 or more have accumulated 0 never Don t download messages larger than 0 KB 0 no limit Cancel The MultiPOP feature located on the Account Editor allows you to script an unlimited number of POP host uset password combinations for collection of mail messages from multiple sources This is useful for your users who have mail accounts on multiple servers but would prefer to collect and pool all their email together in one place Before being placed in the user s mailbox MultiPOP collected mail is first placed in the local queue so that it can be processed like other mail having autoresponders and Content filters applied to it Note This editor uses advanced common controls that were not present in the original shipping versions of Windows 95 If the MultiPOP editor will not retain your settings then you need to download and install the newer common controls DLL file from Microsoft www microsoft com
49. Now that the domain company com has been installed as a client domain MDaemon will store all messages that it receives for that domain in the directory specified and in the format you have dictated tegardless of to whom the messages are directed In other words all mail for that domain will be pooled into a single directory on disk You will setup this directory and a POP account for the domain to access directly from the Gateway Editor by entering a name and password on the Gateway Editors POP Axess tab and then clicking the Create Update Account button All that remains is for the domain to collect its mail from MDaemon via its POP account This can be done by either a mail client or another MDaemon which could utilize its DomainPOP feature to further distribute the mail to the domain s users as would be the case in our example Alternatively you can use the controls on the ESMTP ETRN and ATRN AUTH tabs so that the domain could collect and distribute its mail to its users via ESMTP instead of POP or DomainPOP This all works perfectly for LAN and WAN based systems that can easily be configured to resolve an arbitrarily assigned domain name like the company com example However how can Internet email support be provided for company com if the domain doesn t really exist on the Internet There are two ways to cope with this problem First the domain can be registered with the Internet authorities and configured to resolve
50. RFC 822 message you would place this header lt Delivered By mail machine domain com gt in the RAW message Note that the header macro requires both the field and value You can place as many header macros as you need into a RAW message Sample RAW mail messages 1 from lt mdaemon altn com gt to lt JohnSmith somewhere com gt Hello John 2 from lt JohnSmith nowhere com gt to lt President Whitehouse gov gt subject lt Secret FBI Files gt X FLAG CONFIRM DELIVERY X FLAG ATTACH lt c secret files dole zip MIME gt X Here are all those files you asked for REMOTE SERVER CONTROL VIA EMAIL 317 CHAPTER 28 ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES Remote Server Control Via Email Many functions of MDaemon Server v6 can be accessed remotely using the email transport system itself For example users can gain access to various aspects of their accounts and change or reconfigure them by sending email messages to the server MDaemon maintains an account for its own use in the user base This account is reached by sending mail to the mailbox MDaemon MDaemonsDomain com Messages sent to the server are stored in the server s message directory just like any other user At queue run time the server will cycle through all the mail it has recetved and parse each message for special instructions Some of these control messages require a valid account on the server and are password protected Users
51. Remove Tuesday at 08 00 8 00 AM eee cece ee eee ormer Add Tuesday at 12 00 12 00 PM messages waiting in the outbound queue 00 ba Tuesday at 16 00 4 00 PM Clear all Wednesday at 00 00 12 00 AM M Always send mail if a waiting message is more Wednesday at 08 00 8 00 4M F Wednesday at 12 00 12 00 PM than 10 minutes old RAS setup cneccian at ANni nnp Zl HE coc a 138 CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP Local RAW System Mail Processing Interval Slide this bar left or right to specify the time interval between mail processing sessions It can be configured to count down from a range of 1 to 60 minutes after which time MDaemon will Process Local RAW and System Mail before beginning the countdown again By default this gauge only applies to Loai RAW and System Mail However by checking the Deliver remote mail at this interval also control it will apply to Remote Mail as well When this checkbox is cleared Remote Mail processing intervals will be determined by the other scheduling controls on the Event Scheduler Deliver collect remote mail at the above interval If this checkbox is selected the slide bar instead of the Scheduler will determine when Remote Mailis sent and or collected The rest of the controls in the Scheduler will be dimmed and will no longer apply to Remote Mail processing Deliver local mail immediately upon reception When this option is selected any Local RAW or Sys
52. STATE MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 CUSTOMER REMEDIES ALT N TECHNOLOGIES ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL ALT N TECHNOLOGIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT EVEN IF ALT N TECHNOLOGIES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 Chapter List MDaemon v6 0 15 MDaemon s Main Display 29 Primary Domain Configuration 34 Secondary Domains 62 Remote Configuration 67 WorldClient Server 74 LDaemon Address Book Options 93 Shared Folders Mail Queues 99 Security Settings 108 Header Translation 132 IP Cache and DNS Lookup 135 Scheduling and Dialup 138 DomainPOP Mail Collection 150 Content Filter and Anti virus 165 Priority Mail 186 Logging 188 System Service Settings 192 Miscellaneous Options 194 Managing MDaemon Accounts 214 Account Editor 221 Importing Accounts 249 Address Aliases 255 Auto Responders and MBF Files 258 Mailing Lists 268 Catalogs 286 Domain Gat
53. Select this option if you want MDaemon to use your LDAP server as the MDaemon user database rather than its local USERLIST DAT system You might want to use this method of maintaining your user information if you have multiple MDaemon servers at different locations but want them to share a single user database Each MDaemon server would be configured to connect to the same LDAP server in order to share user information rather than storing it locally Mirror account email addresses and full names to LDAP address book If you are using the default USERLIST DAT method of maintaining your account database rather than the LDAP server method you can still keep an LDAP server up to date on all of your users names and 94 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 7 LDAEMON ADDRESS BOOK OPTIONS email addresses by enabling this checkbox Thus you can use the LDAP server as a global address book system for your users without having to use it as a complete backend user database LDAP Server Properties Host name or IP Enter the host name or IP address of your LDAP server here RDN filter This control is used to generate the RDN for each user s LDAP entry The relative distinguished name RDN is the leftmost component in each entry s distinguished name DN For all peer entries those sharing a common immediate parent the RDN must be unique therefore we suggest using each user s email address as their RDN to avoid possible conflicts Using
54. Servers controls in the main display s tool window After changing this value you must press F5 or restart MDaemon before the change will be visible in the tool window This control cannot be set to anything less than 50 Max number of log lines displayed before router window refresh This is the maximum number of lines that will be displayed in the log window of the main display When this number of lines is reached the window will be cleared This has no affect on the log file Only the display will be cleared Max number of log lines displayed before session windows refresh This is the maximum number of lines that will appear in each session Connection window before it is cleared This has no affect on the log file Composite log window contains Located on the Windows menu of MDaemon s menu bar is a Composite log view option Clicking that option will add a window to the router that will combine the information displayed on one or more of the router s tabs Use the controls in this section to designate which tabs information to combine in that window The information contained on the following tabs can be combined NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 195 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS System Displays MDaemon s system activity such as initializing services and enabling disabling any of MDaemon s various servers SMTP All send receive session activity using the SMTP protocol is displayed on this tab IMAP Mail ses
55. TRANSLATION Currently Defined Header Translations This list contains the portions of text that MDaemon will scan for in the outbound message headers and the text that will be substituted when a match is found Remove Select an entry in the Current Header Translations list and then click this button to remove it from the list Exceptions Click this button to open the Header Translation Exceptions dialog This dialog is used for specifying any Headers that you wish to be omitted from the Header Translation process Header Translation Exceptions Header Translation Exceptions x Do not translate values in these headers Header value Add Except these headers RECEIVED Remove SUBJECT Bene Do Not Translate Values in These Headers Header value Enter any header that you want to be omitted from the Header Translation process Add Click this button to add a new header to the list Except These Headers MDaemon will not scan these headers when it is substituting header text Remove Select a header in the list and then click this button to remove it 134 HEADER TRANSLATION IP CACHE AND DNS LOOKUP Chapter IP Cache and DNS Lookup Using the IP Cahe and perorming DNS Lookups addresses of all hosts with which it comes in contact These IP s are stored and the cache is checked each time MDaemon requires a DNS resolution on a domain name If the domain name needing resolution is found in the IP cache t
56. Usually cookies are set to expire after a predetermined amount of time and are saved in memory until the web browser software is closed down at which time they may be saved to disk Cookies cannot read your hard drive They can however be used to gather information about you related to your usage of their particular web sites which would be impossible without them Dial up Networking A component in Windows that enables you to connect your computer to a network via a modem Unless your computer is connected to a Local Area Network LAN with access to the Internet you will need to configure Dial Up Networking DUN to dial a Point of Presence POP and log on to your Internet Service Provider ISP before you will have Internet access Your ISP may need to provide certain information such as the gateway address and your computer s IP address DUN is accessed through the My Computer icon A different dialup profile can be configured for each online service that you use Once configured you can copy a profile shortcut to your desktop so that all you need to do to make a connection is double click the connection icon Default This term is used to refer to the preset value for options in computer programs Default settings are those settings which are used when no specific setting has been designated by the user For example the default font setting in Netscape Communicator is Times This setting will remain Times unless you change
57. WorldClient entry and choose the Toggle Active Inactive selection on the shortcut menu 2 Click File gt Enable WorldClient server on the Message Router 3 Click Setup gt WorldClient RelayFax on the Message Router and then click Enable WorldClient Server on the Server Options tab Logging in to WorldClient 1 Point your web browser to http main or second domain com WCPortNumber This port is designated on the Server Options tab of the WorldClient RelayFax dialog page 78 If you configure WorldClient to listen to the default web port port 80 then you do not need to denote the port number in the login URL e g www mydomain com instead of www mydomain com 3000 2 Type your MDaemon account s user name and password 3 Click Sign in Changing WorldClient s Port Setting 1 Click Setup gt WorldClient RelayFax on the Message Router 2 Type the desired port number in the control labeled Run WorldClient Server using this TCP Port 3 Click OK WorldClient Documentation Client side Help WorldClient is equipped with extensive client side help for your users See the online help system within WorldClient for information on the client features and functions WorldClient User Manual and Help For complete information on WorldClient see the WorldClient User Manual and the client s online help system You can download the manual and other helpful documentation from Alt N Technologies web site at www altn com W
58. a consistent structure regardless of the source of the original message When the auto responder is setup on an account which is forwarding mail to another location and not retaining a local copy in its own mailbox see Forwarding page 226 then this function will be disabled Note 260 AUTO RESPONDERS CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES By default MDaemon will place the name of the message file as the last parameter on the command line You can override this behavior by using the SMESSAGES macro Use this macto in place of where the message file name should be placed This allows more flexibility in the use of this feature since a complex command line such as this will be possible logmail e j message MESSAGES q Add sender to this mailing list If a mailing list is entered in this field then the sender of the mail message will be automatically joined to that mailing list This is a very handy feature for building automatic lists Remove sender from this mailing list If a mailing list is entered in this field then the sender of the mail message will be automatically removed from the specified mailing list Tip Auto Response events are always honored when the triggering message is from a remote source For messages originating locally whether or not an Auto Responder will but triggered is contingent upon a setting on the Miscellaneous Options dialog page 194 The control is Auto Responders are triggered by Local as well a
59. addresses 0s sssessseseeseees 137 Loop Detection M Macro cscceecnsceeeeeeeeeeneeeseeseeeeeeseneenseeesnenees 264 Mail 2 cceecenecenseeeseeenseeeeseeeseeeseenseenseeeesseneens 150 DomainPOP Mail Collection 0 0000008 150 POP mail collection scceeeeseeeseeneeees 150 Mail Forwarding 296 Mail Queues sccseeenseneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeees 106 Mailing List and Catalog Control 319 Mailing list Editor Membership sseseeceseeeeseeeeeeeeneeseneeeees 271 Mailing List Editor Digest cscssceeceseeeeeeseneeeeenseeeseneeneensenseees 283 Message Routing sssssseeseseeeneeneeeeenees 273 Moderation 1 cscsseesseneeeseneeeeeeeneneeneneee 278 Notifications csscsseesenseneseneneeeeenenees 276 Public Folder c csssssssesseseseeeneeneeeeenees 285 Security Subscriptions ssssss 280 Support Files cscsccseseeseeenseeeeseeeeeeeenes 275 Main Window csceeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenseeeseneee 29 Manager s 214 Maximum Message Hop 46 maximum number of Messages 002008 299 MBF Files MBF Macros and Examples s scesssees00s 264 MDaemon FEACUIES 2 cseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeee MDaemon and Proxy Servers MDaemon AntiVirus cscseeeeeseeeeeee 165 177 Scheduler sscseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 138 180 Testing ssssssss222 5 138 180 U
60. and the NT domain name into an account s password field using the regular Account Editor if necessary The administrator need not restrict himself to using the importer in order to setup accounts for dynamic authentication 254 WINDOWS NT SECURITY ACCOUNT INTEGRATION CHAPTER 23 Chapter Address Aliases Setting up Address Ahases Editor makes it possible for you to create fictitious mailbox names for your accounts or mailing lists which is extremely useful when you want multiple mailbox names resolved to a single user account ot list For example if Frank altn com handled all billing inquiries to your domain but you wanted to tell everyone to send them to Billing altn com then you could create an Address Alias so that messages addressed to Billing altn com would actually go to Frank altn com Or if you were hosting multiple domains and wanted all messages addressed to the Postmaster regardless of the domain to go to a single user then you could create the alias Postmaster Henry altn com T he Accounts Address Aliases menu selection is used to open the Alias Editor The Alias Because a Postmaster must exist at each Internet mail site MDaemon will check your defined aliases at program startup and issue a warning if you have failed to create such an alias CHAPTER 22 ADDRESS ALIASES Alias Editor Define a new alias Address alias Harry example com Wildcards and are allowed here For examp
61. as if it is remote Spool all mail to IP of machine making ETRN request Selecting this option will cause MDaemon to send any stored mail to the IP address of the machine that made the ETRN request The requesting machine must be running an SMTP server to receive these messages Use this port when spooling mail Use this control to specify the port on which the domain s mail will be spooled IP Access Honor ETRN ATRN requests from these IPs Select this switch and MDaemon will honor ETRN ATRN requests made from any IP listed in the associated address list Ignore ETRN ATRN requests from these IPs Select this switch and MDaemon will ignore ETRN ATRN requests that are made from any IP listed in the associated address list Add new IP To add a New IP to the current list simply enter the IP into this text box and click the ADD button Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the list of IP addresses Tip Although there is nowhere on this screen to enter it you can control the SMTP envelope ID that MDaemon will use when spooling the domain s mail The following key controls this in the GATEWAYS DAT file GatewayDomainName EtrnAs address domain com GATEWAY EDITOR 293 CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS ATRN AUTH Gateway Editor notmycompany Mail Forwarding POP IMAP Quotas Domain Settings ESMTP ETAN ATRAN AUTH ESMTP ATAN V Respond to ESMTP ATRAN commands for this domain
62. be listed at the beginning of the document with references or hyperlinks in online FAQs to the location of the question and answer in the document FAQs are frequently used as a starting point for technical support and instructions a great deal of time and effort can be saved if you have access to a FAQ that answers your question instead of being forced to contact technical support File Transfer Protocol See FTP below Firewall In computer terminology a firewall exists when you undertake security measures through either software or hardware means to separate a computer network into two or more parts or otherwise limit access to it to certain users For example you might want to let everyone view the home page of a web site hosted on your network but allow only your employees to get to an employee only area Regardless of the method that you use to accomplish this trequiring a password allowing connections from only certain IP addresses or the like the employee area is said to be behind a firewall FTP Acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a common and efficient method of transferring files via the Internet from one computer to another There are specific client server applications designed for this purpose called FTP servers and FTP clients FTP Voyager and CuteFTP are two of the most common clients Usually FTP clients can perform quite a few other functions besides simply transferring files and are t
63. can gain access to their accounts using their account password and the messages to the server must be directed to MDaemon mydomain com For those commands which require a valid account on the server the Subject field of the message must contain the user s email address and password separated with a comma character e g Bill mydomain com MyPassword Commands are placed within the body of the message There can be only one command per line but multiple commands can be batched in the same message Account Access and Control The following section lists the current account access and control commands available to account holders All of these commands require a POP Name POP Password construction in the subject line Parameters contained in brackets are optional For example name address could be entered as Lois alone or with the optional parameter added Lois LLane dailyplanet com COMMAND PARMS DESCRIPTION ACCOUNT INFO none The status of the account passed in the subject line is mailed back to the originator Ex ACCOUNT INFO PASSWORD new password The password of the account passed in the subject line will be changed to the one specified Ex POP PASSWORD kryptonite MAILFORMAT MBF file The mailbox storage format of the account specified in subject line will be changed to the one specified A listing of the available formats can be obtained via the MAIL FORMATS command see General Email Contro
64. checkbox if you want the SMTP server to refuse mail that uses a NULL return path Remember states of SMTP POP IMAP servers across server reboots If this control is enabled MDaemon will ensure that the state of its servers enabled or disabled remains the same after a reboot POPAMAP servers honor APOP CRAM MDS authentication methods NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 197 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS Enable this control if you want MDaemon s POP and IMAP servers to honor the APOP and CRAM MD5 methods of authentication These methods provide extra security by making it possible for users to be authenticated without sending clear text passwords POP DELE command immediately removes messages from mailbox Click this switch and MDaemon will delete immediately messages that a user has retrieved even if the POP session does not complete properly Hide ESMTP SIZE command parameter Click this checkbox if you want the ESMTP SIZE command parameter to be hidden SMTP sends 552 response to over quota condition normally 452 Enabling this control will cause a 552 response Requested mail action aborted exceeded storage allocation when delivery is attempted to a recipient whose account exceeds its quota Normally there would be a 452 response Requested action not taken insufficient system storage POP IMAP servers always accept connections from IP IP address The POP and IMAP servers will always accept connections from the IP Addre
65. comparison being made it will determine which messages should be moved to the rule s specified folder Comparison drop down list box This is the type of comparison that will be made when a message s headers are compared to the IMAP Mail Rule MDaemon will search the specified header for the text contained in the This x field and then proceed based upon this control s setting does the header s complete text match exactly not match exactly contain the text not contain it at all start with it and so on This text Enter the text that you want MDaemon to search for when scanning the message header that you have specified for the rule Then move message to this folder After specifying the various parameters for the rule click the folder that you want messages matching it to be moved to and then click the Add rule button to create it New folder Click this button to create a new folder This will open the Create Folder dialog on which you will assign a name for the folder If you want it to be a subfolder of an existing folder then choose the folder from the drop down list Create Folder x Create folder New folder name My new folder Create as sub folder of ROOT x Cancel ACCOUNT EDITOR 241 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR MultiPOP Account Editor Frank Thomas 21x Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders
66. cyberspace 7012 What I don t understand that 7013 0k message saved 7014 S s is not a valid maildrop Please check the address and try again 7015 Sorry try later Can t create temporary mail file 7016 RSET Well OK 7017 Why is there an NOOP instruction 7018 Yeah I know that one He or she is s lt s gt 7019 lt s gt Never heard of em 7020 lt s gt There s more than one possible match to that query on this server 7021 Yeah there s a list here by that name Mail to lt s gt 7022 lt s gt There s no mailing list here by that name 7023 lt Ss gt There s more than one possible match to that query on this server 7024 Hey I don t let remote systems TURN on me 7025 Help system currently inactive 7033 Ss Hello s did you know your name is really s 7034 Unexpected command or sequence of commands 7037 Sorry SMTP server too busy right now d Try again later 7038 SMTP session successful ld bytes transferred 7039 SMTP session abnormally terminated ld bytes transferred 7041 Sending lt s gt to s 7042 Connection timed out 7043 Spooling mail to default gateway 7044 This server does not accept routed mail 7046 Node lt s gt does not store mail here 7047 Your IP address lt s gt does not have access to node lt
67. dialdown engine Dialup only if remote mail is waiting in outbound queue M Notify Postmaster when dialup attempts fail Dialup attempts YS Make this many attempts to establish a session 4 After dialing wait this many seconds for a valid connection 60 Connection persistence oe C Once established MDaemon will not close the RAS session Lae Keep sessions alive for at least 1 minutes 0 immediate close If applicable you should use the option that has MDaemon leave RAS sessions open If you need to close the session based on inactivity use the settings for this provided by Windows itself Cancel Apply Dialup Control Enable RAS dialup dialdown engine Selecting this option will cause MDaemon to use the settings specified here to make a connection to a remote host before sending and or receiving remote mail Dialup only if remote mail is waiting in outbound queue When this switch is checked MDaemon will not dial up the ISP unless there is remote mail waiting in the Remote queue This may be beneficial in some circumstances but be aware that if MDaemon does not dial up then it cannot do any mail collecting either unless it is delivered across the local LAN Notify address when dialup attempts fail When selected MDaemon will send a message to the specified address when a dialup event fails because of some error Dialup Attempts RAS DIALUP SETTINGS 143 CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP Make th
68. different domain without first applying them a box will appear asking you to choose whether or not you wish to save the changes before switching to the new domain Click Yes to save the changes or No to discard them WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 81 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Set to defaults This option resets a domain to the Default settings Use the Select domain control to select a domain and then click Set to defaults to restore it Language MDaemon PRO only Use the drop down list box to choose the default language in which the WorldClient interface will appear when your users first sign in to the selected domain Users can change their personal language setting through an option in Options gt Personalize within WorldClient Theme MDaemon PRO only Use this drop down list box to designate the default WorldClient theme to use for the client interface when the selected domain s users first sign in The users can personalize the theme setting from the Options Personalize page within the client Date format Use this text box to designate how dates will be formatted for the selected domain Click the Help button to display a list of macro codes that can be used in this text box You can use the following macros in this control A Full weekday name B Full month name d Day of month displays as 01 31 m Month displays as 01 12 y 2 digit year Y 4 digit year For example
69. engine which can be reached through the MDaemon menu selection Accounts Import From NT SAM Database Additionally support for dynamic authentication of users has been embedded into the MDaemon user management code It is possible to specify an NT domain in an account s password field and then MDaemon will dynamically authenticate such accounts in real time using the specified NT domain s security system Under such a scheme changing the account s password in the Windows NT User Manager will have the effect of automatically updating MDaemon Therefore your users will only have to remember one set of authentication credentials This also makes for very easy account setup for new installations w Important The security context of the account running MDaemon must have the SE_TCB_NAME privilege If the process is a service running in the Local System account it will have this privilege by default Otherwise it must be set by the following procedure Run the User Manager NT Administration tool and select User Rights from the Policies menu NOTE You must select the Show Advanced User Rights check box to see the SE_TCB_NAME privilege The correct privilege SE_TCB_NAME is labeled To Act as Part of the Operating Systen Select this and Add this right to the account under which MDaemon operates If you add this right you may need to restart MDaemon before it takes affect See Microsoft articles Q10
70. exceptions to this setting by using the text boxes below labeled These users always never have permission to create global memos These users always have permission to create global memos Use this control to enter the email addresses of WorldClient users whom you wish to be treated as exceptions when AX domain users can create global memos is set to No The specified users will be able to create global memos Separate multiple addresses by commas These users never have permission to create global memos Use this control to enter the email addresses of WorldClient users whom you wish to be treated as exceptions when AV domain users can create global memos is set to Yes The specified users will not be able to create global memos Separate multiple addresses by commas These users always have permission to read global memos Use this control to enter the email addresses of WorldClient users whom you wish to be treated as exceptions when AX domain users can read global memos is set to No The specified users will be able to read global memos Separate multiple addresses by commas These users never have permission to read global memos Use this control to enter the email addresses of WorldClient users whom you wish to be treated as exceptions when A domain users can read global memos is set to Yes The specified users will not be able to read global memos Separate multiple addresses by commas
71. files of the same name that may already be in the queue MDaemon always calculates the next destination filename based on the HIWATER MRK file located in the destination folder Delete When one or more files are selected in the Queue Status List Box click this button to delete the selected files After clicking this button a confirmation box will open asking if you really do wish to delete the selected files Note Mail queues ate dynamic while MDaemon is active with message files constantly being transferred to and from them For this reason you should be aware that when copying moving or deleting files you may at times encounter a message from MDStats stating that it cannot complete the action that you are attempting This will occur when the message file that you are attempting to work with has already been removed by MDaemon before the desired action has begun By clicking the Refresh button you can update the current list of files displayed in the list box You can prevent messages from being moved out of the queue while you are editing them by editing the MDstats ini file To do this simply open the MDstats ini file located in MDaemon s app directory and change the LockOnEdit No key under the QueueOptions heading to LockOnEdit Yes This will cause a LCK file to be created whenever you are editing a message which will prevent it from being moved out of the queue until you are finished with it 306 AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION
72. folders The users that can access them and the level of access granted is designated under each folder on the Shared Folders tab of the Account Editor Accounts gt Account Manager gt User Account on MDaemon s menu bar Clear this check box if you want to prevent users from being able to share access to their folders Shared IMAP folder prefix string ex or User Shared user folders are prefixed with a sequence of up to 20 characters such as or User This is to help users easily distinguish shared from private folders from within their email client software Use this text box to specify the series of characters that you wish to use to denote shared user folders SHARED IMAP FOLDERS 101 CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Public Folders Shared IMAP Folders AES Shared Folders Public Folders IMAP folders Submission Address Support No Support example com Family Yes lt none gt New IMAP folder Remove Folder name Family IV Store IMAP message flags on a per user basis Submission address lt none gt Mail sent to this address will route directly into this folder note sender must have post access Create Replace Edit access control list Creating removing or changing entries cannot be undone by clicking Cancel Cancel Apply IMAP Folders Displayed in this area is each public IMAP folder that you have created the Per user flags setting
73. following Access Control Rights Lookup l user can see this folder in their personal list of IMAP folders Read r user can open this folder and view its contents Write w user can change flags on messages in this folder Insert i user can append and copy messages into this folder Create c user can create subfolders within this folder Delete d user can delete messages from this folder Set Seen Flag s user can change the read unread status of messages in this folder Administer a user can administer the ACL for this folder Post p user can send mail directly to this folder if folder allows Help Click He p to display a list of the access rights and their definitions 248 ACCOUNT EDITOR IMPORTING ACCOUNTS Chapter Importing Accounts Importing user accounts into MDaemon Daemon Server v6 supports multiple methods of importing user accounts They may be imported from an NT SAM database an SLMail user database or directly from a text file MDaemon s import features are reached from the Accounts gt Import menu selection Importing Accounts From a Text File Click the Accounts gt Importing gt Import accounts from a comma delimited text file menu selection to access this account generation feature It can also be reached by clicking the Import button on the Account Manager page 214 This is a simple method for importing and automatically generating mail accounts
74. for American Standard Code for Information Interchange It is the worldwide standard code for representing all upper and lower case Latin letters numbers and punctuation as a 7 digit binary number with each character assigned a number from 0 to 127 ie 0000000 to 1111111 For example the ASCII code for uppercase M is 77 The majority of computers use ASCII codes to represent text which makes it possible for them to transfer data to other computers Most text editors and word processors are capable of storing files in ASCII format sometimes called ASCII files However most data files particularly those containing numeric data are not stored in ASCII format Several larger character sets have 128 additional characters because they use 8 bits instead of 7 These extra characters are used to represent symbols and non English characters The DOS operating system uses a superset of ASCII called extended ASCII or high ASCII A standard that is closer to universal however is ISO Latin 1 which is used by many operating systems and Web browsers ATRN Scee ETRN and ODMR below Attachment A file attached to an email message Most email systems only support sending text files as email therefore if the attachment is a binary file or formatted text file e g a word processor document it must first be encoded as text before it is sent and then decoded once it is recetved There are a number of encoding schemes two of the most prevalent
75. for your domain s users Appointments and meetings can be designated as public or private giving you complete control over which users if any ate allowed to see them By simply selecting a user s name from a drop down list you can see that uset s calendar and review all events to which you have been giving access If you have been giving write access permission to that user s calendar you can even schedule events for them Because the Calendar system is integrated with MDaemon there is the added benefit of email notifications of meetings and third party scheduled appointments Whenever someone other than yourself schedules an appointment for you you will recetve an email message summarizing the appointment For 74 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER meetings each designated meeting attendee will receive an email message detailing the meeting s date time location subject and list of attendees Further any attendees who have calendar entries that conflicted with the meeting s timeslot will recetve a message notifying them of the meeting and its conflict with their schedule The person who scheduled the meeting will recetve a summary message listing all of the meeting s details and invited attendees who did or did not have scheduling conflicts Finally using the Calendar s Auto scheduling feature conflicts can be avoided altogether by allowing the calendar system to search for the first available timeslot with no scheduling conf
76. from restricted addresses will be returned to the sender Sent to postmaster Messages that are restricted will be accepted but delivered to the postmaster instead of the designated recipient ACCOUNT EDITOR 233 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Web Account Editor Frank Thomas 21x Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders Web based mail access MV Account can access email via WorldClient be Click here and the account will be able to access mail via the web Web based remote configuration permissions MV Account can modify its own settings via WebAdmin This account has administrator level access to WebAdmin amp calendars T Edit real name I Edit EVERYONE list setting IV Edit password I Edit mail restrictions Tl Edit mail directory location I Edit quota settings V Edit forwarding address lV Edit MultiPOP settings T Edit advanced forwarding IV Edit autoresponder settings J Edit encrypt mail setting T Edit allow changes via email V Edit IMAP rules PRO version only Apply defaults Web based Mail Access Account can access_email via WorldClient Enable this checkbox if you want the account to be able to access the WorldClient server which enables them to check their email using a web browser Web based Remote Configuration Permissions Account can modify its own settings via the WebAdmin Enable this fe
77. have been downloaded and a test feature used for confirming that you your virus scanning is working properly Scanner info This section tells you whether MDaemon AntiVirus is installed and if so what version you are running It also lists the date of your last virus definition update Updater Configuration Activate urgent updates Click this checkbox to activate the urgent updates feature With this feature enabled AntiVirus will immediately connect to the update location and download the high priority update whenever MDaemon receives an Urgent Update message To receive these messages you must first subscribe to the Urgent Updates mailing list See the Subscribe control below 180 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Subscribe This button to opens your default browser to Alt N Technologies Urgent Updates subscription page On that page enter your domain name to subscribe your domain to the Urgent Updates mailing list Whenever there is an urgent update to MDaemon AntiVirus s virus definitions an email will be dispatched to the domain When MDaemon receives the message MDaemon AntiVirus will be updated immediately Update AV signatures now Click this button to update the virus definitions manually The updater will connect immediately after the button is pressed Configure updater Click this button to open the updater The Updater contains three tabs Update URLs Connection and Pr
78. header list Add Add the header listed in the New Header control to the list 156 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Processing DomainPOP Mail Collection 24x Routing Rules Foreign Mail Security Account Parsing Name Matching Processing Domain name replacement V Enable domain name replacement engine When an address is parsed from one of the headers defined on the Parsing tab its domain name will be instantly converted to this one M yLocalDomain mail IV Ignore unknown local addresses parsed from messages Elaborate parsing can lead to a lot of No Such User postmaster notifications Click this switch if you wish unknown local addresses to simply be ignored when they are parsed from the message Address filtering Always strip the IV Strip text from left side of address following text from all parsed addresses Strip text from right side of address Some pre text Strip text from anywhere in the address Cancel Apply Domain Name Replacement Enable domain name replacement engine This option is an attempt to cut down on the number of domain aliases your site will require When a message is downloaded all domain names in all addresses which are parsed from that message are instantly transformed into the one specified here Ignore unknown local addresses parsed from messages As mentioned above the Domain Name Replacement feature will alter the domain na
79. in the first place Cancel Apply Use Setup Security Settings Address Suppression to edit the addresses on the suppression list This list contains addresses that are not allowed to send mail traffic through your server If a message arrives from an address on this list it will either be accepted and moved to the bad message queue or refused during the SMTP session and thus never accepted at all depending upon your settings This is useful for controlling problem users Addresses may be suppressed on a per domain basis or globally applied to all MDaemon domains Currently Suppressed Addresses This window displays all currently suppressed addresses listed by the domain that is suppressing them New Suppression Entry Domain name Choose the domain to which this suppressed address will apply In other words what domain do you want to prevent from receiving mail from the suppressed address Choose All Domains from this list to suppress the address globally Note Messages arriving from addresses listed in the All Domains category will be accepted and then moved to the bad message queue Messages from addresses listed under specific SECURITY SETTINGS 109 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS domains will be handled according to that domain s suppression settings See Refuse to accept mail during SMTP session and Inform sender when their mail is rejected below for more suppression options Email address
80. into their own directory on the other computer CFEngine exe CFilter dll CFilter exe MDCONFIG EXE M M amu G Tt G hral G H H DUSER DLL DUserLdap dll NTUtil DLL and XCeedZip DLL files into their own directory on the other computer Further MDConfig uses CTL3D and Borland Custom Control DLL files These files were installed along with MDConfig on the original computer The files you need are CTL3D DLL and BWCC DLL from the original computer s Windows System directory They need to be placed into the new computer s Windows System directory not in the same directory as MDCONFIG EXE and MDUSER DLL For Windows 95 systems the directory is windows system For NT4 machines it is windows system32 MDCONFIG REMOTE CONFIGURATION CLIENT 73 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Chapter WorildClient Server Setting up and using the WorldChent Server Overview offer users email client functionality using their favorite web browser All of their email folders reside on the server so that they have access to everything as if they were at the office WorldClient can easily hold its own against traditional mail clients while providing the added bonus of its ability to enable users to access their email from anywhere at anytime ncluded in MDaemon v6 is WorldClient WorldClient is a web based email solution designed to There are many ways in which WorldClient can be used Use it to keep your mobile staff in touch w
81. is enabled MDaemon will always relay mail when it is sent via an authenticated SMTP session Mail can always be relayed through domain gateways Enable this checkbox if you want MDaemon to permit mail relaying through domain gateways regardless of your Relay Control settings This feature is disabled by default and isn t recommended 126 RELAY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Trusted Hosts Security Settings 24x Relay Settings Trusted Hosts Reverse Lookup Domain and IP permissions These domains can be trusted and are exceptions to the no relay rules Trusted domains Trusted IP addresses Deerfield com WaT Ta MDaemon com 127 0 0 2 myhome com Wildcards like 192 168 0 are ok New trusted domain New trusted IP address Add Remove Add Remove Cancel Apply Domain and IP Permissions Trusted domains Domains that you list here are exceptions to the no relay rule These domains are trusted by your server and MDaemon will not refuse to relay mail for their users New trusted domain Enter a new domain name to be added to the Trusted Domains list Add Click this button to add the new domain to the Trusted Domains list Remove Click this button to remove the selected entries from the Trusted Domains list Trusted IP addresses IP addresses that you list here are exceptions to the no relay rule These IP addresses are trusted by your server and MDaemon will not refuse to
82. is needless and a great deal of processor power can be WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 25 CHAPTER 2 26 conserved by skipping this needless step However if the Sp X Headers from local messages checkbox is enabled then MDaemon has no choice but to send all the messages through the script processor So enable that switch only if you need it The MDUSERDLL_EDITLOCALONLY bit mask in the API was changed to mote accurately reflect its function It is now MDUSERDLL_EDITMAILRESTRICTIONS Also the MD SetEditLocalOnly and MD GetEditLocalOnly functions in the API were changed to MD SetEditMailRestrictions and MD GetEditMailRestrictions to more accurately reflect their function These changes may cause you to need to recompile your custom software applications The MD GetDBPath function has changed in the API COM object It now returns void instead of bool This may require you to alter any applications you have written which uses this function Version 5 Special Notes In order to reduce the size of the installer the MDaemon User Manual is no longer included The manual and other documentation is now available for download at http www altn com Documentation Because ORBS is out of business and because MAPS RBL DUL RSS have moved to a fee based structure the Spam Blocker has been reconfigured with a new set of default hosts If you d like to use the new
83. it from the list New host If you wish to add a new host to be queried for blacklisted IP addresses enter it here Message This is the message that will be sent when an IP address has been blacklisted by the New Host Add After entering a New Host and Message click this button to add it to the Spam Blocker Hosts list 122 SPAM BLOCKER CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Spam Blocker Caching Spam Blocker 21x Spam Blocker Engine Spam Blocker Hosts Spam Blocker Caching Caching options MV Automatically cache Spam Blocker results Warming Caching the results of a these lookups is not recommended by the folks who maintain these databases Since a blacklisted host can right itself in a matter of minutes we recommend you keep the Default Time To Live value to a minimum See http www mail abuse org for details on the implications of caching Enter new cached entry IP address IP address to place in cache Default time to live in minutes 60 9999 never expire I Automatically cached entries use default time to live also Maximum cached entries 50 Currently cached entries 123 123 123 123 for 15 more minutes 111 222 111 222 for 8 more minutes Remove 222 222 222 222 for 2 more minutes Clear Cancel Apply Spam Blocker Caching Engine Automatically cache Spam Blocker results Enable this control if you want to cache those IP addresses that receive a positive Le b
84. it to something else Default settings are usually the value that most people will choose Frequently the term default is also used as a verb If a custom setting won t work or the program lacks some needed bit of data for completing a task it will usually default to a specific setting or action DHCP An acronym for Dynamic Host Control Protocol Network servers use this protocol to dynamically assign IP addresses to networked computers A DHCP server waits for a computer to connect to it and then assigns it an IP address from a stored list DHCP is addressed in RFC 2131 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2131 txt Domain Gateway See Gateway below Domain Name This is the unique name that identifies an Internet web site For example altn com is the domain name of Alt N Technologies Each domain name contains two or more parts separated by dots the leftmost part is the most specific while the rightmost part is the most general Each domain name also points to the IP address of a single server but a single server may have more than one domain name For example mail altn com alt n com and somedomain com could all point to the same server as altn com but altn com could not point to two different servers There are however methods for designating alternate servers to which clients will be directed if the main server goes down or is otherwise unavailable
85. its accompanying password in order to gain administrator access to the remote configuration process This level of access permits changes to every configuration aspect of MDaemon 68 SETTING UP REMOTE CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 REMOTE CONFIGURATION Password This password must be provided along with the Administrator logon in order to gain administrator access to remote configuration Supervisor When this logon with its accompanying password is sent by MDConfig supervisor access to remote configuration will be granted This level of access permits changes to accounts and account related functions within MDaemon such as auto responders account aliases and account settings Password This password must accompany the Supervisor Name in order for the client to gain supervisor level access to remote configuration Only allow connections from these IPs The IP addresses listed here are the only ones from which MDaemon will accept a remote configuration connection Wildcards are permitted New IP address To add an IP address from which you wish to allow Remote Configuration enter the IP address here and then click the Add button Add Click this button to add an IP Address that you have entered into the New IP Address text box Remove Click this button to remove a selected IP address from the display window MDConfig Backup directory If specified MDaemon will backup original copies of updated configuration files to this directory
86. list messages then specify it here 200 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS e Fixes Miscellaneous Options 20x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MuliPOP WAB Misc Various fixes and work arounds IV Fix MS Internet Mail build 1160 bug i Set this switch to strip r n rin character sequences from the end of messages This sequence causes problems for the above mail client IV Fix Qutlook missing From field bug Set this switch and MDaemon will add a missing From header using the address found in the Sender header This works around bugs in MS Outlook IV Fix Netscape Messenger and Pegasus Mail bugs Set this switch and MDaemon will strip yn amp ine amp Arrin from the end of messages These character sequences cause errors for the above mail clients M Strip NULLs EOF chars and allow LF LF to mark end of message M Use safe UIDL hash method Cancel Apply Various Fixes and Work Arounds Fix MS Internet mail build 1160 bug This switch has been added in an attempt to deal with the Microsoft Internet Mail problem of messages not appearing on the display after they are downloaded With this switch turned on MDaemon will strip consecutive CRLFCRLF sequences from the end of the message body Three sets of CRLF pairs at the tail end of a message file is the cause of the Microsoft problem Fix MS Outlook missing from field bug Some versions of Microsoft Ou
87. mailto lt List gt Unsubscribe domain com gt Some mail clients can pick up on this and make an UNSUBSCRIBE button available to users automatically Enhanced MultiPOP Collection Options Weve added a new collection method for MultPOP mail You can now elect to collect MultiPOP dynamically What this means is that MultiPOP mail for a particular user will be collected the next time that user checks his local MDaemon mailbox either via POP IMAP or WorldChient In this way mail is only collected for those users who are checking for it It s important to note that when a user connects to MDaemon to check for new mail this act initiates a MultiPOP collection event Messages collected by that event will not be available to the user until the next time he or she checks for new messages In order to further reduce the load that extensive use of MultiPOP can sometimes place on your MDaemon an option to restrict the number of MultiPOP collections per user per hour has been added to Setup gt Miscellaneous Options gt MultiPOP Further an option to specify a number of minutes to place between back to back MultiPOP collection events has also been added Additionally when you specify DomainPOP or MultiPOP hosts to collect mail from you can override the default outbound POP port by appending a new port value to the host name For example using mail example com as a MultiPOP host will connect to that host using the default outbound POP port whil
88. message is originating Sometimes however it is the address to which error messages should be directed instead Refuse to accept mail if a reverse lookup returns domain not found When a lookup results in domain not found enabling this option will cause the message to be refused with a 451 error code Requested action aborted local error in processing and then the session will be allowed to progress normally to its conclusion send 501 error code normally sends 451 error code Enable this checkbox if you want the error code that is sent in response to a domain not found result to be 501 syntax error in parameters or arguments instead of 451 and then shut down the socket connection Click this checkbox if you want the connection to be shutdown immediately instead of allowed to progress when domain not found is the result of the reverse lookup Insert X Lookup Warning header into suspicious messages Click this checkbox if you want a header to be inserted into messages that are considered suspicious due to the results of the reverse lookup You can edit the name and content of the header by editing the following MDaemon ini key 130 RELAY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Special LookupWarningHeader X LookupWarning text If you edit this value MDaemon will allow you to make the X LookupWarning text portion anything that you want but be certain that your alterations conform to RFC
89. none A copy of the help dat is processed and mailed back to the message originator address The results of subsequent instructions are redirected to the email address specified rather than to that of the message originator Ex RESULTS TO someone somewhere com LIST MDSUPP none A status report on server operations and current conditions will be mailed back to the message originator Since the information contained in this status report is considered private the subject of the requesting message must contain the MDCONFIG Administrator level user and password such as Administrator Password Ex STATUS REMOTE SERVER CONTROL VIA EMAIL CHAPTER 28 ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES MAIL FORMATS none A listing of all the supported mailbox formats will be mailed back to the originator Ex MAIL FORMATS GET ADDRESS none MDaemon will send a message back to the originator which will contain the current machine name and IP address assigned to MDaemon s computer This is useful when you want to find out the IP address assigned by your ISP when using a dynamic dial up situation Since the information contained in this message is considered private the subject of the requesting message must contain the MDCONFIG Administrator level user and password such as Administrator Password Ex GET ADDRESS MDaemon and Proxy Servers MDaemon Server v6 has been purposely designed to be highly versatile Consequently it can be configured for use with a wide variety of
90. not be deleted regardless of their age Note When old messages are pruned rather than actually delete them MDaemon will move them to the BADMSGS Mailbox folder where they can be manually deleted later by the administrator or a nightly process This only applies to pruned old messages when an account is pruned it will be deleted along with its messages instead of moved See AccountPrune txt in the MDaemon App folder for more information and command line options ACCOUNT EDITOR 231 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Restrictions Account Editor Frank Thomas 24x Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP Shared Folders Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Inbound mail restrictions gt IV This account can t receive messages from the outside world Ke except if from one of these addresses New address altn com frankdomain com mdaemon com Remove Messages from unauthorized sources should be Refused z Outbound mail restrictions IV This account can t send messages to the outside world except if to one of these addresses New address altn com frankdomain com mdaemon com Add Remove Messages to unauthorized sources should be Refused 7 Cancel Use the controls on this tab to govern whether or not the displayed account will be able to send or receive mail to or from non local domains domains located somewhere other t
91. of simply switching the main window to the compose screen Clear the box if you do not want separate windows to open Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Compose page within WorldClient Empty trash on exit This option causes the user s trash to be emptied when he or she signs out from WorldClient Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Personalize page within WorldClient WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 83 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Use advanced compose Click this option to cause the Advanced Compose rather than the normal Compose screen to be opened by default for the domain s users Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Compose page within WorldClient Enable ComAgent support This option makes the ComAgent messaging utility available to the selected domain s users They can download it from the Options gt ComAgent page within WorldClient The downloaded installation file will be automatically customized for each user s account to make installation and setup easier Enable Instant Messaging MDaemon PRO only Click this option if you want to activate ComAgent s instant messaging IM system for the selected domain s users Clear the check box if you want the instant messaging controls to be unavailable Log all IM traffic at the server level MDaemon PRO only Click this check box if you want all of the selected domain s instant messaging traf
92. on Digest mail Read only Click this button after selecting a list member to give their membership Read Only status They will still receive messages from the list but will not be allowed to send them to it Post only no mail Clicking this button after selecting a member will set their membership to Post Only They will be allowed to send messages to the list but will not receive any MAILING LIST EDITOR 271 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS New member email Enter the email address of the person you wish to add to the mailing list Member s addresses cannot contain P or ia as New member real name Enter the member s name in this field This name will appear in the To field of their list messages when the Replace TO field with member s full name option is selected on the Options tab Normal Digest Read only Post only Click the option that you want to be applied to the New Member s Email Address Add This button adds the entry in the New Member s Email Address control to the Current Members list Default Click any one of the options next to this button Normal Digest Read Only Post Onh and then click the button to make that option the default setting for new members Automatically remove dead addresses from list membership When this feature is enabled MDaemon will automatically remove an address from the Members list when it encounters a permanent fatal error while attempting de
93. operate However in MDaemon 6 0 HS support has been added to WorldClient thus it can now function as an ISAPI DLL To configure WorldClient to operate under IIS 1 Stop WorldClient WorldClient cannot run using the included web server and in IS at the same time 2 Create a web site or virtual directory in IIS for the WorldClient HTML directory 3 Enable Scripts and executables permission and set WorldClient d1i as the default document 4 Using Windows Explorer give Full Control access to your MDaemon directory to the IWAM_ComputerName account 5 Ifyou have any email accounts that use NT domain authentication edit your Local Security Policy to give IWAM ComputerName the Act as part of the operating system user right 6 If you are also running WebAdmin under HS edit WorldClient s Domains ini located in MDaemon WorldClient and set the WebAdminURL key in the Default Settings section to the URL of WebAdmin 7 In MDaemon go to Setup gt WorldClient RelayFax gt Server Options and then click WorldClient is running under ITS Note When running WorldClient under HS you will no longer be able to start and stop it from MDaemon s interface You must use the tools provided with HS to do so 80 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 Domain Options WORLDCLIENT SERVER WorldClient RelayFax Properties 21x Server Options Domain Options Address Book Calendar amp Scheduling RelayFax
94. option will allow all host other than those specified in the address listing to connect and deliver messages Attempts to connect by a host specified in the address listing will be refused and immediately aborted This option is useful for excluding hosts that cause problems for your mail transport system Add Click this button to add the host to the list Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the list Default for Undefined Hosts Undefined hosts can connect to this local IP When this option is chosen all hosts not listed in the host screen will be allowed to connect to the specified IP address Undefined hosts cannot connect to this local IP When this option is chosen only those hosts specifically granted permission in the host screen will be allowed to connect to the specified IP address 114 SECURITY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS IP Shielding Security Settings x IP Shielding SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP Currently defined domain IP pairs IV Messages to valid local users are exempt from domain IP matching altn com 1 1 1 1 altn com 2 2 2 2 somedomain com 127 0 0 Remove Domain name IP address Add Wildcards like altn com and 192 168 0 ok When a message claims to be from one of these domains fie MAIL FROM mailbox domain com then the IP address delivering the message must be equal to the corresponding value specified here Cancel Apply Use t
95. page 222 Default Quota Settings These controls are used for designating default values for a new account s quota settings For more information on these controls see Account Editor page 222 Apply Installation Defaults to All Template Values Clicking this button will cause the controls contained on this tab to be reset to their original installation default settings Template Macros Below is a quick reference to the macros available for automating your account setup DOMAIN This variable will resolve to the domain name selected for the account DOMAINIP This variable will resolve to the IP associated with the domain currently selected for the account USERNAME This variable resolves to the full first and last name of the account holder This field is equivalent to SUSERFIRSTNAME USERLASTNAME USERFIRSTNAME This variable resolves to the first name of the account holder USERLASTNAME This variable resolves to the last name of the account holder USERFIRSTINITIAL This variable resolves to the first letter of the account holder s first name USERLASTINITIAL This variable resolves to the first letter of the account holder s last name MAILBOX This variable resolves to the mailbox name of the current account The value will also used as the POP user name used in POP3 mail sessions This is the value expected in the USER command during POP session handshaking NEW ACCOUNT DEFAULTS 217 CHAPTER 19 MAN
96. process to terminate I Run process in a hidden window Note Specifying 1 seconds will suspend server operations until the executing process has returned Enter 0 to not wait at all Cancel Apply Local Remote Queue Pre processing Just before processing the local remote mail queue run this program This field specifies a program path and name that will be executed just prior to the processing and delivery of any RFC 822 messages that might be in the local or remote message queues If complete path information is not provided MDaemon will first search for the executable in the MDaemon directory then in the Windows System directory next in the Windows directory and finally the directories listed in the PATH environment variable suspend all operations for xx seconds The value entered here determines how MDaemon will behave while the specified program is in progress MDaemon can be configured to pause its execution thread for the number of seconds specified while waiting for the process thread to return If the process returns before the number of seconds has elapsed MDaemon will resume its execution thread immediately Enter the numeral zero in this control and MDaemon will not suspend operations at all Entering 1 will cause MDaemon to wait until the process returns no matter how long that might be Don t execute when queue is empty Enable this switch if you do not want the specified program to run when the queue i
97. public folders to make sure that the upgrade process has set the default permissions and the user permissions correctly If you change the LDAP port it will erase your existing LDaemon command line and create a new one reflecting the new port value Any other command line options you enter will be lost so you need to reenter them each time you change the LDAP port via the GUI Setup gt Primary Domain Ports tab The name of the WorldClient CGI is now WorldClient dll instead of WorldClient cgi ComAgent will no longer be able to connect to WorldClient with WorldClient cgi in the URL so you will need to change the URL manually or download a new pre configured ComAgent from WorldClient If you have created any custom logon pages that post to WorldClient cgi change them to use WorldClient dl1l If you have customized the RFC822 MBF mailbox format file you will need to copy RFC822 MBF to a different file name and reconfigure your accounts to use the new file In order to increase performance MDaemon assumes that no modifications to RFC822 MBF will ever be made Messages bound for accounts which are using the RFC822 MBF script are simply moved into the users mail directory without being processed through the script processor The theory is that emails from the Internet are already in RFC822 compatible format Therefore processing them through a script designed to translate email into RFC822 format
98. record IP addresses when such are discovered during MX record processing Send message to next MX host when an SMTP error occurs With this function active MDaemon will continue to attempt message delivery to the next MX hosts even if the current MX returns a fatal SMTP error Immediately return mail when DNS says domain does not exist This switch will cause MDaemon to immediately return a message if a DNS lookup returns a Domain Does Not Exist message This will prevent this sort of mail from needlessly going into the delivery retry cycle Local Lookup Tables Hosts file Before querying the DNS servers MDaemon will first attempt to resolve an address by processing the Windows HOSTS file If this file contains the IP address of the domain in question MDaemon will not need to query the DNS server Note You must enter the complete path and filename rather than just the filename MDaemon will attempt to use the following values as the default location of this file Windows 95 98 drive windows hosts Windows NT drive windows system32 drivers etc hosts The HOSTS file is a Windows file that contains the A record or primary IP address for a domain name MDaemon also allows you to specify MX record IP addresses within a file called MXCACHE DAT This file can be found within the MDaemon APP subdirectory Load the MKCACHE DAT file into a text editor and read the comments at the top of the file fo
99. regulations regarding mail headers RELAY SETTINGS 131 HEADER TRANSLATION Chapter Header Translation Changing header text on the fh feature This new dialog can change any portion of text found within a header to a new value whenever a message is detected which must leave your domain and travel across the Internet Your old Outbound Domain Conversion settings will be migrated to this new Header Translation feature It works like this You specify the text you want to search for and its corresponding replacement value MDaemon will then search through all the headers in the message and make the replacements You may also specify headers that MDaemon should not modify such as Subject or Received headers by clicking the Exceptions button on this dialog T he Outbound Domain Conversion feature has been replaced with the Header Translation This feature is necessary for some MDaemon configurations in which the local domain name is fictitious or different from the domain name that must appear on outbound mail In such a situation Header Translation could be used to change every occurrence of localdomain com to RemoteDomain com This feature is much more powerful and versatile than the old Outbound Domain Conversion feature while retaining the same basic functionality 132 CHAPTER 10 HEADER TRANSLATION Header Translation Header Translation Ed Enter new header tr
100. relay mail for their users New trusted IP address RELAY SETTINGS 127 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Enter a new IP address to be added to the Trusted IP Addresses list Add Click this button to add the new IP address to the Trusted IP Addresses list Remove Click this button to remove the selected entries from the Trusted IP Addresses list 128 RELAY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Reverse Lookup Security Settings 21x Relay Settings Trusted Hosts Reverse Lookup Reverse lookups a These switches allow MDaemon to track into the log files the result of a reverse lookup on the incoming host s IP or identification IV Perform reverse PTR record lookup on inbound SMTP connections send 501 and shut down connection if no PTR record match Perform reverse lookup on HELO EHLO domain IV Perform reverse lookup on value passed in the MAIL command V Refuse to accept mail if a reverse lookup returns domain not found IV send 501 error code normally sends 451 error code and then shut down the socket connection IV Insert Lookup Waming header into suspicious messages Using the controls on this tah MDaemon can be configured to do a reverse lookup on the domain passed in the HELO EHLO and or MATL commands When performing the lookups MDaemon will attempt to acquire all of the MX and A record IP addresses for the given domain Then the IP of the machine making the connection is compared to this list
101. results Click this checkbox if you want MDaemon to automatically create Domain Gateways based upon the results of DNS queries Don t create domain gateways when sender of message is a local user Enable this control if you do not want messages originating from local users to trigger automatic gateway creation Require confirmation before rendering the gateway active When this control is enabled MDaemon will send a confirmation message to the email address of your choice in order to determine whether the automatically created gateway is valid MDaemon will continue to accept messages for the domain in question but will not deliver them until confirmation is received Send creation confirmation message to Use this textbox to list the address to which you wish confirmation messages to go Confirmation must be received within XX minutes This control is for designating the number of minutes that MDaemon will wait for a response to any given confirmation message If this time limit expires then the Domain Gateway in question will be deleted Deliver gateway s mail to higher MX hosts at each queue run If you want MDaemon to attempt to deliver this gateway s messages to higher level MX hosts each time that the remote queue is processed then enable this control Use this gateway as a pattern Choose a Domain Gateway from this drop down list and MDaemon will use its settings as a template for all future automatically created gateways
102. s gt 7048 No messages waiting for node lt s gt 7050 lt d gt pending messages for node lt s gt started 7051 Unable to queue message for node lt s gt Internal processing error 7052 This server configured to NOT honor EHLO at present 7053 Sorry lt s gt is not allowed access from your location 7055 lt s gt Sender unknown You can see from the table that the initial SMTP greeting string is coded 7000 Therefore to create a custom SMTP greeting string place the following entry into the MDAEMON INT file Custom SMTP 7000 Alt N Technologies ESMTP server Note that you must enclose the custom string in quotations Note also that this example string does not use any s macros like the default one does This is fine POP STRING CODES 7200 OK Ss POP service ready d 7201 OK Ss Recipient ok 7235 ERR Access denied Contact postmaster s for more information 7234 ERR sorry POP server too busy right now Try again later 7202 ERR sorry there s no mailbox for s here 7203 ERR that command is valid only in the AUTHORIZATION state 7204 ERR that command is valid only in the TRANSACTION state 7205 ERR that command is valid only in the UPDATE state 328 CUSTOMIZING SMTP AND POP PROTOCOL STRINGS APPENDIX D 7233 ERR maildrop already locked 7206 OK
103. same action that occurs when you press the APPLY NOW button in the Primary Domain Setup screen This is required when changes are made to the port domain name IP or bind settings 323 APPENDIX A HANGUPR SEM HANGUPG SEM QUEUERUN SEM ONLINE SEM PREDIAL SEM POSTDIAL SEM REBOOTMD SEM FWUNLESS SEM DLUNLESS SEM DVUNLESS SEM SUPPRESS SEM MSGID SEM GRPLIST SEM CATLIST SEM WATCHDOG SEM 324 Forces a rude hang up of a connected RAS session This is an immediate and unconditional hang up without regard to mail sessions which may be in progress across the connection so watch out Forces a graceful hang up of a connected RAS session MDaemon will wait for any pending mail sessions to close and will then hang up the RAS session Just before a mail session begins MDaemon will create this semaphore file Inside the file will be a datestamp indicating the time and date of the most recent mail processing interval MDaemon will create this semaphore file once it makes a successful connection using RAS to the ISP MD will remove the semaphore once the connection has been terminated This is useful if you want to know when MD is using the RAS sub system MDaemon will create this file just before trying to use RAS DUN This will allow other software to detect when it should free the dialup port so that MDaemon can use it MDaemon will create this file immediately after a connection made by MDaemon is taken down MD w
104. scanner to detect infected files The MDaemon Anti irus will not scan the attachments T Exclude gateways from virus scanning Do not scan messages bound for these addresses Exclusions Scanner actions C Delete the infected attachment Quarantine the infected attachment to C AM DAEMONSCFILTERSQUARANTS Browse C Clean the infected attachment Note attachments that cannot be cleaned will just be deleted C Delete the entire message Quarantine the entire message to C M DAEMONSCFILTERSQUARANTS Browse IV Add a warning message to the top of the message body if infected Edit warning message Warning message This tab and the AntiVirus Updater tab will only be visible when you have installed MDaemon AntiVirus To obtain MDaemon AntiVirus visit www altn com Scanner Configuration Enable virus scanner Click this checkbox to enable AntiVirus scanning of messages When MDaemon receives a message with attachments it will activate MDaemon AntiVirus and scan them for viruses before delivering the message to its final destination Enable background scanner If you have a background virus scanner installed on your system enable this control if you want to allow background scanning of messages instead of scanning them with MDaemon AntiVirus Y Warning Because this feature prevents MDaemon AntiVirus from scanning your messages directly using it may have unpredictable results For this reason we recommen
105. secondary domains It has several columns Domain Name lists the name of each domain P each domain s IP address Bind shows whether or not the given domain is bound to its IP address and several other columns that correspond to the controls below the list This list can be sorted in ascending or descending order by any column Simply click the column by which you wish to sort the list and it will be sorted by that column in ascending order Click the same column again to sort it in descending order Domain name Enter the domain name of the secondary domain that you wish to host IP address Enter the IP address to associate with the domain being added or edited Bind sockets to this IP only Click this checkbox if you want to bind the secondary domain to its IP address Add Click this button to add the secondary domain along with its IP address and binding status to the Domain List 64 SECONDARY DOMAIN EDITOR CHAPTER 4 SECONDARY DOMAINS Replace When you click an entry in the Domain List its settings will appear in the corresponding controls Click this button after making any desired changes to the information to replace the entry with the new settings Remove After selecting an entry in the Domain List click this button to remove it from the list Account and Old Mail Pruning The remaining three controls on this dialog have corresponding controls on the Accounts Editor page 230 that can be used if you want an ind
106. section If you would like to subscribe to the MDaemon support Mailing List hosted by Alt N Technologies send a message to mdaemon altn com with the following in the first line of the body of the message and you will be added to the mailing list SUBSCRIBE md support altn com myaddress mydomain com 334 CONTACTS GLOSSARY Glossary ACL Stands for Access Control Lists ACL is an extension to the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP4 that makes it possible for you to create an access list for each of your IMAP message folders thus granting access to your folders to other users whom also have accounts on your mail server Further you can set permissions governing the extent to which each user has control over those folders For example you can designate whether or not a user is allowed to delete messages flag them as read or unread copy messages to folders create new subfolders and so on Only email clients that support ACL can be used to share this access and set permissions However if your email client doesn t support ACL you can still set these permissions from the MDaemon version 6 GUI Right now very few email clients support ACL directly but there is an excellent utility from www bynari net called InsightConnector that will add this functionality and more to Microsoft Outlook ACL is fully discussed in RFC 2086 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2086 txt ASCII Pronounced as key ASCII is an acronym
107. send all mail direct without using an intermediate host When this option is chosen MDaemon will attempt to deliver all mail itself instead of passing it to another host MDaemon will place undeliverable messages into its Retry System and continue to attempt to deliver them according to the parameters and time intervals that you set in the Retry Configuration dialog You can access this dialog by clicking the Resry Queue Settings button My ISP requires me to log in before sending mail As a security measure in order to prevent unauthorized users from attempting to relay mail through their servers some ISPs require their customers to authenticate themselves via ESMTP AUTH ot by first performing a POP check of their email account If this is the case for your ISP you can open the ISP AUTH dialog by clicking this button There you can enter the required authentication information See ISP AUTH below DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 37 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Retry queue settings Click this button to open the Retry Configuration dialog from which you can designate how often MDaemon will attempt to deliver messages which it has thus far been unable to deliver You can also specify a time interval after which the attempts will cease and what to do with these messages after the final attempt is made Retry Queue Settings Retry Configuration x Retry frequency Keep message in the primary queue for at least 60 min
108. server to these IPs only Separate multiple values with commas Leave blank to bind to MDaemon s IP list fi 27 0 0 1 123 123 123 123 1 2 3 4 Restart WorldClient required on port or cache change This tab contains various global server level settings that govern WorldClient s configuration and behavior regardless of the users or domains to which they belong 78 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER WorldClient Properties Enable WorldClient server Click this checkbox to enable the WorldClient server You may also enable disable WorldClient from the File menu or Statistics and Shortcuts frame of the Message Router WorldClient is running under TIS When running WorldClient under Internet Information Server IIS rather than WorldClient s built in web server click this checkbox This prevents certain GUI elements from being accessed which might otherwise cause conflicts with HS For more information see Running WorldChent under IS page 80 Run WorldClient server using this TCP port This is the port on which WorldClient will listen for connections from your users web browsers Sessions not composing a message expire after xx inactive minutes When a user is logged in to WorldClient but is not composing a message this is the amount of time that their session will remain inactive before WorldClent will close it Sessions composing a message expire after xx inactive minutes This timer governs
109. set of hosts you will need to delete SPAMBLCK DAT from the MDaemon APP directory and restart MDaemon Due to the expansion of WorldClient s capabilities in MDaemon version 5 an importing program will run during installation that will identify previous versions of WorldClient and ask you if you wish to migrate existing messages from the older version If this tool does not run during installation you can execute it manually by running WCIMPORT EXE from the MDaemon APP directory When importing from WorldClient Pro only WorldClient users that have MDaemon accounts are imported Version 4 Special Notes In the MDaemon ini file the extra local and remote queue key names have been changed If you are using this feature then you will need to manually edit your MDaemon ini file and change these keys from LocalQueueX to LocalQx where X is the decimal queue number RemoteQueueX to RemoteQX where X is the decimal queue number RAWQueueX to RAWQX where X is the decimal queue number The API has been greatly expanded see MD API HTML Due to this expansion your custom programs may need to be recompiled Version 3 Special Notes MDaemon Version 3 incorporated many changes to its internal structure and many of its supporting DAT configuration files Because of these changes the installation process automatically migrates WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 CHAPTER 1 MDAEMON V6 0 version 2 x configuration files to
110. should be temporary Temporary queues will be used at the next scheduled mail processing interval and then removed from the mail queue list You can use Content Filters page 166 to cause messages to be automatically placed into one of your custom mail queues Extra Mail Queue directories This area displays an entry for each custom queue lists whether it is local or remote and whether it is temporary or permanent Remove If you wish to remove a queue from the list select its entry and then click the Remove button New queue Use this text field to list the path to the folder that you wish to designate as a mail queue 106 MAIL QUEUES CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES This is an Extra remote mail queue Choose this option if you want the custom mail queue to be used for remote mail local mail queue Choose this option if you want the custom mail queue to be used for local mail This queue is temporary Click this checkbox if you want the queue to be temporary It will be used during the next mail processing interval and then removed from the list Add After you have listed the path to the new queue and designated its other parameters click the Add button to add it to the list of custom queues MAIL QUEUES 107 SECURITY SETTINGS Chapter Security Settings MD aeons Secunty and Screening Features Daemon is equipped with an extensive suite of security features and controls Click Setup gt Security Settin
111. someone unsubscribes to the mailing list When a message arrives which exceeds the max size limit If selected a note will be sent to the address specified in the associated control each time someone sends a message to the mailing list that is larger than the maximum acceptable size Such messages are moved into the bad message directory 276 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Notification Options Notify non members of message rejection private lists only When non members of a private list send mail to the list MDaemon will inform them that the list is private They will also be given instructions on how to subscribe to lists Notify subscribers unsubscribers on the status of their requests When this checkbox is enabled MDaemon will send a completion notification message to the user that has been subscribed unsubsctribed to the Mailing List Returned Mail Send all mail returned to the list to Here you specify who should receive any returned mail generated from list traffic For example a mailing list with 100 recipients will generally have 10 20 undeliverable addresses either due to address changes or down servers or whatever The SMTP system will generate and return to the sender of the message notification mail concerning these undeliverable conditions You can configure who should receive these messages for your mailing lists You can also specify that no one should receive them in which case MDaemon will place
112. space that their account is taking up and the date that they last checked their mail This list can also be saved to disk as a text file or it can be saved in comma delimited format for use with databases Log Page With this dialog you can display MDaemon s Log Fis in a simple list format This feature is very useful for quickly examining the history of MDaemon s mail transactions because it condenses the selected Lag Fie into a columnar list which contains the Type of the message POP Inbound DomainPOP RFC822 and so on the Host to which MDaemon connected during the transaction the sender the recipient the message size the date that each message was processed and whether or not the transaction was successful You can also examine the detailed portion of the log regarding any of the entries on the list by double clicking the desired entry This will display the portion of the log where that transaction was made Logs displayed on the Log Page can be saved as a text file or in comma delimited format for use with databases 302 CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Report Page The last tab is the Report Page With this feature you can produce a report containing all of MDaemon s configuration settings written in a plain text readable format Because of the large number of optional settings and configurations in MDaemon this can greatly speed the process of administering configuration changes as well as aid in diagnosing po
113. subfolder of My Folder Note Although a subfolder will be displayed as a subfolder in your list of IMAP folders in your email client it is not actually a subfolder on the server It is a parent folder containing the folder and subfolder names separated by the delimiter character Public Folders 100 SHARED IMAP FOLDERS CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Enable public folders Click this switch if you wish to allow IMAP users to gain access to public folders The users that can access them and the level of access granted is designated under each folder on the Public Folders tab Clear this check box if you want to hide public folders from all users Allow users with Write access to also set the Deleted flag Write access means users can flag messages as read unread and so on Click this check box if you want users to whom you have granted write access permission to be able be to flag messages as deleted as well Public folder prefix string ex or pub Public folders are prefixed with a sequence of up to 20 characters such as or Public This is to help users easily distinguish public from private folders from within their email client software Use this text box to specify the series of characters that you wish to use to denote public folders User Folders Sharing Enable user folder sharing Click this switch if you wish to allow IMAP users to share access to their IMAP
114. such messages this feature will enable them to be delivered Force Reply To header in all messages When a message is encountered which doesn t have a Reply To header MDaemon will create and add one to the message file using the address found in the From header If a Reply To header is present but empty MDaemon will create the header like this Reply To This fixes problems for some mail clients Force Message ID header in all messages When a message is encountered which doesn t have a Message ID header MDaemon will create one at random and insert it into the message Honor Return Receipt To headers NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 199 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS This switch determines how MDaemon will behave when faced with a request for deliver confirmation from an incoming message If set a confirmation message will be dispatched to the sender of the triggering message Otherwise such requests are ignored Add Precedence bulk header to system generated mail Click this option if you want all system generated messages welcome messages warnings could not deliver messages and so on to have a Precedence bulk header inserted Add X Authenticated Sender header to authenticated messages Check this switch if you want MDaemon to add an X Authenticated Sender header to messages that arrive on an authenticated session using the AUTH command Add
115. than_XX bytes This control places an upper limit on the size of a message accepted for this mailing list Messages larger than this limit are sent to the bad message directory 270 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Members Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Membership Current member count 9 an address example Normal 3 Durge example com Durge Nosfentor Normal Frank somewhere c Frank Thomas Normal FThomas altn com Read only HF ord company com Read only 3 HMudd company mail Harry Mudd Digest 3 mike example net Read only MrMan example com Digest x Remove Toggle digest Toggle read only Post only nomail New member email New member real name OO O es Nomal C Digest C Readony Post only Default IV Automatically remove dead addresses from list membership Cancel Membership Current member count This control displays the current number of users subscribed to the list and lists them in the box below Each member s entry also states his or her type of membership normal digest read only or post only Remove This button removes the selected entries from the Current Members list Digest Select a member and then click this button to make it a Digest membership See Digest page 283 for more information
116. that is currently being edited Subscribing To Mailing Lists To subscribe to a mailing list send an email message addressed to MDaemon or any alias thereof at the domain hosting the mailing list and place the Subscribe command as the first line of the message body For example there is a mailing list called MD Support being hosted by altn com You can subscribe to the list by composing a message addressed to mdaemon altn com and placing the value SUBSCRIBE MD Support altn com as the first line of the message body The message subject is irrelevant and can be left blank For complete details on how to form this and other control messages see Remote Server Control via Email page 318 You can also utilize MDaemon s Auto Responder features to automatically subscribe members to a list when they send messages to an auto responder enabled account See page 259 for details on this feature Finally new to MDaemon version 6 is a subscription feature that can be used to cause MDaemon to recognize email addresses of the formats list subscribe domain com and list unsubscribe domain com as long as the list actually exists in order to facilitate an easier method for users to join and leave your mailing lists For example suppose you have a list called MyList altn com People will be able to subscribe unsubscribe to your list by sending an email message to MyList Subscribe altn com and MyList Unsubscribe al
117. the attachment was stripped and why 178 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Edit warning message Click this button to display the warning text that will be added to messages when the Add a warning message feature is used After making any desired changes to the text click OK to close the dialog and save the changes CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 179 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS AntiVirus Updater Content Filter x Content Filter Admins amp ttachments File Compression Notifications Antivirus Antivirus Updater Scanner Info Alt N MDaemon Antivirus detected Engine version 4 0 1 13 Engine date 2002 06 21 Database count 55560 Last update 2002 06 16 For more information please visit http www altn com Anti irus Updater configuration MDaemon can run the Antivirus Updater when an Urgent foe Update message is received You will first have to subscribe before this feature is available Update AY signatures now View update report Configure updater Scheduler Test scanner Send a test message to the postmaster with the EICAR test Send EICAR virus and see if the EICAR attachment gets removed by the virus scanner Use the controls on this tab to manually or automatically update MDaemon AntiVirus virus definitions There is a scheduler for automatic updating a report viewer so that you can review when and which updates
118. the list of excluded addresses New excluded address wildcards okay If you wish to add an address to the list of excluded addresses enter it here and then click the Add button Add After entering an address in the New Excluded Address text box click this button to add it to the list of excluded addtess Run a Program Run this program This field specifies the full path and filename to a program that will be launched when new mail arrives at the specified mailbox Care must be taken to ensure that this process terminates properly and can run unattended Optional command line parameters can be entered immediately following the executable path if desired Pass message to process Select this option and the process specified in the Ran This Process field will be passed the name of the triggering message as the first available command line parameter Note that by the time the message name is passed to the specified process the account s MBF file will already have been applied This is useful in that applying an MBF can reformat the message into a consistent structure regardless of the source of the original message When the auto responder is setup on an account which is forwarding mail to another location and not retaining a local copy in its own mailbox see Forwarding page 226 then this function will be disabled Note By default MDaemon will place the name of the message file as the last parameter on the command line You can
119. the new hash method will cause all stored messages to appear to be new a single time and thus downloaded again Thereafter messages will be unaffected by Daylight Savings Time 202 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 e System MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS Miscellaneous Options 20x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MultiPOP WAB Misc System properties IV Pre process mailing list mail List mail with Subscribe Unsubscribe etc at start of body will be rejected IV Move account mail to new directories when domain names change MDaemon system account email address mdaemon System generated messages will be sent using this address Default attachment extension MD System generated attachments will be created using this extension Default logon delimiter character string of 10 chars max E In addition to this char is also used in email address for logon purposes CHAR SET value for auto generated messages jus As Cll Second machine IP for dual socket binding o 1 23 Cancel Apply System Properties Pre process mailing list mail When a message arrives for a mailing list that should have been directed to the system address MDaemon will reject it when this control is enabled For example a user may join or leave a list by placing the Subscribe or Unsubscribe command at the beginning of an email message and sending it to the system address Oftentimes users erroneously try to send
120. the new version formats where appropriate If upgrading from version 2 x your old v2 x files are backed up and placed in the OLDFILES directory during the installation process The addition of full multiple domain support made it necessary to change several supporting DAT file formats including the USERLIST DAT file Consequently version 3 and later is completely incompatible with the discontinued WebPOP series of products from Alt N Technologies WebPOP is no longer supported and will not be updated Instead we provide our customers with WorldClient which improves dramatically on the basic WebPOP idea There is no longer a POP logon field within the user database In keeping with a common industry standard the Mailbox value is also used as the POP logon If you have accounts that maintain different values for their Mailbox and POP logon the conversion process which is invoked automatically during installation changes these account records to use the old logon value as the new mailbox Then aliases page 256 are created for the new mailbox value in order to prevent your users from having to reconfigure their mail client or change their email address Thus their old Mailbox name is an alias for their new Mailbox The TRACKPOP TXT file lists accounts that are updated in this manner Further in keeping with the removal of a stand alone POP logon field the SPOPNAMES macro was discontinued The conversion utility scans the appropriate DAT fi
121. their POP Password Edit mail directory location This control is used to give users permission to modify the location of their Message Directory Note You should exercise caution in granting this permission to users Giving users the ability to change their mail directory could effectively give them access to any directory on your system Edit forwarding address When this feature is enabled users will be able to modify their forwarding address settings Edit advanced forwarding When this feature is enabled users will be able to modify their Advanced Forwarding Options Edit encrypt mail setting This feature allows users to control whether or not mail messages of 4096 bytes or less will be stored in their mailbox in an encrypted state Edit IMAP rules PRO version only Use this control to enable users to create and manage their own IMAP Mail Rules see page 240 This feature is only available in MDaemon PRO Edit EVERYONE list setting This feature allows users to control whether or not they will be included on MDaemon s EVERYONE Mailing List Edit mail restrictions This checkbox controls whether or not accounts will be able to edit their local mail only settings NEW ACCOUNT DEFAULTS 219 CHAPTER 19 MANAGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS Edit quota settings Click this checkbox if you wish to allow accounts to modify their quota settings Edit MultiPOP settings Click this switch if you wish users to be able to enable and d
122. them dequeue email that you may have them holding for you so that you can receive this sort of email via SMTP rather than DomainPOP Archival Use the Archival tab to save a copy of all inbound and outbound mail that MDaemon processes You can also choose whether this archive will include Mailing List or MuliPOP messages or omit them Pruning This tab is used for denoting the amount of time that an account may remain inactive before it will be deleted It also contains controls for limiting how long messages may be stored Pre Processing This dialog is used to designate the path to any program that you may want MDaemon to run immediately before processing and delivering of mail Here you can also set parameters for MDaemon s actions related to this process Directories Here you can specify paths to the locations of various directories that MDaemon will use for Remote and Local queues work files archiving Mailing List Digest files and so on POP Check As a security measure many ISPs have begun to require their customers to log in to their POP mailbox before allowing them to send or receive mail through the ISP s mail server Use this tab to configure MDaemon to do so if necessary Unknown Local Mail This dialog contains various settings that you can use to control what MDaemon will do with messages that arrive at the server addressed to a Loca domain but to an unknown or undefined user s mailbox The various control choice
123. this port for incoming connections from remote POP clients Create outbound POP events using this TCP port DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 41 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION This port will be used when mail is retrieved from POP3 servers Listen for inbound IMAP events on this TCP port MDaemon will monitor this port for incoming IMAP requests DNS LDAP Server Ports Query DNS servers using this UDP port Enter the Port you want MDaemon to use for sending and recetving data grams to the DNS server LDAP port for database amp address book posting MDaemon will post database and address book information to your LDAP server on this pott See LDAP Address Book Support page 94 Remote Configuration Server Port Settings Listen for MDConfig connections on this TCP port This is the port that MDaemon will monitor for MDConfig connections see page 70 Listen for WebAdmin connections on this TCP port This is the port that MDaemon will monitor for WebAdmin connections Return port settings to defaults This button returns all the port settings to their standard values Bind to new port values now When you alter the values of any of the port settings you will need to press this button to have your changes take immediate effect Otherwise your changes will not be put into place until the next time the server is started Note The preceding port settings are critical for proper server operation and should not be altered unle
124. though by default this isn t obvious since all three are identical Send restricted attachment notification message to When a message artives with a file attachment matching a restricted attachment entry listed on the Admins Attachments tab a warning message will be sent to the individuals designated in this section A customized warning message can be sent to the sender recipient and the administrators that you have CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 183 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS designated on the Admins Attachments tab To customize the message for any of the three entries select one of them from the list and then edit the message that appears on the bottom half of this tab Each entry has its own message though by default this isn t obvious since all three are identical Subject This text will be displayed in the Subject header of the notification message that is sent Message This is the message that will be sent to the entry selected in the list above when the checkbox corresponding to that entry is enabled You can directly edit this message from the box in which it is displayed Note The actual files containing this text are located in the MDaemon app directory They are cfattrem adm dat cfattrem rec dat cfattrem snd dat cfvirfnd adm dat CHEWALICIEine 1eKC dal lvirnd snd dal Restricted attachment message Admins Restricted attachment message Recipient
125. to collect their messages without having to use POP or DomainPOP to distribute them to their users because the original SMTP envelope is preserved ESMTP AUTH AUTH shared secret Enter the client domain s Shared Secret or password here that will be used during authentication 294 GATEWAY EDITOR CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Note The domain for which MDaemon is acting as a gateway must use its domain name as the logon parameter Dequeuing mail requires authentication When you have configured the settings for this domain to accept ESMTP ETRN requests you may use this tab s controls to require the connecting host to first authenticate itself using the ESMTP AUTH command Since ATRN requires authentication this control must be enabled before MDaemon will respond to ATRN requests Authenticated requests are valid regardless of connecting IP Enable this checkbox if you want to honor authenticated requests regardless of the IP address from which they are coming If this control is not enabled then only requests from those IP addresses specified in the IP Access section of the ESMTP ETRN tab page 292 will be honored GATEWAY EDITOR 295 CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Mail Forwarding Gateway Editor notmycompany Domain Settings ESMTPETRN ATRN AUTH f Mail Forwarding POP IMAP Quotas Forwarding properties J Forward mail to this host Enter the name or IP address of the SMTP gateway or o
126. to deliver mail to since only a single copy of the message is required while any number of recipients of the message can be specified Not all remote hosts allow this sort of routing to occur however Since it is ultimately they who will have to deliver a copy of the message file to each address some hosts place an upper limit on the number of recipients they will allow you to specify ROUTE SLIPS 331 APPENDIX F Appendix F MDaemon Technical Support Technical Support for the MDaemon Server is provided by Alt N Technologies and is offered on several different levels outlined below Please review the support options and select whichever is appropriate for your needs All of the following options are located and fully discussed at the MDaemon web site http www mdaemon com Telephone Support for All Users MDaemon Technical Support is available via telephone for a per incident flat rate fee of 60 00 Paid telephone support is available between the hours of 9 00am and 6 00pm Central Standard Time Monday through Friday excluding holidays at 817 652 0204 When calling please have credit card information ready Free Technical Support Options Support for all users is provided via the MDaemon Help Desk and the MDaemon Open Discussion Forum which allows for dialog within a threaded searchable and intuitive forum environment MDaemon Help Desk http www altn com Support Default asp product_id MDaemon The MDaemon Help Desk
127. to provide two way synchronization between LDaemon and the Outlook Outlook Express address book on each users local computer Thus if you use both Outlook or Outlook Express and WorldClient at different times the address books will match in both products OVERVIEW 75 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Finally ComAgent is also equipped with a complete instant messaging system You can view yout list of ComAgent buddies and each one s online status online away offline start a conversation with any one or group of them set your own online status and view past conversations in a history folder For specific instructions on how to use ComAgent see its online help system There are several options related to ComAgent and instant messaging IM located on the Domain Options tab page 81 ComAgent s Instant Messaging System ComAgent is equipped with a simple but effective instant messaging IM system With this system you can communicate instantly with any other account on your MDaemon server You can choose a list of buddies from a list of all MDaemon users and then see which ones are online and ready to receive an IM You will also be able to start a group conversation involving several buddies at once All of the IM features are available via the shortcut right click menu within ComAgent ComAgent s IM system is also scriptable which allows custom programs to interface with it By creating semaphore SEM files in the M
128. to start an SMTP session and begin sending the stored email to the host specified in the request 340 GLOSSARY The TURN command used for this purpose posed a security risk because it caused the SMTP session to reverse direction and begin sending the stored mail immediately without any verification or authentication that the requesting server was actually who it claimed to be ETRN starts a new SMTP session rather than reversing direction Thus if the server making the request is a spoofed host the sending server will still attempt to deliver the mail to the real host instead There is now a proposed standard that introduces Authenticated TURN ATRN which like TURN reverses the direction of the SMTP session but requires authentication before doing so This new standard is On Demand Mail Relay ODMR Alt N Technologies MDaemon server supports both ETRN and ODMR s ATRN ETRN is addressed in RFC 1985 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfcl985 txt ODMR is addressed in RFC 2645 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2645 txt FAQ Pronounced together as fack or as separate letters F A Q FAQ stands for Frequently Asked Questions FAQs are documents that provide answers to the most commonly asked questions on a given subject They usually appear in some form of list format with each question listed first followed by its answer In larger FAQs oftentimes all of the questions will
129. to the same IP address as the MDaemon that you want to collect its mail Better yet it can be registered as an alias to the primary domain name Failing this a message can still be delivered by 288 CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS hiding company com within a primary domain address Using this method addresses can be constructed that will pass through the primary domain and on to the users of the domain for which MDaemon is acting as a gateway For example if an outside Internet mail user wishes to send a message to bob company com which is domain gateway served by mydomain com then the sender would need to address his email message to bob company com mydomain com Because mydomain com is a registered domain hosted by MDaemon this message will be delivered properly When MDaemon receives a message with an address in this format it will convert the address to bob company com and deliver the message to the disk directory specified for that domain Gateway Editor The Gateway Editor includes the following tabbed dialogs Domain settings This dialog contains the domain name of the particular domain that you are working with as well as the path to the directory used for storing messages and file attachments addressed to this domain Here you will also assign an MBF file to be used when MDaemon delivers mail to this domain s mailbox ESMTP ETRN Use the controls on this dialog to choose whether MD
130. you will lose delivery efficiency Remember each SMTP session created by MDaemon will deliver messages consecutively and therefore four sessions delivering two messages each might perform better and faster than eight threads delivering only one message each A good place to start would be five to ten threads when using a 28 8k modem and ten to fifteen for ISDN DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 47 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Maximum SMTP outbound messages spooled per session This setting places a limit on the number of individual messages that each session will send before it stops delivering mail and frees itself from memory Ordinarily you should leave this control set to zero which will cause each session to continue delivering messages until the queue is empty Maximum concurrent SMTP inbound sessions This value controls the number of concurrent inbound SMTP sessions that the server will accept before it begins responding with a Server Too Busy message POP IMAP IMAP option available in Pro version only Maximum concurrent POP outbound sessions The value entered here represents the maximum possible outbound POP sessions that will be created when it is time to collect DomainPOP and MultiPOP mail Each session will collect this type of mail until all DomainPOP and MultiPOP servers have been processed and all mail has been collected For example if there are fifteen MultiPOP sessions amongst all of your users and the value o
131. 1366 and Q131144 for more detailed information WINDOWS NT SECURITY ACCOUNT INTEGRATION 251 CHAPTER 21 IMPORTING ACCOUNTS NT To MDaemon Account Importer NT 2000 account importer x NT 2000 server properties m PDC BDC machine name MACHINE Refresh NT domain name MYD OMAIN MDaemon domain name example com z Accounts to import C NT 2000 accounts Selected accounts Importing options i IV Make account mailboxes equal to the NT 2000 account name For security reasons NT will not release account passwords to MDaemon Please select the method MDaemon will use to create or authenticate account passwords C Use the account templates to generate passwords Set account passwords equal to account names Make every password equal to Authenticate passwords dynamically using NT 2000 SAM Authenticate on this NT 2000 domain MYDOMAIN Import Selected Accounts Cancel NT 2000 Server Properties PDC BDC Machine name This field allows you to specify the machine name from which MDaemon will read NT account database information You can specify lt DEFAULT gt and MDaemon will read data from the local machine Refresh Click this button to refresh the NT Accounts listing NT Domain Name Type the NT domain name from which you wish to import accounts MDaemon Domain Name Choose from the drop down list box the MDaemon domain into which the accounts will be imported 252 WINDOWS NT SECURITY ACCOUN
132. 22222 2 5 Scanning for VirUSeS 0 cessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneee Scheduller cssssssseesseenseenensenssensneees Scheduling virus updates Screening sssss s Security sssssssss2s2 2 5 Security Features s ssssss 2 Semaphore Files Sending mail to various users 0 00000 159 Server usage policy statement 0008 314 ServiCe cscceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 192 Session Threads sccsscssceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenenee 47 Setting Download Size Limits 000 152 Setting parameters for mail delivery 159 Setting the number if dialup attempts 143 Setting up Account Aliases csscssseeeseeeeeeeeneneeees 255 Account Template Strings 216 Auto Response Scripts aa 261 Auto Responde rs ccseseseseseseeeseeeeeeeee Domain GatewaySs ss s s Global Suppression List IP SCreen ceccsceeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeeeenenees MultiPOP cccssssccsnsseeceeeeeeenseeeenseeeeene 242 New Account Defaults sssssssssensee 216 New Accounts Primary DOMAain sssss112 1 5 34 Remote Configuration s 67 Sharing mail folders sssss1s 2 20 99 358 Shortcut Menu sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 32 Signaling an ISP to dequeue mail s 49 Simple Scheduling s s s Ski
133. 9 na Beverly Kissi Dwimble d Screen shots 2001 03 24 19 49 n a simon mous HMudd qdo BetaT eam MD 2001 03 24 19 49 n a sfischer whi Frank do BetaT eam MD 2001 03 24 19 49 mail air mikenlou n a n a 2001 03 24 19 49 n a clindsey Ca mike dom RielayFax Wis 2001 03 24 19 49 n a idmecormick mike dom BetaT eam Bo 2001 03 24 19 49 127 0 Mike n a n a 2001 03 24 19 49 mail air mikenlou n a n a 2001 03 24 19 49 n a jeepdog 4x Frank do BetaT eam MD 2001 03 24 19 49 Mailair mikenlou n a n a 2001 03 24 19 49 n a hoodg lauri mike dom RelayFax Wis 2001 03 24 19 49 Log report The Log Report list box displays MDaemon s detailed log files that you select through the Open Log button and the Windows Open dialog that follows it The Lag Report display provides a quick and easy way to review the history of mail transactions that MDaemon has processed without having to sort through the large volume of information that MDaemon log files may sometimes contain When a Log Report is displayed in this list box MDStats breaks it down into a simple format containing the Type of the message POP Inbound DomainPOP RFC822 and so on the Host to which MDaemon connected during the transaction the sender the recipient the message size the date that each message was processed and whether or not the transac
134. AGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS Web Access Defaults The Web Access Defaults dialog is used for designating the default access rights that new accounts will have for WorldClient and WebAdmin You can designate whether or not accounts will be able to access their email via WorldClient and whether or not users will be able to configure their accounts via WebAdmin In addition if you are granting access to WebAdmin you can control which settings that accounts will be allowed to edit New Account Defaults 24x Account Defaults Web Access Defaults Web based mail access defaults MV Account can access email via WorldClient ie If selected accounts will be able to access mail via the web by default Web based remote configuration defaults MV Account can modify its own settings via WebAdmin By default accounts can do the following via Web amp dmin T Edit Real name I Edit EVERYONE list setting IV Edit Password T Edit mail restrictions J Edit mail directory location I Edit quota settings IV Edit forwarding address I Edit MultiPOP settings Edit advanced forwarding IV Edit autoresponder settings T Edit encrypt mail setting I Edit allow changes via email IV Edit IMAP rules PRO version only Accounts will have these default WebAdmin rights Apply these defaults to all accounts now Cancel Apply Web based Mail Access Defaults Account can access email via WorldClient Enable this checkbox if you would like new accou
135. AW allow client software to offload to the server all the complicated work of maintaining adherence to Internet mail standards RAW mail consists of a series of required and optional text headers followed by a message body Most headers consist of a token followed by a value enclosed in lt gt symbols Each header line ends with a lt CRLF gt combination of characters All text headers and body are plain ASCII and are contained in a file which ends with the extension RAW Headers are separated from the message body by a blank line and are case insensitive The from and z headers are the only ones which are required From lt mailbox host com gt This field contains the email address of the sender To lt mailbox host com mailbox host com gt This field contains the email address es of the recipient s Multiple recipients can be specified by separating each one with a comma character ReplyTo lt mailbox host com gt An optional email address where replies to this message will be directed CC lt maibox host com mailbox host com gt An optional list of carbon copy recipients of this message Multiple carbon recipients can be specified by separating each one with a comma character Subject lt text gt An optional subject for the message Header lt Header Value gt Allows you to explicitly place Header Value combinations into the message Special fields supported by RAW v3 1 File attachment and encoding X FLAG ATTACH lt
136. BE MDSUPP MDSPASS Ex SIGNOFF MDSupportList me mydomain com REMOTE SERVER CONTROL VIA EMAIL 319 CHAPTER 28 UPDATE SUPPRESS UNSUPPRESS DIGEST NORMAL NOMAIL MAIL REALNAME GET DIR ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES listname old address new address real name password Removes old address from the list and replaces it with new address An optional real name and password value may be given Ex UPDATE mdsupp altn com old my com new my com Mr M Ex UPDATE mdsupp altn com old my com new my com pass listname address password This command adds address to the lists suppression file The list s password must be provided and the list must already have a suppression file associated with it Ex SUPPRESS list mydomain com Ex SUPPRESS me mydomain com PASS listname address password This command removes address from the lists suppression file The list s password must be provided and the list must already have a suppression file associated with it Ex UNSUPPRESS list mydomain com Ex UNSUPPRESS me mydomain com PASS listname address The sender is set to receive mail from the list in digest format If an optional address is specified after the list name then that address is set to digest mode Ex DIGEST MDSupportList Ex DIGEST mdsupp joe mdaemon com listname address The sender is set to receive mail from list in normal non digest format If an optional address is specifed after the
137. CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Name Matching does not care about the common mailbox isp com portion of the address It instead extracts the Joe User portion and attempts to lookup this name in the MDaemon user database If a match is found to an account s real name field then that account s local email address is used for delivery purposes If no match is made then MDaemon reverts to delivering the message to the email address parsed from the data common mailbox isp com in this example Note The real name portion of the address should not contain a comma semi colon or colon character so take care when you setup this information in your mail clients Only apply this feature if the address portion matches this value This control allows you to specify an email address that must be present in the extracted data in order for the real name matching process to proceed This allows you a measure of control over when the Name Matching feature will be employed For example you can specify an address such as common mailbox isp com and then only addresses matching this value will be candidates for Name Matching Suppose you have common mailbox isp com in this control This means that TO Joe User lt common mailbox isp com gt will be a candidate for Name Matching while To Joe User lt Joe mdaemon com gt will not 164 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Chapter
138. Catalog 287 CHAPTER 26 Domain Gateways 288 Gateway Editor 289 Automatic Gateways Creation 289 Domain Settings 290 ESMTP ETRN 292 ATRN AUTH 294 Mail Forwarding 296 POP IMAP 297 Quotas 299 Automatic Gateway Creation 300 CHAPTER 27 Queue and Statistics Manager 302 Queue Page 304 Selecting Files 305 User Page 307 Log Page 309 Report Page 311 Customizing the Queue Statistic Manager 312 MDstats ini File 312 MDStats Command Line Parameters 313 CHAPTER 28 Additional MDaemon Features 314 MDaemon s Text Editor 314 Editing MDaemon Files 314 The RAW Message Specification v3 1 316 Special fields supported by RAW v3 1 316 Sample RAW mail messages 317 Remote Server Control Via Email 318 Account Access and Control 318 Mailing List and Catalog Control 319 General Email Controls 320 MDaemon and Proxy Servers 321 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Miscellaneous Information APPENDICES Appendix A Semaphore Files Appendix B Message Precedence System Appendix C Creating an SMTP Session Policy Statement Appendix D Customizing SMTP and POP Protocol Strings SMTP STRING CODES 321 323 323 325 325 326 326 327 327 327 POP STRING CODES 328 Appendix E Route Slips Appendix F MDaemon Technical Support Telephone Support for All Users 330 330 332 332 332 Free Technical Support Options 332 Reseller Purchase 333 Sales and Reseller Inquiries 333 Contacts Alt N Tec
139. Click this option if you want authentication to be required when the member is added via the Add Sender to This Mailing List Auto responder feature page 259 Unsubscribe Allow people to unsubscribe from this mailing list via email 280 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS This switch controls whether or not the list will allow members to quit the mailing list by sending an unsubscription request to MDaemon See Remote Server Control Via Email page 318 Authenticate unsubscription requests With this switch set MDaemon will attempt to authenticate the unsubscription request See Authenticate Subscription Requests for a discussion of the mechanism employed to accomplish this Authenticate autoresponder generated unsubscribers Click this option if you want authentication to be required when the member is removed via the Remove Sender From This List Auto responder feature page 259 Time to Live global for all mailing lists Outstanding authentication requests expire after XX minutes When someone is subscribed or unsubscribed this is the amount of time that they have to confirm the subscription command before it will be discarded MDaemon will generate a confirmation message and send it the subscribed address The recipient must reply to the message within the designated time limit before the subscription command will be considered valid This value is global it applies to all MDaemon mailing lists not just the one
140. DOMAIN GATEWAYS POP IMAP Gateway Editor notmycompany Domain Settings ESMTPETRN ATRN AUTH Mail Forwarding POP IMAP Quotas POP IMAP access properties Note IMAP is available in MDaemon PRO only The settings here allow you to create a POP IMAP account which will have access to this domain s stored mail Enter a user and password combination and click the CREATE button MDaemon will build the account for you automatically You can then use this account with an ordinary mail client or another MDaemon installation to access the domain s mail You can customize the settings for this account using the Account Editor Mailbox name logon NotMyCompany Password or shared secret as Create update account Cancel Apply Early versions of MDaemon pioneered a method of mail collection known as DomainPOP see page 152 Besides using MDaemon to collect mail via DomainPOP it can also be used to act as a DomainPOP host for other domains for which your MDaemon is acting as an email gateway In other words all messages for the domain can be collected in a single mailbox on your server Then the domain can connect to you and collect them by using their own MDaemon or by using a regular POP client instead of an MDaemon athough in that case DomainPOP parsing would not be available to them The controls on this dialog are used to create the account that MDaemon will use for storing the Domain Gateway s mail B
141. Daemon Open Discussion Forum Come join in the MDaemon Open Discussion Forum to get help on your questions from both the MDaemon Tech Support Staff and other MDaemon users It s a great way to learn share and exchange ideas The Forum allows for dialog within a threaded searchable and intuitive forum environment It is located at http lists altn com Free Email Support for All Users Free Unlimited Email Support is available for all MDaemon users To obtain this free support via email please submit your technical support request using the Technical Support Request Form located at http www altn com Support Default asp product_id MDaemon The Technical Support Request Form can also be reached via link from the MDaemon web site Reseller Purchase Users who purchased their copy of MDaemon from an Official Alt N Partner will be referred back to them for support If you would like to receive technical support from Alt N Technologies you will be required to pay the telephone support charge for a per incident flat rate fee of 60 00 For information about Official Alt N Partners or to locate a reseller neat you visit http www altn com Partners Sales and Reseller Inquiries Sales questions of a non technical nature relative to MDaemon software should be directed to lt sales altn com gt Alternatively you can call Alt N Technologies at 817 652 0204 Contacts MDaemon WorldClient and RelayFax are trademarks of Alt N Tech
142. Daemon Server v6 version information string This variable specifies an ASCII character code 000 255 that should be inserted into the MBF file This variable is always 5 characters long with the first two characters being This instructs the server to expect a three digit number which represents an ASCII character code For example 012 will place the ASCII character 12 a formfeed character into the MBF file The numeric value specified must be three characters long and padded with zeros if necessary RFC 822 mbf mailbox format for standard RFC 822 translations version 1 1 HEADERS X MBF FILE MDaemon Gateway to RFC 822 RFC 822 MBF v3 BODY 2 SMF70 MBF smf70 mbf mailbox format for SMF minimal submission format version 1 1 msg prefix SMF msg ext SMF70 TO RECIPIENTMAILBOX RECIPIENTDOMAINS FROM SENDER SUBJECT SUBJECTS DATE DATESTAMP ATTACHMENT ATTACHMENTS O SMTP HEADER HEADERS BODY CREATING AND USING MBF FILES 265 CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES 3 DIGEST MBF digest mbf default message format for digest mail version 1 0 Date SHEADER DATE From HEADER FROM Subject SHEADER SUBJECT BODY 266 CREATING AND USING MBF FILES SECTION III Additional MDaemon Features MAILING LISTS Chapter Mailing Lists Using MDaemon s Mailing List Features addressed as if they all shared a common mailbox Copies of email
143. Daemon WorldClient directory an external application can send IM messages to ComAgent users immediately The following is the format of the SEM file To frank example com Email address of ComAgent user From rip example com Email address of instant message s sender lt blank line gt Text of instant message This is the text sent as an instant message The SEM file name must start with the characters IM and be followed by a unique numerical value For example IM 0001 SEM Applications should also create a corresponding file called IM 0001 LCK to lock the SEM file Once the SEM file is completed remove the LCK file and the SEM file will be processed MDaemon uses this scripting method to send Instant Message reminders to you about upcoming appointments and meetings An action was added to the Content Filter system that uses this scripting method to send instant messages Further rules utilizing this action can use the Content Filter macros in the IM For example you can create an instant message rule that looks like this You have received an email from SSENDERS Subject SSUBJECTS This rule would be an effective way to get new mail alerts through ComAgent Because many businesses and administrators have reservations about using an Instant Messaging system in their company due to the inherent lack of centralized accountability and the inability to monitor IM traffic that is in traditi
144. Filter Editor Notifications Antivirus Antivirus Updater Content Filter Admins Attachments File Compression Content filtering rules IV Enable rules processing engine When active the content filtering system will test all new messages using the tules specified below and perform the requested action if a match is made Existing content filter rules Y v97 M Melissa Macro Virus Move to bad message queue 97M Papa B Macro Virus Move to bad message queue MIExploreZIP worm Move to bad message queue v Y V ILOVEYOU worm Move to bad message queue 97M Melissa A4 Macro Virus Remove attachments and append footer 97M Papa B Macro Virus Remove attachments and append footer x New rule Edit rule Copy rule Delete rule Moye up Click the checkbox to the left of each rule to enable disable it Move down Rule Description Spam Filter Enabled Apply this rule to messages in the LOCAL amp REMOTE queue If the SUBJECT HEADER contains Make 1 000 000 in a day Then Delete this message All messages processed by MDaemon will at some point reside temporarily in one of the message queues When Content Filtering is enabled before any message is allowed to leave the queue it will first be processed through the Content Filter rules The result of this procedure will determine what is done with the message Note Messages that have a filenam
145. I must authenticate before sending the dequeue signal required for ATRN As a secutity measure in order to prevent unauthorized users from attempting to dequeue their customers email some ISPs require their customers to authenticate themselves via ESMTP AUTH before sending the dequeue signal If this is the case for your ISP you can open the Dequeue AUTH dialog by clicking this button There you can enter the required authentication information See Dequeue AUTH below Note Authentication is required when using the ATRN command to dequeue your email Session Windows Hide dequeue session windows while they are in progress Click this checkbox if you want to hide sessions windows while they are in progress Note If the value you enter into the Send Signal To This Host control is a domain name and not an IP address MDaemon will perform an MX record resolution of this site in an attempt to 50 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION connect to the site s MX IP address This assumes you have the MX resolution engine switched on and working see DNS on page 43 If the value entered is an IP address and not a domain name then the connection will be made using that IP address On Demand Mail Relay ODMR We believe that the best relay queue dequeue method currently available for hosting your email is On Demand Mail Relay ODMR This method is superior to ETRN and other methods in that in requires aut
146. ISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS e Servers Miscellaneous Options x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MuliPOP WAB Misc Server related options MV SMTP system uses ESMTP whenever possible I Honor ESMTP YRFY command I Honor ESMTP EXPN command SMTP server refuses mail which uses a NULL return path Remember states of SMTP POP IMAP servers across server reboots M POP IMAP servers honor APOP CRAM MDS authentication methods T POP DELE command immediately removes messages from mailbox I Hide ESMTP SIZE command parameter SMTP sends 552 response to over quota condition normally 452 IV Allow connections to own IP addresses POP IMAP servers always accept connections from IP fizzoo1 O RAM server converts this many messages per interval O all oo Allow this many RCPT commands per message RFC says 100 100 Kernel socket send buffer size in bytes 0 system default rg Data transfer limits Max acceptable SMTP message size 0 KB 0 no limit Kill connection if data transmission exceeds o KB 0 never Cancel Apply Server Related Options SMTP system uses ESMTP whenever possible Select this switch if you wish to enable support for extended SMTP commands Honor ESMTP VRFY commands Click this switch to allow ESMTP VRFY commands Honor ESMTP EXPN commands Click this checkbox if you want MDaemon to honor ESMTP EXPN commands SMTP server refuses mail which uses a NULL return path RFC no no Click this
147. It is also common for a domain name to be registered but not be connected to an actual machine The usual reason for this is the domain name s owner hasn t created a web site yet or so that they can have email addresses at a certain domain without having to maintain a web site In the latter case there must be a teal Internet machine to handle the mail of the listed domain name 338 GLOSSARY Finally it is common to see the term domain name shortened and referred to as simply domain The word domain has other meanings and can refer to other things such as a Windows NT domain or a class of values so you should be aware of the distinction in order to avoid confusion Domain Names are addressed in RFCs 1034 1035 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfcl034 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfcl035 txt DomainPOP Developed by Alt N Technologies to be a part of the MDaemon server DomainPOP makes it possible to provide email services for an entire LAN or workgroup from a single ISP POP mailbox In the past unless a company s email server had on constant live connection to the Internet the only way to provide Internet email services to a workgroup was for each person to have their own mailbox on the company s ISP from which they could collect their mail With DomainPOP only a single mailbox is required The ISP pools all mail for the company s domain name into the mailbox from which it is perio
148. L MESSAGES Click this option if you want the rule to be applied to all messages No further information is required this rule will affect every message except those to which a Stop Processing Rules or Delete Message action has been applied in a previous rule Select actions for this rule MDaemon can perform these actions if a message matches the rule s conditions A few Actions will require additional information that you will specify by clicking on the Action s hyperlink in the Rule Description box Delete Message Selecting this action will cause the message to be deleted Strip All Attachments From Message This action causes all attachments to be stripped from the message Move Message To Bad Message Directory Click this action to cause a message to be moved to the bad message directory Skip n Rules Selecting this action will cause a specified number of rules to be skipped This is useful in situations where you may want a rule to be applied in certain circumstances but not in others For example you may wish to delete messages that contain the word Spam but not those that contain Good Spam To accomplish this you could create a rule that deletes messages containing Spam and then place above it another rule that states if the message contains Good Spam then Skip 1 Rule Stop Processing Rules This action will skip all remaining rules Copy Message To Specified User s Causes
149. LECTION DomainPOP Mail Collection Account DomainPOP Mail Collection HEI Routing Rules Foreign Mail Security Account Parsing Name Matching Processing DomainPOP host properties D gt M Enable DomainPOP mail collection engine a Host name or IP mail myisp net Extra hosts Logon name M yCompany Password or APOP shared secret ams I Use APOP These settings allow access to the mailbox on your ISP Mail download control V Leave a copy of message on host server Delete messages once 100 or more have accumulated O never Don t download messages larger than 5000 KB 0 no limit J Delete large messages from DomainPOP and MultiPOP hosts IV Wam postmaster about large DomainPOP messages I Download messages according to size small messages first Over quota accounts C Warm account holder and delete over quota message Warm account holder and forward over quota message to Postmaster Cancel Apply DomainPOP Host Properties Enable DomainPOP mail collection engine If selected MDaemon will use the setting provided on this screen to collect mail from a DomainPOP mail host for local redistribution Host name or IP Enter your DomainPOP host s domain name here Additionally if you wish to specify a port to collect the mail from other than MDaemon s current default POP port you can do so by appending a new port value to the host name separated by a colon For example using mail al
150. MDCONFIG REMOTE CONFIGURATION CLIENT 69 CHAPTER 4 MDConfig Remote Configuration Client MDConfig MDaemon Remote Configuration Client File Setup Accounts Lists Gateways Catalogs Queues Windows Help eSS FT7T SR2Ae OE BHB4E NSBF OHB R 8 fi SMTP servers active Ha POP servers active i IMAP servers active fs LDAP server inactive FB Anti virus inactive E DomainPOP inactive a MultiPOP inactive a WebAdmin active E WorldClient active Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 54 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 55 aaaen ar aa ae aaee H A DomainPOP revd 0 H A MultiPOP revd 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 Socket connection established Fs EA POP sessions 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 0K mycompany com MDCONFIG interface ready EP IMAP sessions 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 VERS 6 0 01c2 7 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 0K MDConfig v6 0 0rc2 acceptable gpl RAW messages 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 USER administrator lt A Queued mail Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 0K lt administrator gt got it A Remote queue 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 PASS Hes A Local queue 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 0K lt administrator gt authorized es Retry queue 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 53 GETS Size A Bad qu
151. MDaemon automatically create a domain gateway when the DNS system lists a local domain as a valid MX record for an unknown recipient Be warned spammers can use this to relay mail through your Server IV Automatically create domain gateways based on DNS lookup results I Don t create domain gateways when sender of message is a local user MV Require confirmation before rendering the gateway active Send creation confirmation message to GatewayConfirm mycompany co Confirmation must be received within 1440 minutes 4 confirmation must be sent to this email address and returned within the specified time in order to keep the gateway from being deleted IV Deliver gateway s mail to higher MX hosts at each queue run Use this gateway as a pattern example net New Automatic Gateways The controls on this tab are used to configure MDaemon to automatically create a Domain Gateway page 289 for a previously unknown domain when another source attempts to deliver that domain s messages to MDaemon and a DNS query lists MDaemon s location as a valid MX record For example With automatic gateway creation enabled if MDaemon s primary domain IP address is 1 2 3 4 and a message is delivered via SMTP for an unknown domain example com MDaemon will perform MX and A record queries on example com to see if 1 2 3 4 is a known mail relay host for it If the results of the DNS queries state that MDaemon s IP address is a valid MX host for exa
152. MDaemon can keep your LDAP server up to date on all of its user accounts This makes it possible for users with mail clients that support LDAP to share a global address book that will contain entries for all of your MDaemon users as well as any other contacts that you include You can also choose to use your LDAP server as the MDaemon user database instead of its local USERLIST DAT system Thus you can configure multiple MDaemon s at different locations to share the same user database MDaemon can be configured to keep your Windows Address Book or Microsoft Outlook Contact Store up to date with your user information This provides another means of making a global address book available to your users Address Aliases provides the ability to route email messages addressed to fictitious mailboxes to a valid account or mailing list This makes it possible for individual accounts and lists to have multiple email addresses at one or more domains The Domain Gateways feature provides the option of setting up separate domains for various departments or groups that may be local to your network or located somewhere else on the Internet Using this feature all mail addressed to a domain for which MDaemon is acting as a gateway will be placed in that domain s mailbox by MDaemon It can then be collected by that domain s MDaemon server or email client and distributed to the domain s users Accounts can be controlled remotely by user
153. MDaemon will move them to the BADMSGS Mailbox folder where they can be manually deleted later by the administrator or a nightly process This only applies to pruned old messages when an account is pruned it will be deleted along with its messages instead of moved See AccountPrune txt in the MDaemon App folder for more information and command line options Adding a Secondary Domain To add a secondary domain to the Domain List SECONDARY DOMAIN EDITOR 65 CHAPTER 4 SECONDARY 1 Enter the Domain Name and IP Address 2 Click Bind To This IP only if you want to bind the domain to its IP address 3 Click Add Editing a Secondary Domain To edit a secondary domain 1 Click the Domain List entry that you wish to edit 2 Make any desired changes to the information the will appear in the controls 3 Click Replace Removing a Secondary Domain To remove a secondary domain 1 Click the entry that you wish to remove from the Domain List 2 Click Remove DOMAINS 66 SECONDARY DOMAIN EDITOR REMOTE CONFIGURATION Chapter Remote Configuration Setting up Remote Configuration Using MD Config and WebAdmin Setting up Remote Configuration se the Setup Remote Configuration menu selection to set up access to your server from the MDConfig remote configuration client or from the browser based WebAdmin server By using these features you can review or edit any of MDaemon s controls or sett
154. MDaemon will read a text file and generate new mail accounts using as little as just the first and last names of the user If you are careful to setup your account template strings properly see New Account Defaults page 216 you can generate unique accounts using only the first and last names but you can also include many other options for specific user settings if you want to override the new account defaults All fields must be separated by commas Each line of the comma delimited text file must contain only a single entry The first line must be a base line giving the names and sequence of the fields in subsequent lines A sample file would look something like this Mailbox FullName MailDir AllowAccess arvel Arvel Hathcock C Mail Arvel Y frank Frank Thomas C Mail Frank N Note The field names in the base line are used by MDaemon to determine the data sequence and can therefore appear in any order Each of the field names must be in quotes All String values must be contained in quotes and a bool field value is considered FALSE unless the first char is y Y 1 t or T First middle and last names are acceptable in each full name However you may not use commas in them 249 CHAPTER 21 IMPORTING ACCOUNTS After running the import process MDaemon will create TXIMPORT LOG detailing the import results and listing which accounts imported successfully and which failed Typical
155. Mail Pruning settings for the domain to which this account belongs then click this checkbox The default settings are located on either the Primary Domain Configuration page 53 or Secondary Domains page 63 dialog depending on which type of domain the account belongs to Automatically delete account if inactive for XX days 0 never Specify the number of days that you wish to allow the account to be inactive before it will be deleted A value of 0 in this control means that the account will never be deleted due to inactivity Delete messages older than XX days 0 never A value specified in this control is the number of days that any given message may reside in the account s mailbox before it will be deleted by MDaemon automatically A value of 0 means that messages will never be deleted due to their age Delete deleted IMAP messages older than XX days 0 never Use this control to specify the number days that you wish to allow IMAP messages that are flagged for deletion to remain in this user s folders Messages flagged for deletion longer than this number of days will be purged A value of 0 means that messages flagged for deletion will never be purged due to their age Delete old messages from IMAP folders as well Click this checkbox if you want the Delete messages older than control to apply to messages in IMAP folders as well When this control is disabled messages contained in IMAP folders will
156. OMAIN GATEWAYS ESMTP ETRN Gateway Editor notmycompany HEI Mail Forwarding POP IMAP Quotas Domain Settings ESMTP ETRN ATAN AUTH ESMTP ETRN IV Respond to ESMTP ETAN requests made for this domain Spool all mail to this host When an ETAN request for this domain is received all stored mail should be spooled to this SMTP host IV If the domain listed above is local treat it as if it were foreign It is sometimes desired to spool the mail to 4 local domain yet do so in a way that mimics remote mail processing Spool all mail to IP of machine making ETRN request Since the ETAN request might be made using a dialup connection MDaemon should respond by spooling mail to the IP address of the machine making the ETAN request Use this port when spooling mail 25 IP Access Honor ETRN ATRN requests from these IP s C Ignore ETRNZATRN requests from these IP s Add new IP Wildcards 192 168 0 ok mn Add Remove Cancel Apply ESMTP ETRN Respond to ESMTP ETRN requests made for this domain When this switch is enabled MDaemon will respond to ESMTP ETRN requests made by qualified hosts on behalf of the domain for which MDaemon is acting as an email gateway The ETRN command is an SMTP extension that signals a server storing mail for a particular domain that it is time to begin spooling the mail When MDaemon receives an ETRN request for a domain it will immediately begin spooling t
157. ORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 77 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER WorldClient RelayFax Properties Use the Setup gt WorldClient RelayFax menu selection to enable your WorldClient server and configure various WorldClient related settings You can designate the port on which it will operate as well as the time that you wish to allow WorldClient sessions to remain inactive before they expire You can also control many global or domain specific settings such as the default language and theme to use whether users can create accounts the default pagination of the message listing whether or not ComAgent support is enabled whether or not Instant Messaging is allowed and logged many Calendar and Scheduling features Public and Private address book settings RelayFax integration and much more Server Options WorldClient RelayFax Properties 20x Server Options Domain Options Address Book Calendar amp Scheduling RelayFax WorldClient properties IV Enable WorldClient server ie J WorldClient is running under IIS Bun WorldClient server using this TCP port 3000 Sessions not composing a message expire after 20 inactive minutes Sessions composing a message expire after 120 inactive minutes V Cache HTML templates to increase web server performance IV Use cookies to remember logon name theme and other properties I Respond to read confirmation requests V Require IP persistence throughout WorldClient session Bind WorldClient s web
158. ORLDCLIENT SERVER Windows Address Book WAB synchronization requires IE 5 or greater with identity support enabled Full name Home Address Home City Home State Home Zip Home Country Home Phone Home Fax Home Mobile Home Web Address Business Company Business Address Business City Business State Business Zip Business Country Business Title Business Department Business Office Business Phone Business Fax Business Pager Business IP Phone Business Web Address Comments For more information on the various Address Book options within MDaemon and WorldClient see LDAP Options Page 94 Miscellaneous Options WAB Page 209 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Calendar amp Scheduling WorldClient RelayF ax Properties 24x Server Options Domain Options Address Book Calendar amp Scheduling RelayFax Calendar options ga V Event creator has event access on all calendars IV Allow meetings to be created without specifying a location Select a domain mycompany com bd IV Provide shared calendar capabilities to all members of this domain MV Members of this domain may access only their own calendar First day of week Sunday bas V Add iCalendar events found within emails to user s calendar All domain users can create global memos No S All domain users can read global memos Yes These users always have permission to create global memos CKent dailyplanet com T
159. P addresses specified in the address listing will be refused and immediately aborted This option is useful for excluding IP s that cause problems for your mail transport system Add Click this button to add the address specified in the P Address control to the Current IP Screen Settings window Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the listing Default for Undefined IP s Undefined IPs can connect to this local IP When this option is chosen all IP addresses not listed in the IP Screen will be allowed to connect Undefined IPs cannot connect to this local IP When this option is chosen only those IP addresses specifically granted permission in the IP Screen will be allowed to connect 112 SECURITY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Host Screening Security Settings HE Address Suppression IP Screening Host Screening Current host screen entries New host screen entry AN T IP Addresses Local IP 1 2 3 4 x cit ft i P Select the IP that this new screen will belong to spam example com Prevet FP 1 234 Remote host T 4 3 2 1 Wildcards of the form altn com or altn com are da virus example net Prevent acceptable T 2 3 4 5 T 5432 This remote host can connect T 127 0 0 2 This remote host can not connect Remove SP 127 0 0 1 Default For Undefined Hosts Undefined hosts can connect to this local IP 2 C Undefined hosts can not con
160. P check before sending waiting mail Click this checkbox if you are required to perform a POP check before sending waiting mail Host name or IP address Enter the host or IP address to which you wish to connect POP logon This is the POP account s logon or account name POP password This is the account s POP password DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 59 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Unknown Mail Primary Domain Configuration 24x Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail What to do with mail for unknown local users IV Route message back to sender This option returns the message to the address which sent it along with a No Such User warning IV Send message to the Postmaster user This option sends the message to the local Postmaster aliased account J Place message in bad message directory This option sends the message to the Bad Message Directory Advanced options I Enable advanced options Send the message to this host i MDaemon should forward the message on to this remote host Use this address in SMTP envelope Use this TCP port 25 default 25 This address should be used during the The message will be sent on SMTP MAIL FROM Instruction this TCP port Cancel Apply What To Do With Mail For Unknown Local Users Route message back to sender Messages that arrive at the server destined for unknown y
161. P reve 0 E A POP sessions 0 Gp IMAP sessions 0 48 RAW messages 114 E Queued mal GP Remote queue 0 GP Local queue 0 GA Retry queue 0 Bad queue 0 GA LAN queue 0 GA RAW queue 0 Be Servers SMTP server s active POP server s active IMAP server s active LDAP server active Tue 2002 06 25 2204 57 MADDMGR SMTP gt gt gt 354 Enter mad end wth lt CRLF gt lt CALF gt Tue 2002 06 25 22 04 57 MAODMGR SMTP gt gt gt 250 Ok message caved Tue 2002 06 25 22 04 57 MAODMGR SMTP lt lt lt QUIT Tue 2002 06 25 22 04 57 MADDMGR SMTP gt gt gt 221 See ya in cyberspace Tue 2002 06 25 22 04 57 MAODMGR SMTP Completed successiully Tue 2002 06 25 22 04 57 MAODMGR Unable to evaluate STATUSMESG Tue 2002 06 25 22 04 57 MAODMGR EndRequest View 10 Sessions MADDMGREView Composel SendNow Ves Tue 2002 06 25 22 05 29 KPQHKDF BegRequest View 10 Session KPQHKDFEView ComposeNew Ves Tue 2002 06 25 220529 KPQHKDF Creating compose file type 0 Tue 2002 06 25 2205 30 KPQHKDF EndRequest Views10 Session KPQHKDFEViewrsComposeiNeweVes Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF BegRequest View 10 Session KPQHKDFiView ComposetSendNow V es Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF Creating RFC amp 22 e mail file Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP Sending message hom Frank Thomas lt Frank mycompany com gt Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP Connecting to 127 0 0 1 25 Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF
162. PTER 6 WorldClient Server 74 Overview 74 Calendar amp Scheduling System 74 ComAgent 75 ComAgent s Instant Messaging System 76 Using WorldClient 77 Starting WorldClient 77 Logging in to WorldClient 77 Changing WorldClient s Port Setting 77 WorldClient Documentation 77 Client side Help 77 WorldClient User Manual and Help 77 WorldClient RelayFax Properties 78 Server Options 78 Running WorldClient under IIS 80 Domain Options 81 Address Book 85 Automatic Address Book Synchronization 87 Calendar amp Scheduling 89 RelayFax Integration 91 CHAPTER 7 LDaemon Address Book Options 93 LDAP Options 94 LDaemon LDAP Server 97 CHAPTER 8 Shared Folders Mail Queues 99 Shared IMAP Folders 100 Shared Folders 100 Public Folders 102 Access Control List 104 Mail Queues 106 CHAPTER 9 Security Settings 108 Security Settings 108 Address Suppression 109 IP Screening 111 Host Screening 113 IP Shielding 115 SMTP Authentication 117 POP Before SMTP 118 TABLE OF CONTENTS Spam Blocker Spam Blocker Engine Spam Blocker Hosts Spam Blocker Caching Relay Settings Relay Settings Trusted Hosts Reverse Lookup CHAPTER 10 Header Translation Header Translation Header Translation Exceptions CHAPTER 11 IP Cache and DNS Lookup IP Cache DNS Lookup CHAPTER 12 Scheduling and Dialup Event Scheduler Send amp Receive Mail Simple Scheduling AntiVirus Updates RAS Dialup Settings Dia
163. Quota Yes Determines whether the user listing displays quota information message count and disk space just like MDaemon calculates it or file information number of files and total disk space LogOptions ShowUnknown Yes Show sessions that MDStats couldn t determine if they were inbound or outbound SMTP or POP ShowSmtpInbound Yes Show SMTP inbound sessions ShowPopInbound Yes Show POP inbound sessions mail checks ShowSmtpOutbound Yes Show SMTP outbound sessions ShowPopOutbound Yes Show POP outbound sessions MultiPOP DomainPOP ShowRFC822 Yes Show RFC822 local mail deliveries ShowSmtpHelo Yes For SMTP inbound sessions show HELO domain in the Host column IgnoreEmptyPop Yes Ignore mail checks when no mail was deliverd 312 AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER ShowImap Yes Shows IMAP Sessions Remap Drive letter remapping for running MDStats from a different machine than the one MDaemon is on C server c When reading from MDaemon ini replace C with server c Special OnlyOnelInstance No Allow only one instance of MDStats to run Attempting to open it again will activate the instance that is already running This option can be set on the GUI tab of Miscellaneous Options by enabling or disabling the control Restrict MDStats GUI to a single instance only MDStats Comman
164. Request View 10 Session KPOQHKDFiView Composel SendNow es Ta af aT To TE ae mpcompary com 127 0 0 1 Active 0 Buf 0 0 SMTP in out 0 0 POP in out 0 0 IMAP 0 Time left 51 min 30 sec Uptime 0 hes 08 min Statistics and Tools The default left pane of MDaemon s main interface contains two tabs Tools and Stats The Tools tab contains an entry for the Primary Domain and each Secondary Domain Under each entry there is a shortcut to the various dialogs that can be used to configure that domain s settings and users The Stats tab contains three sections Statistics Queued Mail and Servers Right click any of the controls in a 29 CHAPTER 2 MDAEMON S MAIN DISPLAY section to open a shortcut menu relevant to that control The Statistics section contains statistics regarding the number of messages sent and received by MDaemon as well as the number of mail sessions that have been initiated since startup This section also tells you how many user accounts have been used and how many more can be created S a stics contains two right click shortcut menus one for the Accounts controls and one for the Statistics controls The Accounts shortcut menu provides shortcuts for creating editing and deleting accounts The rest of the controls have a shortcut menu that can be used to clear the count listed next to the given control The Queued Mail section contains an entry for each message queue and the number of messages
165. SMTP gt gt gt 220 myccenpany com ESMTP MDaemon 6 0 0gm Tue 25 Jun 2002 22 Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP lt lt lt EHLO WorldChent Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 mycompany com Hello WorldChert pleased to meet you Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 ETRN Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 AUTH LOGIN CRAM MD5 Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 88IT MIME Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 SIZE 0 Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP lt lt lt MAIL FROM lt Frank enpoompany com gt SIZE 356 Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQOHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 lt Frank mpcomparny com gt Sender ok Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP lt lt lt RCPT TO lt Dwimble example com gt Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 lt Dwimble example com gt Recipient ok Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP lt lt lt DATA Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 354 Erter mail end with lt CALF gt lt CRLF gt Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 250 Ok message saved Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP lt lt lt QUIT Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP gt gt gt 221 See ya in cyberspace Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP Connection unexpectedly closed Tue 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF SMTP Completed successfully ur 2002 06 25 22 06 11 KPQHKDF End
166. Ss see ya in cyberspace 7207 ERR access denied 7208 OK s s mailbox has d total messages ld octets 7210 OK Sd messages ld octets 7219 ERR no such message 7220 ERR no such message only messages 1 thru d are present in your inbox 7222 OK s Ss POP Server signing off mailbox empty 7223 OK Ss Ss POP Server signing off d messages left 7214 ERR unknown POP command 7213 0OK message Sd deleted 7224 ERR message d already marked for deletion 7216 Sending TOP of message d unbuffered operation 7241 Sending lt s gt to s 7242 Connection timed out 7243 Transmission Complete lt s gt 7247 Message Sd ld bytes exceeds max message size limit of ld bytes 7248 Collecting Message d ld bytes would exceed account s max disk space limit of ld bytes 7249 Collecting Message d would exceed account s max stored message limit of 1d 7237 POP session complete ld bytes transferred 7238 POP session timed out ld bytes transferred CUSTOMIZING SMTP AND POP PROTOCOL STRINGS 329 APPENDIX E Appendix E Route Slips The concept of a route slip has been present in MDaemon since the beginning but has never been documented Typically a message file that is waiting in a queue contains within itself all the information that is needed to get the message
167. T INTEGRATION CHAPTER 21 IMPORTING ACCOUNTS Accounts to Import NT 2000 accounts This window contains a list of all the account names collected from the NT account database Selected accounts This window contains all the account names that you have selected and wish to import gt gt Click this button to move the highlighted account names from the NT Accounts window into the Selected Accounts window lt lt Click this button to remove the highlighted entries from the Selected Accounts window Importing Options Make account mailboxes equal to the NT 2000 account name Click this switch to force each imported user s NT account name to be used as their Mailbox value With this method you will not need to worry about setting up the correct New Account Template macros page 216 Use the account template to generate passwords This switch causes MDaemon to generate passwords for imported accounts using the account template settings see New Account Defaults page 216 Set account passwords equal to account names This switch causes MDaemon to use the account name as the account password Make every password equal to This switch allows you to specify a static password value that will be used by all imported accounts Authenticate passwords dynamically using NT 2000 SAM This switch enables dynamic authentication of imported accounts Rather than specifying a password MDaemon will simply authenticate
168. TA The default msg prefix value is MD and the default msg ext is MSG Attachment file names can be similarly manipulated using the following syntax attach prefix ATTH lt cr gt lt lf gt attach ext ZIP lt cr gt lt lf gt CREATING AND USING MBF FILES 263 CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES This example would generate unique names for file attachments of the form ATTHxxxx ZIP where Xxxx represents a random yet unique identifier Like those for message file names these directives are optional Note These directives will have no effect on accounts that are not auto extracting embedded attachments It is sometimes important to retain the original file s extension while generating a unique file name for it To accomplish this use the attach ext syntax This causes MDaemon to retain the attachment s original extension By default auto extracted attachments are decoded and stored in the user s FILES directory under their original file names MBF Macros and Examples The following is a list of all macros available for use when constructing an MBF file Following this list is a series of examples HEADERS HEADER XX BODY BODY AS TEXT ATTACHMENTS ATTACHMENTCOUNTS ATTACHMENT X 264 This macro will be replaced by all the original RFC 822 message headers each separated by a CRLF delimiter Using this macro the MBF will obtain all the he
169. TER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS IP Screening Use the Setup Security Settings IP Screening menu selection to configure IP Screening The IP Screen is a list of IP addresses that you have designated as either acceptable or non acceptable How the server treats attempted connections from the IP addresses listed on the IP Screen depends on the security setting selected in the Screen editor You may specify a list of IP addresses and then configure the server to only allow connections from those on the list or you can configure it to abort any connection attempt from an IP address on the list Wildcards are acceptable in any of the four IP address positions en ae Matches to any IP address 206 Matches to any IP that begins with 206 206 97 239 Matches to IP addresses from 206 97 0 239 to 206 97 255 239 Security Settings 21x Address Suppression IP Screening Host Screening Current IP screen entries New IP screen entry AN Op IP Addresses LocalIP ais 7 T AlIPs Select the IP that this new screen will belong to P 1 234 dis 10 11 12 13 Prevent RemoteIP ie 11 12 13 Prevent Wildcards of the form 192 168 0 or 192 168 1 are ao 4 3 21 acceptable s 11 22 33 44 Allow dis 44 33 22 11 Allow This remote IP can connect of 111 222 333 Allow This remote IP can not connect Remove FP 2345 i SP 5 4 3 2 Default For Undefined IPs T 127 0 0 2 C Undefined Es can connect to t
170. WorldClient options Select domain Defut Get to defaults Language en Engish MDaemon PRO only Theme Globe E MDaemon PRO only Date format emar Help I Allow users to create new accounts MDaemon PRO only New account creation password Message listing shows this many msgs per page 2 Message listing refresh frequency in minutes 10 IV Save messages to Sent folder IV Display time using AM PM MV Compose in new browser window J Empty trash on exit I Use advanced compose MV Enable ComAgent support V Enable Instant Messaging MV Log alllM traffic at the server level TIM buddy list includes members of other domains Reminders sent via IM system are sent From Administrator Note Instant Messaging functionality is available in MDaemon Pro only Cancel Apply The settings on this tab are domain specific Most of the features and controls deal with client level behavior rather than the overall behavior and configuration of the WorldClient server WorldClient Options Select domain Use this drop down list to choose the domain whose settings you wish to edit Leave it set to Default if you wish to edit the default settings The default settings will be used for all domains whose settings you haven t specifically changed If you make changes to any of the settings on this tab then you must App y them before switching to a different Se ect domain setting If you make changes and then attempt to select a
171. a copy of the message to be sent to one or more recipients You must specify which recipients are to receive the message CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 169 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Append Standard Disclaimer This action makes it possible for you to create a small amount of text that will be appended as a footer to the message Alternatively it can add the contents of a text file For example you could use this rule to include a statement that says This email originated from my company please direct any complaints or questions to me mycompany com Add Extra Header Item To Message This action will add an additional header to the message You must specify the name of the new header and its value Delete A Header Item From Message This action will remove a header from a message You must specify the header that you wish to delete Send Note To This action will send an email to a particular address You will be able to specify the recipient sender subject and a small amount of text You can also configure this action to attach the original message to the note For example you might wish to create a rule that will move all messages containing This is Spam to the bad message directory and create another rule that will send a note to someone letting them know that this has been done Remove Digital Signature Click this action to cause a digital signature to be removed from the message Run Process
172. a transmission exceeds XX KB If the transmission of data during an MDaemon connection exceeds this threshold MDaemon will close the connection 198 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS e Headers Miscellaneous Options 20x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MuliPOP WAB Misc Message header processing T Force Date header in all messages I Force Reply To header in all messages T Force Message ID header in all messages I Honor Retum Receipt To headers IV Add Precedence bulk header to system generated mail IV Add Authenticated Sender header to authenticated messages MV Add Content ID headers to RAW messages with attachments IV Add For sections to Received headers MV Strip Received headers from list messages I Strip type headers from local messages T Hide local IPs when processing message headers I Authenticate list posters using From header Add this header and value to every list message Precedence bulk Cancel Apply Message Header Processing Force Date header in all messages When a message is encountered which doesn t have a Date header MDaemon will create one and add it to the message file if this switch is selected It will be the date on which MDaemon first receives the message not when it was created by a mail client There are some mail clients that do not create this header and since some mail servers refuse to honor
173. aders contained in the incoming message Text immediately preceding this macro will be duplicated at the start of each expanded line For example O SMTP HEADER HEADERS would place each of the original RFC 822 headers into the reformatted message each preceded by the text string O SMTP HEADER This macro will cause the value of the header specified in place of the xx to be expanded in the reformatted message For example If the original message has TO joe mdaemon com then the HEADER TO macro will expand to joe mdaemon com If the original message has Subject This is the subject then the HEADER SUBJECTS macro would be replaced with the text This is the subject This macro will be replaced by the entire message body In an attempt to preserve character sets for different languages MDaemon will read the message body as stream binary data rather than pure text thus allowing a byte for byte copy of the message body This macro will be replaced by the entire message body as with the BODY macro except that MDaemon will read this as text rather than binary This may not be compatible with all char sets Text immediately preceding this template variable will be duplicated at the start of each expanded line thus gt gt BODY AS TEXT would place each of the original RFC 822 message lines into the reformatted message with the addition of the string text gt gt preceding them Text could also be adde
174. aemon as an NT 2000 system service by default it runs under the LocalSystem account Because this account does not have access to network devices MDaemon will not be able to access mail if you wish to store it on other computers across your LAN That is not unless you provide logon credentials for an account that can be used to provide the MDaemon service access to network shares We recommend creating a user account specifically designed for ranning MDaemon with whatever restrictions that you desire but which has access to those network shares that you want MDaemon to be able to use That way you can access network shares with UNC notation or mapped drives when running MDaemon as a service Further all applications launched by MDaemon e g MDStats and Pre Processing utilities will also use the security context of this same NT Account Logon name This is the logon name of the NT Account under which the MDaemon service should run Password This is the NT Account s password Domain This is the NT Domain on which the account resides Leave this field blank to logon to the default domain NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 193 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS Chapter Miscellaneous Options MDaemon Miscellaneous Options settings se the Setup Miscellaneous Options menu selection to edit various global toggles set SMTP message size limitations configure Disk Space Monitoring and specify default window sizes for Server startup and Mail Sessions
175. aemon will respond to ESMTP ETRN requests made on behalf of the domain in order to dequeue its messages To aid in security this dialog also contains controls that make it possible to assign specific IP addresses that MDaemon will honor these requests from or you can designate IP addresses that will be ignored ATRN AUTH Use the controls on this tab if you want MDaemon to respond to ATRN commands from the domain for which MDaemon is acting as an email gateway The tab also contains controls for specifying the domain s shared secret necessary for authentication and for designating whether or not authenticated requests should be considered valid regardless of IP address Mail forwarding With this dialog you can declare a host to which the domain s mail will be forwarded as soon as it arrives There is also a control for stating whether a copy of these messages will be kept locally POPAMAP Here you can create a POP account that will have access to this domain s stored mail Using the name and password that are assigned here an ordinary mail client or another MDaemon installation can access the domain s mailbox and collect its mail Quotas This dialog is used for assigning a limit to the amount of disk space that the domain may use and the maximum number of messages that may be stored Automatic Gateways Creation The controls on this dialog Gateways gt Automatic Gateway Creation are used to configure MDaemon to automaticall
176. age 68 Once the handshaking session is complete the host MDaemon sends all of its configuration information and files to the remote MDConfig client At this point MDConfig mimics the host MDaemon s settings using all the familiar dialog boxes buttons and controls that users have come to expect when configuring MDaemon Finally after making any desired changes to MDaemon s settings MDConfig uploads all of the changes to the remote MDaemon site where they will be implemented 70 MDCONFIG REMOTE CONFIGURATION CLIENT CHAPTER 5 REMOTE CONFIGURATION Only one site can be remotely configured at a time Once configuration information is provided from a remote site to MDContfig it is not possible to gather configuration information from another site until the existing configuration session has been reset see Resetting MDConfig For A New Connection below In addition it is very important to realize that changes to a site s configuration information do not take effect until the changes are uploaded to the remote site see Updating The Remote MDaemon Site below Further if changes are made to the remote site s configuration using the primary MDaemon interface while an MDConfig session is underway those changes will not be reflected in the configuration information gathered by MDConfig at the start of the session and are likely to be overwritten when MD Config updates the remote site For this reason you must avoid making changes to MDaemon loc
177. age completed and the current speed of the transfer Inactivity timeout This counter displays how much inactivity time is left before MDaemon will close the session Disconnect This button will immediately disconnect the server from the remote system CONNECTION WINDOW 33 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Chapter Primary Domain Configuration Domain Configuration Editor T he domain configuration editor can be reached via the SETUP PRIMARY DOMAIN menu selection and allows you to enter several key pieces of information regarding your domain setup Your primary domain is the default domain name and set of configuration options that your users will use to send and receive their email Only one primary domain can be configured but MDaemon can manage mail for any number of Secondary Domains and store mail for any number of Domain Gateways as well See Secondary Domain Editor page 63 Domain Gateways page 289 The Domain Configuration editor is a tabbed dialog containing the following sections which are necessary for configuring MDaemon v6 Domain ISP This dialog contains your Primary Domain s name and IP address In addition here you will specify the degree to which you want MDaemon itself to handle delivery of mail versus relaying mail to an ISP or gateway host for them to deliver for you Ports On this dialog the ports that MDaemon will monitor and use for SMTP and POP email delivery are designated You will also des
178. al up account to have a static IP address assigned to it ISPs and large organizations usually attempt to acquire a range or set of IP addresses from the InterNIC Registration Service so that all clients on their network or using their service may have similar addresses These sets are broken up into three classes Class A B and C Class A and B sets are used by very large organizations and support 16 million and 65 000 hosts respectively Class C sets are for smaller networks and support 255 hosts Class A and B sets are now very difficult to get due to the shortage of available addresses consequently most companies have to settle for multiple class C sets instead Because of this IP address shortage there is a new IP address protocol called Classless Inter domain Routing CIDR that is gradually replacing the older system The current Internet Protocol standard IPv4 is addressed in RFC 791 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc791 txt IP version 6 IPv6 is addressed in RFC 2460 at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2460 txt CIDR is addressed in RFCs 1517 1519 at http www rfc editor org rfc rfcl1517 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfc1518 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfc1519 txt IP Number See IP Address above ISP An Internet Service Provider ISP is a company that provides Internet access and services to the end user Most ISPs provide multiple Internet services to their customers such as WWW access
179. all controlled on a per domain basis Besides controlling Global Memo permissions the Calendar amp Scheduling tab can also be used to enable and disable the Calendar System completely for each separate domain Thus you can provide the group calendar features to as many or few of your hosted domains as you please ComAgent Replacing WCWatch in MDaemon 6 0 is ComAgent a secure instant messaging system address book client and tray applet that provides quick access to WorldClient s email features ComAgent can be downloaded by each WorldClient user and then installed on the individual s local computer It is preconfigured for the specific user when downloaded thus limiting the need to configure it manually ComAgent runs in the background and checks your account for new mail by querying the WorldClient server directly This eliminates the need to open a browser or keep one open to check your email ComAgent checks for new mail and notifies you with a sound or visual alert when new mail arrives ComAgent also displays a list of your mail folders and the number and type of messages that each one contains new unread and read Furthermore it can be used to launch your browser and move it immediately to a specific mail folder the first unread message the compose page or your calendar page Additionally when you are using Alt N s LDaemon LDAP server to maintain WorldClient s Public and Private address books ComAgent can be used
180. ally while it is being configured using MDConfig Instructions for moving MDConfig to another computer on your network are listed at the end of this Section Connecting to a Remote MDaemon Site File Connect This menu selection or toolbar button opens the Connect to MDaemon dialog on which you will specify the connection and security information needed to connect to MDaemon Connect To MDaemon MDaemon Hast Information AT Host name or IP address mail example com x v4 0 mes Logon administrator Password ames Use this port 3002 Connect as version fa 0 0 Notes maximum of 255 characters This is the MDaemon on my backup server V Remember these settings Cancel For a remote configuration session to be established the remote MDaemon sites Remote Configuration settings page 68 must match those supplied on this dialog Server Information Host name or IP address Enter the domain name or IP address of the MDaemon site to which you wish to establish a remote configuration session This control s drop down list box will contain entries for each host name or IP address that was used when the Remember these settings control was enabled When one of those entries is selected the rest of the controls on this dialog will display the corresponding information for that entry MDCONFIG REMOTE CONFIGURATION CLIENT 71 CHAPTER 4 Logon The value entered here must match the Administrator or S
181. alues 10 Urgent 50 Normal and 80 Bulk Replace TO field with N A list s name member s full name Use these options to designate what address will be displayed in the TO field whenever MDaemon receives a message directed to the list N A When N A is selected MDaemon will make no changes to the address displayed The address contained in the TO field will appear exactly as the sender of the message entered it List s name This option displays the address of the Mailing List in the TO field Member s full name When this option is selected the TO field will contain the full name and email address of the list member to whom the message is directed or just the email address if the full name is not available Note The Member s Name option can only be chosen when MDaemon Will Crack List Mail has been selected on the Routing tab of the Mailing List Editor When Route A Single Copy is selected MDaemon will default to the List s Name option Include Listname List Member in TO field When this feature is enabled Listname List Member will be displayed in the real name portion of the message s TO field Note Not all email clients support the displaying of real names in the TO field of messages In such clients only the actual email address designated in the Replace TO Field With feature will appear Don t distribute messages larger
182. am sending mail and a program receiving mail should interact Once a server has received email via SMTP it is usually stored there and can then be retrieved by a client via the POP IMAP or other protocol The SMTP protocol is addressed tn RFC 821 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc821 txt Spam Junk mail on the Internet Spam is most commonly used to refer to unsolicited bulk email although it is often used to refer to any unwanted email in general A spammer will obtain hundreds thousands or even hundreds of thousands of email addresses from various sources and then spam the list with a message or solicitation Spam can however be used to refer to a newsgroup or discussion board posting as well when the posting is some unwanted or unrelated advertisement for a product or web site Spam is quickly becoming a serious problem on the Internet tying up a great deal of time and server resources And because spammers oftentimes use vatious techniques to attempt to mask the origin of the message such as spoofing their addresses to appear to be someone else or attempting to relay the spam covertly through multiple mail servers preventing it can be a challenge Alt N Technologies MDaemon server is equipped with a number of features designed specifically to aid in fighting spam such as Spam Blocker IP Shielding IP Screening Relay Control and others The origin of using the term Spam
183. anges via email messages Account can modify the public address book Click here to allow this account to edit and delete entries within the WorldClient public address book and or the LDAP based public address book Enable with care If account is synchronizing folders with ComAgent modifications made will propogate to all users Account Options Hide account from the EVERYONE list LDAP address book and VRFY results MDaemon automatically creates and maintains a mailing list called Everyone which can be used to address each account on the server By default MDaemon will include all accounts when it constructs the Everyone mailing list Uncheck this switch if you want the account to be private and hidden from other users This will also hide the account from the LDAP address book and VRFY results Store mail messages in an encrypted state If selected MDaemon will store mail for this account in an encrypted state The messages will not be directly readable while in this state and should provide a very good level of protection MDaemon will decrypt the message when it is transmitted via POP to the account holder but while stored on disk this account s message files will be encrypted Allow changes to account settings via email messages This switch determines whether the user has access to account variables through remote email messages This feature allows the user to perform common account maintenance such as changing passwords
184. anslation If a message is FROM a local domain and TO a non local domain then the headers of the outgoing message are scanned for the text specified here and that text is replaced with something new This is useful when you want to convert each occurance of a local domain name within the message headers with a real domain name Existing header text New header text IV Translate headers in forwarded messages IV Translate headers in gateway messages forwarded to host or IP Currently defined header translations MyCompany mail MyCompany com Remove Exceptions OK Cancel Enter New Header Translation Existing header text Type the text that you want to be replaced when it is found within the headers of any outbound message New header text This text will be substituted for that which you specified in the Existing Header Text field Add Click this button to add the above text parameters to the Current Header Translations list Translate headers in forwarded messages Click this checkbox to cause the header translations to apply also to messages automatically forwarded from a local domain to a non local domain Translate headers in gateway messages forwarded to host or IP Click this check box if you want the headers to be translated in forwarded domain gateway mail See the Mail Forwarding tab of the Gateway Editor page 296 for more information HEADER TRANSLATION 133 CHAPTER 10 HEADER
185. as been changed If you are upgrading from a previous version of MDaemon then you should delete your existing DELERR DAT file from the APP directory and restart MDaemon so that a new one with appropriate wording will be created WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 21 CHAPTER 2 22 Improved Mailing List Catalog Control Command Processing All the Remote Server Control via Email Messages control commands that MDaemon processes for mailing lists and catalogs can now be sent in the message s Subject in addition to the former method of being contained in the message body Improved Mailing List Subscribe Unsubscribe A system has been added whereby special email addresses will be available for list users to subscribe and unsubscribe easily to your mailing lists On the Miscellaneous Options dialog you will find a switch that says this Honor lt List gt Subscribe and lt List gt Unsubscribe addresses When this switch is enabled MDaemon will always recognize email addresses of this format as valid as long as the list actually exists For example suppose you have a list called MyList altn com People will be able to subscribe unsubscribe to your list by sending an email message to MyList Subscribe altn comand MyList Unsubscribe altn com The content of the subject and message body is irrelevant Also when this feature is acttve MDaemon will insert the following header into all list messages List Unsubscribe lt
186. assword i Password Only allow connections from these IP s New IP address Add Remove Wildcards of the form 192 168 0 or 204 168 can be used MDConfig backup directory we C MD aemon Backup Browse Before updating MDaemon will backup its existing configuration files and place them in this directory Cancel Remote Configuration Engines Enable MDConfig remote configuration engine Click this Checkbox to enable support for remote configuration MDaemon will listen for connections on the MDConfig port specified on the Domain Configuration Editor page 41 When this switch is cleared all attempts to remotely configure the server using MDConfig will fail The MDConfig server can also be enabled disabled from the Message Router Enable WebAdmin remote configuration engine Click this checkbox if you want to enable MDaemon s WebAdmin server With this server active MDaemon s files can be edited using a web browser by connecting to MDaemon s primary domain URL and specifying the port on which WebAdmin is listening page 41 For example if your primary domain s URL was www altn com and WebAdmin was listening on port 1000 then you could reach WebAdmin by pointing your browser to http www altn com 1000 The WebAdmin server can also be enabled or disabled from the Message Router MDConfig Security Issues these do not apply to WebAdmin Administrator MD Config must send this logon and
187. asy reference to the sites that were logged as blacklisted Automated Configuration Backup This new feature makes it possible to archive all MDaemon configuration files at midnight each night The settings to configure this feature are located on the Disk tab of Miscellaneous Options You can specify exactly which files and file extensions to back up Security Enhancements Host Screening Similar to IP Screening Host Screening allows you to specify the names of remote hosts that MDaemon will or will not accept mail from When an incoming SMTP connection specifies the name of the remote server in the EHLO or HELO parameter MDaemon will compare it to the names listed in the Host Screening configuration If a match is made the session is either allowed or disallowed depending on how you have configured permissions for that particular host Enhanced Spam Blocking Several new options have been added to the Spam Blocker system to further combat unwanted mail First a new checkbox is present which will allow you to configure MDaemon to check the IP addresses found in all the Received headers within SMTP and DomainPOP collected mail Sometimes spammers will relay spam to you through your ISP When this occurs the Spam Blocker is fooled because your ISP is usually trusted or is typically not an originator of spam With this new switch all the IP addresses in the source route of the message will be checked and if any one of them is found t
188. ated There are similar controls used for setting these limits for your other domains on the Secondary Domains dialog page 63 There are also controls on the Account Editor that can be used to override these settings for individual accounts see page 230 Note When old messages are pruned rather than actually delete them MDaemon will move them to the BADMSGS Mailbox folder where they can be manually deleted later by the administrator or a nightly process This only applies to pruned old messages when an account is pruned it will be deleted along with its messages instead of moved See AccountPrune txt in the MDaemon App folder for more information and command line options DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Account and Old Mail Pruning Automatically delete account if inactive for XX days 0 never Specify the number of days that you wish to allow an account belonging to this domain to be inactive before it will be deleted A value of 0 in this control means that accounts will never be deleted due to inactivity Delete messages older than XX days 0 never A value specified in this control is the number of days that any given message may reside in a uset s mailbox before it will be deleted by MDaemon automatically A value of 0 means that messages will never be deleted due to their age Delete deleted IMAP messages older than XX days 0 never Use
189. attachments Some mail systems require attached files be extracted before submission of mail messages to the mail stream To facilitate this MDaemon can auto extract incoming MIME attachments and place them in the Files subdirectory underneath the domain s message directory This directory will only be used if the Auto Extract switch is selected Deliver messages at each scheduled remote mail processing interval Ordinarily when MDaemon receives mail that is intended for one of its Domain Gateways it will store the messages until in that domain connects to MDaemon to collect it In some situations you may want MDaemon to attempt to deliver the mail directly via SMTP rather than waiting for the domain to collect 290 GATEWAY EDITOR CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS it When this control is enabled MDaemon will attempt to deliver the domain s messages at each remote mail processing interval The gateway s mailbox will temporarily act as a remote queue and delivery will be attempted Any messages that cannot be delivered will simply remain in the gateway s mailbox until they ate collected by the domain or are successfully delivered later they will not be moved into the remote queue or retry system Apply this MBF File to Incoming Messages The MBF file specified here will be applied to all incoming messages that arrive for the domain This allows for any special reformatting that may be required GATEWAY EDITOR 291 CHAPTER 26 D
190. ature if you wish to grant the MDaemon user permission to modify their account settings via WebAdmin They will only be able to edit those settings that you enable below When this feature is enabled and the WebAdmin server is set to Aive on the Message Router user will be able to log in to WebAdmin using their browser by pointing it to http mdaemonsdomain com Port They will first be presented with a logon screen and then a screen that contains the settings that they have been given permission to edit All they need to do is edit whatever settings they choose and then click the Save changes button They can then close their browser there is no need to logoff or do anything further 234 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR If the user has been given administrative permission by enabling This account can edit other users and mdaemon via the web they will see a different screen after they log in to WebAdmin For a discussion on the administrative options within WebAdmin see the WebAdmin section of this manual This account has administrator level access to WebAdmin Enable this checkbox to grant the user administrative access to WebAdmin This will give the user complete access to MDaemon s files and options via the web For a discussion on the administrative options within WebAdmin see the WebAdmin user manual Edit real name Enabling this feature will allow the user to modify their Rea Name setting Edit password Click this
191. automatically keep a Windows Address Book file wab or Microsoft Outlook Contact Store current with each account s full name and email address This is desirable for those who wish to share an address book among users of products like Outlook but do not wish to use an LDAP server for that purpose Windows Address Book WAB Options Mirror email addresses and full names to Windows Address Book Enable this checkbox if you want your users names and email addresses to be mirrored to a wab file or the Microsoft Outlook Contact Store In the Windows Address Book on the Tools Options menu you can configure whether or not your Windows Address Book will share contact information between Outlook and other applications by storing data in the Microsoft Outlook Contact Store or an address book wab file Use this specific WAB file Specify the path to the wab file in which you wish to mirror your user information If you leave this control empty then MDaemon will use the shared contacts store within the default Windows Address Book NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 209 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS misc Miscellaneous Options 2x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MuliPOP WAB Misc Miscellaneous options IV Enable disk checking for waiting message counts j T Process check for mail when server is first loaded I Use strict quotas count sub dirs and hidden files T Do not send welcome message to new accounts MV
192. be considered as exceptions to the relay rules listed on the Relay Settings tab Reverse Lookup MDaemon can query DNS servers to check the validity of the domain names and addresses reported during incoming messages Controls on this tab can be used to cause suspicious messages to be refused or a special header inserted into them Reverse Lookup data will also be reported in the MDaemon logs 108 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Address Suppression Security Settings 24x Address Suppression IP Screening Host Screening Currently suppressed addresses _ New suppression entry AN T Domains Domain name example com H P All Domains es 3 L le inf Select the domain this new suppressed address will example info apply to SP example biz Email address spammer example net f dailyplanet com Wildcards of the form domain com or com E somegquy somedomai 3 example org Jak address a com example com Remove Add E another a com Options SP worldclient com T this com I Refuse to accept mail during SMTP session gt T Inform sender when their mail is rejected Address suppression works by comparing the address within the email message itself or the address passed in an incoming SMTP session s MAIL parameter to the values configured here If a match is made the message is rejected In some cases the message is never accepted
193. be no scheduled time for Saturday or Sunday those days would be exempt and would not trigger a Remote Mail session The hour and minute setting you designate when you setup your trigger days doesn t matter Simple Scheduling only checks whether there is an entry present for that day EVENT SCHEDULER 139 CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP Scheduling Options Always send mail if there s xx or more messages waiting in the outbound queue MDaemon will trigger a mail session whenever the number of messages waiting in the outbound queue meets or exceeds the number that you specify here These sessions are in addition to any other normally scheduled sessions Always send mail if a waiting message is more than xx minutes old When this control is enabled MDaemon will trigger a mail session whenever a message has been waiting in the outbound queue for the number of minutes specified These sessions are in addition to any other normally scheduled sessions Scheduled Remote Mail Processing Events What day Select the days that you wish to schedule What hour Select the hour that you wish to schedule What minute Select the minute that you wish to schedule Add Once you ve selected the day hour and minute click this button to add this time to the list of scheduled events Remove Clicking this button will remove an entry that you have selected from the schedule listing Clear all This button removes all entries from the schedu
194. becoming common as well The nodes in a WAN are usually farther apart in another building or city and connected via telephone lines satellite hook up or some other form of connection The Internet itself is a network It is often described as a network of networks Network Address Translation Network address translation NAT is a system whereby two sets of Internet Protocol addresses IP addresses are used by a single network one for external traffic and the other for internal traffic This is mainly used as a firewall measure to help ensure network security Your computer will appear to have a certain IP address to computers outside your LAN while your actual IP address is altogether different Hardware or software placed between your network and the Internet performs the translations between the two addresses Using this method it is common for multiple computers in a LAN to share one company IP address Thus there is no way for someone outside your network to know your actual address and directly connect to your computer without it first being qualified or authenticated during the translation Network Interface Card A network interface card NIC is a computer circuit board that enables a computer to be connected to a network NICs provide a full time network connection whereas a modem used by most home computers to dial in to a network via telephone lines usually provides only a temporary connection Most NICs are designed
195. being Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME and Unix to Unix encode Uuencode For incoming messages Alt N s MDaemon server can be configured to either leave the decoding process to the recipient s email client or automatically decode attachments and store them in a specific location before delivering the message to the local user Backbone A line or series of connections that form the major pathway within a network This term is relative since the non backbone lines in a large network might be larger than the backbone in a smaller network 335 GLOSSARY Bandwidth The amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time through a network or modem connection usually measured in bits per second bps A full page of English text is about 16 000 bits which a fast modem could transfer in about 1 to 2 seconds Full motion full screen video would require roughly 10 000 000 bits per second depending on compression A good illustration of bandwidth is a highway The highway represents the connection while the cars traveling on it represent the computer data The wider the highway the greater the bandwidth the more cars that will be able to travel on it Baud Baud rate is a measure of how frequently carrier signals change value on a phone line It is a reference to the speed at which a modem transmits data Usually slower modems are described in terms of Baud rate while higher speed modems are described in bits per s
196. blank Ms omeServerSHD RelayFax APP Browse RelayFax Integration Options Allow WorldClient users to send faxes thru Relay Fax Click this option to integrate RelayFax with WorldClient When active it will cause a Compose Fax control and other fax related features to appear on the WorldClient pages Use SMTP to deliver faxes to RelayFax RelayFax monitors a specific mailbox for incoming messages that are to be faxed Click this option and MDaemon will use the normal SMTP email delivery process to send these messages to that mailbox s address This option is useful when RelayFax is monitoring a mailbox located somewhere other than your LAN If RelayFax resides on your LAN you may choose to have MDaemon deliver the messages directly WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 91 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER to RelayFax s message queue and thus bypass the SMTP delivery process altogether For more information on this method see Directly deliver faxes into RelayFax s incoming queue below RelayFax server s email address Specify the email address to which you want messages intended for faxing to be delivered This value must match the address that you have configured RelayFax to monitor for these messages Directly deliver faxes into RelayFax s incoming queue If RelayFax resides on your LAN you may choose this method rather than SMTP for distributing messages to it for faxing When MDaemon receives a message intended for Rela
197. boundary SetContentType ex SSetContentTypes MIME type Changes what MDaemon thinks is the content type of the message SetAttachment ex 3SetAttachment filespec Forces MDaemon to attach the specified file to the newly generated auto response message Auto Response Script Samples A typical auto response script might be called VACATION RSP and look like this Greetings SENDER You re message regarding SUBJECTS won t be read by me because I m on vacation so LEAVE ME ALONE Yours truly yeah right RECIPIENTS This is essentially the VACATION RSP file that shipped with the first version of MDaemon This example script uses macros developed for MBF files Using the macros defined in the above table you can also control the headers which will be generated when this auto response script is processed and mailed back to SENDER Lets amend out old VACATION RSP file to use some of the new macros Greetings SENDER You re message regarding SUBJECT won t be read by me because I m on vacation so LEAVE ME ALONE Yours truly yeah right SRECIPIENTS SetSubject RE SUBJECT SetAttachment c windows bugoff exe The new message which will be generated using this script as a template will have a custom subject line and will have the specified file encoded as a MIME attachment The sSetSubject RE SSUBJECTS instruction is handled in this way 1 The SSUBJECTS portion is expanded and
198. by Alt N Technologies its suppliers or component vendors The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE PRODUCT like any other copyrighted material except that you may either a make one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT solely for backup or archival purposes or b install the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a single computer provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT THIRD PARTY COMPONENT LICENSING TERMS Third party utilities application programs and or components designed to integrate with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT are subject to the license terms governing those products You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE PRODUCT except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY NO WARRANTIES THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ALT N TECHNOLOGIES DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY AGAINST INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO
199. by double clicking an entry there is no need to have MDaemon summarize the log file while compiling it Open log Click this button to open the Windows Open dialog for choosing which log file that you wish to view The default folder that this dialog will display is the Log Fike directory that you have designated in the MDaemon menu selection Setup Primary Domain Directories If you click this button when there is a Log Fil already displayed in the Lag Report list box MDStats will give you the option to append the new file to the one that is currently being displayed After a log is displayed a message box will be opened which contains a summary of the selected log When saving a Log Report as a text file this log summary will be appended to the file being saved Log Summary Ed A Start Date 1999 10 27 10 53 01 i End Date 2000 05 16 15 39 37 SMTP Inbound 6 DomainPOP 7 RFC822 42 Progress indicator Because Log Files can be very large below the Log Report list box is a progress indicator bar that provides a visible indication that the program is still operating when large files are being loaded or saved by MDStats Save The information contained in the Log Report list box can be saved as a file in comma delimited format for use with databases or as a plain ASCII text file by clicking the Save button After choosing a name and location for this file in the Windows Save As dialog MDStats will ask you whether you wa
200. can be used to prevent most spam email from reaching your users This new security feature allows you to specify several ORDB and MAPS RBL type hosts which maintain lists of servers known to relay spamy that will be checked each time someone tries to send a message to your server If the connecting IP has been blacklisted by any one of these hosts the message s will be refused or flagged Note Use of this feature can prevent most spam from being sent to your users However some sites are blacklisted by mistake and therefore using this feature could cause some difficulties but it is worthwhile if you are worried about controlling spam Spam Blocker lookups are performed using the DNS server specified in Setup Primary Domain DNS This feature was tested and performed well with no significant delay per mail session Spam Blocker includes an exception database for designating IP addresses that will not be subject to Spam Blocker lookups Before activating this feature you should add your local IP address range to the exception list to prevent lookups on it 127 0 0 1 is exempt and therefore doesn t need to be added to the exceptions For information on spam and how to control and eliminate it using ORDB and MAPS RBL visit http www ordb org http www mail abuse com rbl ORDB and MAPS RBL ate trademarks of their respective organizations Alt N Technologies is proud to be associated with them an
201. can run the Antivirus Updater when an I Wednesday Urgent Update message is received Urgent Updates are email messages sent by AI N to your MDaemon What hour alerting it of a new virus threat MDaemon responds JE very hour 7 by triggering an immediate and unscheduled virus definition update What minute If you would like to subscribe to the Urgent Update oo v Remove program please visit Add http www altn com Products Urgent Update as Clear all Cancel Apply Simple Scheduling Wait XX minutes after the last AntiVirus update before conducting another one Click this checkbox and specify the number of minutes that you want MDaemon AntiVirus to wait before checking for new virus signature updates Note this is actually the number of minutes that MDaemon AntiVirus will afempt to wait after the last time you checked for an update whether the update was triggered by the scheduler or manually The scheduler and manually triggered updates are given precedence over Simple Scheduling and it will therefore reset this counter if an AntiVirus Update event is triggered by one of those other methods Thus for example if you have this option set to check for updates every 240 minutes and you manually check for an update after 100 minutes have passed then this counter start over again at 240 Urgent Updates Activate urgent updates Click this checkbox to activate the urgent updates feature With this feature enable
202. ch as your files email and so on The downside of Telnet is that it is a command line program that uses Unix commands The TELNET protocol is addressed in RFCs 854 855 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc854 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfc855 txt Terminal A device that allows you to send commands to a remote computer A terminal is a keyboard display screen and some simple circuitry Oftentimes however personal computers are used to emulate terminals Tiff An acronym for Tagged Image File Format It is a graphics file format created to be a universal graphics translator across multiple computer platforms TIFF can handle color depths ranging from 1 bit to 24 bit UDP User Datagram Protocol UDP is one of the protocols that make up the TCP IP suite of protocols used for data transfers UDP is a known as a stateless protocol because it doesn t acknowledge that packets being sent have been recetved UDP is addressed in RFC 768 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc768 txt Unix Unix or UNIX is an operating system created by Bell Labs in the 1960s Designed to be used by many users at the same time it is the most popular operating system for servers on the Internet There are now many different operating systems based on UNIX such as Linux GNU Ultrix XENIX and others URL Every file or server on the Internet has a Uniform Resource Locator URL It is the address that
203. checkbox if you wish to allow the user to modify their Account Password Edit mail directory location This control is used to give the user permission to modify their Message Directory location w Caution You should exercise caution in granting this permission to users Giving users the ability to change their mail directory could effectively give them access to any directory on your system Edit forwarding address When this feature is enabled the user will be able to modify their forwarding address settings Edit advanced forwarding When this feature is enabled the user will be able to modify their Advanced Forwarding Options Edit encrypt mail setting This feature allows the user to control whether or not mail messages of 4096 bytes or less will be stored in their mailbox in an encrypted state Edit IMAP rules PRO version only Use this control to enable users to create and manage their own IMAP Mail Rules see page 240 This feature is only available in MDaemon PRO Edit EVERYONE list setting This feature allows the user to control whether or not they will be included on MDaemon s EVERYONE Mailing List Edit quota settings Click this checkbox if you wish to allow the account to modify their quota settings ACCOUNT EDITOR 235 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Edit MultiPOP settings Click this switch if you wish the user to be able to enable and disable MultiPOP collection This control doesn t grant the user the abi
204. client This tool is perfect for mobile staff and users who do not have a dedicated machine from which to access their email WorldClient is equipped with a complete suite of email client features Send and receive email spell check messages manage your email in multiple personal folders display the interface in any of 18 languages schedule meetings and appointments with group Calendar amp Scheduling features manage your MDaemon account settings when used in conjunction with WebAdmin manage contacts and more WorldClient is also equipped with ComAgent a small utility that can be downloaded and installed on a user s local computer This provides easy access to your email and folders and checks for new messages without having to open your web browser It also includes a complete Instant Messaging system that can be used to quickly chat with other MDaemon WorldClient users MDaemon is equipped with many features designed to help you make your email system secure The Spam Blocker feature will help you put an end to most spam email messages that spammers try to route through or to your domain IP and Host Screening and Address Suppression provide the capability to screen and prevent certain addresses and domains from connecting to or sending mail through your system They also make it possible to connect to specific IP addresses while screening all others Equipped with support for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP
205. cording to their personal interaction with them A user who hasn t read a message will see it flagged as unread while a user who has read it will see the status as read If this control is disabled then all users will see the same status So once any user has read a message then all users will see it marked as read Submission address Use this drop down list to associate a specific account with a shared folder so that messages destined for that Submission Address will be automatically routed to the shared folder However only users who have been granted post permission to the folder will be able to send to that address Create After specifying a folder s name and other settings click this button to add the folder to the list Replace If you wish to edit one of the Public Folders entries click the entry make the desired changes to the Fodder name ot other setting and then click the Replace Edit access control list Choose a folder and then click this button to open the Access Control List dialog for that folder Use the Access Control List dialog to designate the users that will be able to access the folder and the permissions for each user SHARED IMAP FOLDERS 103 CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Access Control List IMAP Folder Inbox Shared EAE Access Control List Access rights Email Access level Default rights anyone lt none gt Frank n nyc
206. curity Existing rules 0 AT 1 if address lt contains gt Mike then send message Remove 1 RT 1 if address lt is equal to gt Dwimble altn com then 2 AT 2 if address lt does not contain gt altn com then don Default 2 New rule If the parsed address C Isequalto Isnotequalto Contains Doesn t contain This test atncom OOO Then do this with the message Don t deliver to this address Send to user or group of users Cancel Apply Existing Rules This list shows you the rules that you have created and will be applied to your messages Remove Press this button and the selected rules in the Existing Rules list will be removed Default Press this button to remove all existing rules and replace them with a predefined set of defaults Clear all This button removes all existing rules New Rule If the parsed address Is equal to is not equal to contains does not contain This is the type of comparison that will be made when an address is compared to this routing rule MDaemon will search each address for the text contained in the This tex field and then proceed based DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 159 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION upon this control s setting does the address s complete text match exactly not match exactly contain the text or not contain it at all This text Enter the text that you want MDaemon to search for when scanning the addre
207. d C Collect MultiPOP mail once every 5 times remote mail is processed Collect MultiPOP mail dynamically But no more often than 5 times per hour Wait at least 10 minutes between each collection Cancel Apply MultiPOP Collection Frequency Collect MultiPOP mail every time remote mail is processed Click this option if you want MDaemon to collect all MultiPOP mail every time that remote mail is processed Collect MultiPOP mail once every XX times remote mail is processed Click this option button and specify a numeral in the box if you want MultiPOP mail to be collected less often than remote mail is processed The numeral denotes how many times remote mail will be processed before Multi POP mail will be collected Collect MultiPOP mail dynamically Click this checkbox if you wish to collect MultiPOP messages dynamically Ordinarily MuliPOP is collected for all users at the same time at each remote mail processing interval or at every x number of intervals When collected dynamically MultiPOP messages are collected for each individual user when that user checks his or her local mail via POP IMAP or WorldClient rather than for all users at once However because MultiPOP collection is triggered by a user checking his email any new MultiPOP messages collected will not be visible to the user until he checks his mail again Thus he would need to NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 207 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS chec
208. d MDaemon AntiVirus will immediately connect to the update location and download the high priority update whenever MDaemon receives an Urgent Update message To receive these messages you must first subscribe to EVENT SCHEDULER 141 CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP the Urgent Updates mailing list at http www altn com Products Urgent_Update asp See AntiVirus Updater page 180 for more information Scheduled AntiVirus Updates What day Select the days that you wish to schedule What hour Select the hour that you wish to schedule What minute Select the minute that you wish to schedule Add Once you ve selected the day hour and minute click this button to add this time to the list of scheduled events Remove Clicking this button will remove an entry that you have selected from the schedule listing Clear all This button removes all entries from the schedule listing 142 RAS DIALUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP RAS Dialup Settings Click the Setup RAS Dialup Dialdown menu selection to configure your RAS Dialup Settings This dialog will only be available if you have Remote Access Services installed on your system It is used by MDaemon when you need to dial up your ISP just prior to a Remote Mail processing event Dialup Settings RAS Dialup Settings 24x Dialup Settings ISP Logon Settings Post Connection LAN Domains LAN IPs Dialup control o M Enable RAS dialup
209. d and edited in the DELWARN DAT file 38 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Ultimate Fate of Undeliverable Mail Ifa message is still undeliverable after XX days then This setting determines the number of days that a message can remain in the retry queue before being removed Place the undeliverable message in the bad message queue Once a message has reached the time limit set in the If A Message Is Still Undeliverable After xx Days Then control a copy of that message will be moved to the bad message directory if this switch is enabled Inform the sender that the message could not be delivered Once a message has reached the time limit set in the If A Message Is Still Undeliverabke After xx Days Then control this switch will cause MDaemon to send a message to the sender informing them that the message has been permanently removed from the server The text of this message can be found and edited in the DELERR DAT file Inform the postmaster that the message could not be delivered If this switch is enabled the postmaster will be notified when a message has been permanently removed from the retry system unless it s an MDaemon auto generated message The retry system will never inform MDaemon when an auto generated message fails to be delivered However because such information may be useful to the postmaster he or she will be informed when these messages cannot be delivered Click t
210. d Line Parameters Note All command line parameters are not case sensitive Number 1 through 8 Display a specified queue in the Queue Page 1 Remote Queue 2 Local Queue 3 Retry Queue 4 LAN Queue 5 RAW Queue 6 Bad Queue 7 SmtpIn Queue 8 Save Queue L N InputFile OutputFile Produce a log file report Specifying an N after the L means do not save as a comma delimited file A If producing a log file report append new information to the output file rather than overwriting it AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES Chapter Additional MDaemon Features Additional Features Functions and Statistics of MDaemon v6 MDaemon s Text Editor Daemon Server v6 provides a Text Editor which may be opened with the FILE NEW menu selection The Text Editor can be useful for quickly creating data files for use with Auto Responders and various other MDaemon features such as MBF and RAW files B Editor Document OF x After creating your document select FILE SAVE AS from the Menu Bar and then choose a name for your file including the appropriate file extension Such as mbf for MBF files rsp for Auto Responders dat for MPaemon s data files and raw for RAW files Editing MDaemon Files MDaemon s text editor can also be used to edit a number of existing files used by MDaemon You can open these file
211. d Options 224 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Enable automatic extraction of MIME encoded attachments If set this switch causes MDaemon Server v6 to automatically extract any Base64 MIME embedded file attachments found within incoming mail messages Extracted files are removed from the incoming mail message decoded and placed in the accounts Fe Directory A notice is placed within the textual portion of the mail message in place of the encoded data which states where the file was placed and what the file name is This feature is extremely useful for mail transport systems and clients which do not have built in MIME capability or which require encoded parcels to be extracted and placed in separate directories from the textual portions of the mail message before being submitted into the mail stream User s who wish to access their accounts through POP agents such as Eudora or the Windows Exchange client may wish this option to be turned off not set as more powerful email client software can properly handle MIME Base64 encoded attachments ACCOUNT EDITOR 225 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Forwarding Account Editor Frank Thomas 21x Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Mail forwarding options IV This account is currently forwarding mail Forwarding address es separate each address with a comma M YHome myisp net Enter the e
212. d before sending the signal to dequeue your mail place the required AUTH logon parameter here AUTH shared secret Enter the password used in the AUTH shared secret required by your ISP DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 51 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Archival Primary Domain Configuration HEI Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Archive settings MV Archive a copy of all inbound outbound mail Send a copy of every inbound outbound email to these addresses Postmaster archive altn com Specify multiple addresses by separating each one with a comma M Include MDaemon mailing list messages in the archive also T Include MultiPOP collected mail in the archive also MV Label archive messages with Archive Copy in message subject Use these settings if you wish to archive a copy of every message which is sent or received by this domain You may specify a local email address alias or a remote address You can specify more than one address by separating each with a comma Cancel Apply Archive Settings Archive a copy of all inbound outbound mail This switch enables the archival engine Activating it will cause a copy of every inbound and outbound message that passes through the server to be sent to the address es specified in the control following Send a copy of every inbound outbound message to these addr
213. d make use of their services on behalf of our customers SPAM BLOCKER 119 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Spam Blocker Engine Spam Blocker 21x Spam Blocker Engine Spam Blocker Hosts Spam Blocker Caching Spam Blocker engine MV Enable Spam Blocker engine Click here and MDaemon will query MAPS RBL ORDB type hosts to detect blacklisted sites Spam Blocker options I Flag messages from blacklisted sites but go ahead and accept them Click here to accept messages from blacklisted sites but place an RBL Warning header within them I Check Received headers within SMTP collected messages Check only this many Received headers 0 all Zz MV Check Received headers within DomainPOP collected messages Check only this many Received headers 0 all o IV Skip Received headers within messages from exempted IPs The above options allow MDaemon to test IP addresses found within the message s source route for possible spammers IV Add blacklisted sites to the IP Screen under All IPs I Authenticated sessions are exempt from Spam Blocker lookups Click here to configure IP addresses that are exempt from E Spam Blocker lookups aceptions MV Always exempt Trusted IPs from Spam Blocker lookups _ Cancel Apply Spam Blocker Engine Enable Spam Blocker engine Click this checkbox to turn on Spam Blocker Spam Blocker Options Flag messages from blacklisted sites but go ahead and accept them When
214. d one that will cause all of MDaemon s mail queues to be processed Lock server Unlock server Shut down MDaemon Open MDaemon Next there are controls to lock and unlock MDaemon s interface and to shut down MDaemon altogether Locking Unlocking MDaemon s Main Interface To lock the user interface minimize MDaemon click the Lock server control and then enter a password into the dialog that opens After confirming the password by entering it a second time MDaemon s user interface will be locked it cannot be opened or viewed though MDaemon will continue to function normally However you will still be able to use the Process all queues now control on this menu to process the mail queues manually if you desire To unlock MDaemon double click the tray icon or right click the icon and choose Open MDaemon or Unlock Server and then enter the password that you created when you locked it bd bd Last you can open the MDaemon servers interface by clicking the Open MDaemon menu selection 32 CONNECTION WINDOW CHAPTER 2 MDAEMON S MAIN DISPLAY Connection Window A Connection Window appears each time a request is detected by the server from some remote client or whenever a session is initiated by the server to collect or deliver a message This window keeps you informed of the status of the transaction and alerts you to any problems encountered during the course of the ma
215. d that you configure CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 177 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS your background scanner to exclude the MDaemon folders from monitoring disable this control and allow MDaemon AntiVirus to handle the scanning of your message attachments directly Exclude gateways from virus scanning Click this checkbox if you want messages bound for one of MDaemon s domain gateways to be excluded from virus scanning This may be desirable for those who wish to leave the scanning of those messages to the domain s own mail server For more information on domain gateways see Domain Gateways page 288 Do not scan messages bound for these addresses Exclusions Click the Exclusions button to specify recipient addresses to exclude from virus scanning Messages bound for these addresses will not be scanned for viruses by MDaemon AntiVirus Wildcards are allowed in these addresses You could therefore use this feature to exclude entire domains or specific mailboxes across all domains For example example com or VirusArchive Scanner Actions Click one of the option buttons in this section to designate the action that MDaemon will take when MDaemon AntiVirus detects a virus Delete the infected attachment This option will delete the infected attachment The message will still be delivered to the recipient but without the infected attachment You can use the Add a warning control on the bottom of this d
216. d to the right of this macro This macro will be replaced by the entire list of all attached files extracted from the original message Text immediately preceding this template variable will be duplicated at the start of each expanded line thus FILE LIST ATTACHMENTSS would place each of the attachment file names into the reformatted message each preceded by the text string FILE LIST NOTE This macro is only available when you are extracting attachments from the account This macro will be replaced with an integer value equal to the number of attachments extracted from the original message NOTE This macro is only available when you are extracting attachments from the account This macro will be replaced with the attachment file name of the relative attachment number passed in the X parameter Ifthe value in X is greater than the total number of attached files then the entire variable is removed and replaced with nothing CREATING AND USING MBF FILES CHAPTER 23 SENDER SENDERMAILBOX SENDERDOMAIN RECIPIENT RECIPIENTMAILBOX RECIPIENTDOMAIN SUBJECTS MESSAGEID CONTENTTYPE PARTBOUNDARY DATESTAMP ACTUALTO ACTUALFROM REPLYTO PRODUCTID XXX Sample MBF file s 1 RFC 822 MBF AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES This macro resolves to the full address of the message originator and corresponds to the RFC 822 To header This macro resolves to the mailbox of the message origina
217. ddress or mailing list into this space This is the actual address that will recetve the message when it is addressed to a corresponding alias Add Click the Add button to register the account alias request The contents of the Address Alias and Actual Address fields will be combined and placed in the Current Aliases window It s OK to relay mail for aliases that include foreign domains Click this control if you want MDaemon to relay mail for Address Aliases regardless of your Relay Control settings page 125 256 ALIAS EDITOR CHAPTER 22 ADDRESS ALIASES Aliases are ignored if address matches an existing account or mailing list Sometimes you may want to create an alias that will be applied to some addresses but not others when they match an existing account For example you could create an alias using a wildcard stating that mycompany com me mycompany com which would cause all messages containing mycompany com to go to me mycompany com even if the addresses matched existing accounts But with this control activated only addresses that didn t match an account would have that alias applied to them Fully qualified aliases no wildcards are allowed to be list members Click this checkbox if you want to allow address aliases to be members of MDaemon mailing lists Only actual accounts can be list members if this control is not enabled Note address aliases containing wildcards are not permitted to be list members
218. de language into its grammatical components that can be analyzed For example dividing a sentence into verbs adjectives nouns and so on In computers to parse is to divide a computer language statement into parts that can be made useful for the computer A parser in a compiler is takes each program statement that a developer has written and divides it into parts that can then be used for developing further actions or for creating the instructions that form an executable program Alt N Technologies MDaemon server and other products often parse email messages to determine their destination or to process them through filters and other tools Ping An acronym for Packet Internet Groper It is a basic Internet program used to determine whether a specific IP address is reachable and accepting requests It does this by sending an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Echo request and waiting for a response Ping is commonly used as a verb when referring to this process For example I am going to ping that server to see if it is online Pinging an IP address is usually as simple as typing ping followed by the IP address or domain at the DOS prompt For example Ping 1 2 3 4 ICMP is addressed in RFC 792 and the Echo protocol is addressed in RFC 862 These can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc792 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfc862 txt POP Stands for Post Office Protocol POP also commonly app
219. delivered to the proper location There are headers stored within the MSG file such as the X MDaemon Deliver To header which provide MDaemon with instructions as to where and to whom the message should be delivered Sometimes however it is necessary or useful to override this information and provide specific alternatives to where and to whom an MSG file must be sent The route slip provides just such a mechanism A route slip is a file which provides MDaemon with vety specific instructions as to where and to whom a message file should be sent If a route slip is present for a particular message file then the settings within the route slip and not those within the MSG file itself control where and to whom the message is sent Route slips end with the extension RTE For example if a message file waiting to be sent is called MD0000 MSG then the corresponding route slip file for this message will be called MD0000 RTE and must be located in the same directory mail queue as the message file The format of a route slip is as follows RemoteHost DeliverTo remote domain com This section of a route slip provides MDaemon with the server to which the corresponding MSG file is to be sent MDaemon will always attempt a direct connection to this host attempting to route the message in as short a time as possible Only one host may be specified RemoteHost IgnoreRcptErrors Yes or No It is possible to specify an unlimited number of recip
220. dically collected by DomainPOP Then DomainPOP parses the messages to determine the intended recipients of each and distributes them to the appropriate local user mailboxes Thus email is provided for an entire network from a single dialup ISP account Download The process by which your computer retrieves or obtains data from another computer For example information is obtained from the Internet by downloading it from other computers The reverse of this is uploading If you wish to send information to another computer then you will pad it to them Driver A small program that communicates with a certain hardware device Drivers contain information needed by the computer and other programs to control and recognize the device Windows based computers often have drivers packaged as a dynamic link library DLL file Most hardware devices used with Macs do not need drivers but when a driver is necessary it will usually come in the form of a System Extension DUN See Dial up Networking above Email Stands for Electronic mail This term also appears in the forms E mail e mail and email all have the same meaning Email is the transmission of text messages over communications networks Most computer networks have some form of email system Some email systems ate confined to a single computer network but others have gateways to other networks which enables them to communicate with multiple locations or to the Interne
221. dified see WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 CHAPTER 1 MDAEMON V6 0 LDAP Options Page 94 for more information ComAgent has the ability to poll LDaemon at regular intervals and acquire all the contact information being stored there It then publishes this information to the local computer s Windows Address Book or contact store This has the effect of instantaneously updating any local software package which uses the local address book system for example Outlook Outlook Express For more information on this feature and other Address Book related features in MDaemon and WorldClient see Automatic Address Book Synchronization Page 87 LDAP Options Page 94 Miscellaneous Options WAB Page 209 Secure Accountable Instant Messaging System ComAgent is equipped with a simple but effective instant messaging IM system With this system you can communicate instantly with any other account on your MDaemon server You can choose a list of buddies from a list of all MDaemon users and then see which ones are online and ready to receive an IM You will also be able to start a group conversation involving several buddies at once All of the IM features are available via the shortcut right click menu within ComAgent Because many businesses and administrators have reservations about using an Instant Messaging system in their company due to the inherent lack of centralized accountability and the inability to monitor IM traffic in
222. dress book provider Click this option if you want to use an LDAP server as WorldClient s Public and Private address book provider If you clear this option then a local plain text disk file will be used for the address book see Use disk file as public address book provider below When using an LDAP server as your address book provider each contact contains a number of fields that may be edited from within WorldClient See Automatic Address Book Synchronization page 87 for the complete list of the Address Book contact fields Public and Private Address Book Settings The following six options Host name or IP through Search filter are listed in two identical columns on the Address Book tab Although the controls in both columns have identical functions the first column applies to the Public Address Book and the second column applies to the Private Host name or IP Enter the host name or IP address of the LDAP server that you want to use as the address book provider Port This is the port on which the LDAP server will listen for connections from WorldClient Bind DN This is the distinguished name DN that will be used in the bind operation for authentication In most cases you should leave this control set to lt USER gt which will require each uset s unique logon credential rather than a single global value Choosing lt ANON gt will allow anonymous binding rather than require authentication Bind password This is the password
223. dresses On the Secondary Domains Editor for each secondary domain that you wish to host you will include the domain name the IP address to which it will be associated and whether or not it will be bound to its IP address For more information on hosting multiple domains see Hosting Multiple Domains page 62 See also Primary Domain Configuration page 34 Account Editor page 222 SECONDARY DOMAIN EDITOR 63 CHAPTER 4 SECONDARY DOMAINS Secondary Domains x Secondary domain list 013 mj Domainname 1P Bind_ Inactive limit Message age Deletec T company mail 127 0 0 1 No 60 180 0 fig T example com 127 0 0 1 No 0 Y example org 127 0 0 1 No 0 0 0 T 0 Y mdaemon com 4 3 o M p d 5 4 3 2 N 0 0 4 b Domain name Company mail Add Replace Remove IP address 127 0 0 1 J Bind sockets to this IP only Delete accounts within this domain if inactive for 60 days 0 never Delete messages kept by users within this domain if older than J 180 days 0 never Delete deleted IMAP messages in this domain older than 30 days 0 never IV Delete old messages from IMAP folders as well Creating a new secondary domain bound to a specific IP changing the binding status of an existing secondary domain or changing the IP address of a bound secondary domain will require a restart of MDaemon before such changes can be applied Cancel Secondary Domain List This window contains the list of your
224. e page 249 24 WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 CHAPTER 1 MDAEMON V6 0 Additional Changes See the Relnotes txt file located in MDaemon s Docs subdirectory for a complete list of all changes and fixes to MDaemon from previous versions Information for those Upgrading from Previous Versions Version 6 Special Notes MDaemon is no longer compatible with the original Windows 95 release MDaemon now requires Windows 95 OSR2 or higher Due to complexities added to the Public Folders it will not be possible to administer them via MD Config in this version A new option which is enabled by default requires that messages sent from Postmaster take place on an authenticated mail session This could cause some problems for certain third party software which tries to send messages as Postmaster You can disable this switch from within the Alias Editor if is causes you problems We changed the name of the WorldClient Watch program to ComAgent in order to better reflect its function both now and into the future Please direct your WorldClient Watch users to return to their Options page and re download the installer for ComAgent After installing ComAgent your users can safely uninstall WorldChent Watch ComAgent offers some exciting new capabilities New Public IMAP Folder functionality does away with the use of mailing lists to govern access to the public folder Access is now controlled via Access Control Lists Check each of your
225. e Mailing List Editor page 269 You can also use the Add Extra Header Item To Message action of the Content Filters page 168 to insert the Precedence header into any message 325 APPENDIX C Appendix C Creating an SMTP Session Policy Statement More and more sites these days are announcing an up front policy regarding relaying of SMTP mail during the SMTP session itself If you would like to have MDaemon send a statement to the remote SMTP client when it attempts to send a message to your site you can do so by placing a text file called POLICY DAT in the app directory The content of this file will be sent to the remote SMTP client immediately after the SMTP greeting For example a POLICY DAT file with a statement regarding relaying of mail would look like this during the SMTP transaction 220 Alt N Technologies ESMTP MDaemon v6 220 This site does not authorize you to relay mail 220 If you are not an authorized user of our domain s mail 220 server you must 220 not relay mail through this site 220 HELO domain com and so on The POLICY DAT file must be comprised of printable ASCII text only and have no more than 512 characters per line however no more than 75 characters per line is highly recommended The maximum size of this file is 5000 bytes MDaemon will not display files larger than 5000 bytes Each line within this file must start with 220 except the last line which must start with 220 n
226. e beginning with the letter P will be ignored by the content filtering process Every other message will be processed through the content filter system Once processed MDaemon will change the first character of the filename to a P In this way a message will only be processed through the content filtering system once Content Filtering Rules Enable rules processing engine Click this checkbox to enable content filtering All messages processed by MDaemon will be filtered through the content filter rules before being delivered 166 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Existing Content Filter Rules This box lists all rules in the order that they will be applied to a message This makes it possible for you to arrange your rules to achieve a greater level of versatility For example If you have a rule that deletes all messages containing the words This is Spam and a similar rule that sends those messages to the Postmaster then putting them in the right order will enable both rules to be applied to the message This assumes that there isn t a Stop Processing Rules rule that applies to the message higher up in the list If so then you would use the Move Up Move Down buttons to move the Stop rule below the other two Now any message containing This is Spam would be copied to the Postmaster and then deleted Note Since version 3 MDaemon has had the capability to create rules t
227. e building or area usually having all nodes computers or workstations connected together with some configuration of wires or cables or some other form of media Most large companies have a LAN which greatly simplifies the management and sharing of information amongst employees and offices Most LANs utilize some form of email or chat system and share devices such as printers in order to avoid having to have a separate device for each station When the network s nodes are connected together via phone lines radio waves or satellite links it is called a Wide Area Network WAN instead of LAN Latency The time it takes a data packet to move across a network connection While a data packet is being sent there is latent time during which the sending computer waits for a confirmation that the packet has been received In addition to bandwidth latency is one of the factors that determine the speed of your connection LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is an online directory service protocol that is a simplification of Directory Access Protocol DAP The directory system is in a hierarchical structure consisting of the following levels The root or starting directory country organization organizational 345 GLOSSARY unit and individual within that unit Each LDAP entry is a collection of attributes with a unique identifier called a distinguished name DN Because it is an open protocol is efficient and has
228. e contains a unique identifier Route single copy of list mail to this smart host Host Name If selected MDaemon will route a single copy of each list message to the specified smart host This method employs multiple RCPT TO commands during the SMTP session with the specified host Ignore errors when spooling list mail to host Since some smart hosts will refuse to queue or spool mail for certain domains the routed approach to list delivery could cause numerous problems An error code returned from the smart host as a result of this refusal would ordinarily cause MDaemon to abort the delivery attempt If this switch is set MDaemon will ignore error codes returned from the smart host during delivery of routed list mail thus allowing those members that are accepted a chance to receive the list message MAILING LIST EDITOR 273 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS This host allows XX RCPT TO s per message 0 no limit Some hosts limit the number of RCPT TO statements that they will accept when you are attempting to route a single copy of a message through them If you specify the limit in this control then MDaemon will work around it by creating additional copies of the message and dividing the list into smaller groups Then it will deliver the message to those groups thus avoiding the need to exceed the limitation This is similar to cracking the list but into groups instead of individuals 274 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS
229. e entry must belong Each entry will contain the objectclass attribute with this as its value Object class address book Specify the object class to which each MDaemon users LDAP address book entry must belong Each entry will contain the obj ectclass attribute with this as its value WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 95 CHAPTER 7 LDAEMON ADDRESS BOOK OPTIONS Configure Click this button to open the LDAP dat configuration file in a text editor It is used for designating the LDAP attribute names that will correspond to each MDaemon account field For information on using an LDAP server as the Public and Private address book provider for your WorldClient users see the Address Book tab of the WorldClient RelayFax Properties dialog page 85 96 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 7 LDAEMON ADDRESS BOOK OPTIONS LDaemon LDAP Server LDAP Options RAE LDaemon LDAP Options LDaemon LDAP server properties LAENA Note LDaemon requires Windows NT 2000 ZA veo Start amp Stop LDaemon when MDaemon starts amp stops LD aemon command line optional h Idap 1001 Ex h Idap 1001 or h Idaps Idap 127 0 0 1 666 If you change the port LDaemon is using you must also change the LDAP port in the Setup Primary Domain Ports tab Edit LDaemon configuration file Stop amp Restart LDaemon LD aemon logging debugging options restart LD aemon after changing MV Trace function calls I Conf
230. e exact times for mail delivery and collection or use a counter to process mail at regular intervals You can also set conditions that will trigger mail processing at unscheduled times such as when a certain number of messages ate waiting to be delivered or when a message has been waiting a specified amount of time If you have installed MDaemon AntiVirus there will be an additional tab on this dialog called AntiVirus Updates This tab is used for scheduling how often you want MDaemon AntiVirus to check for virus signature updates Event Scheduler Send amp Receive Mail Event Scheduling AES Send amp Receive Mail AntiVirus Updates Local RAW system mail processing interval 60 min Scheduled remote mail processing events a J 60 What day Friday at 00 00 12 00 AM Friday at 08 00 8 00 AM J Sunday T Thursday Friday at 12 00 12 00 PM Friday at 16 00 4 00 PM J Monday J Erida Monday at 00 00 12 00 AM T Tuesday I Saturday Monday at 08 00 8 00 AM I Deliver collect remote mail at this above interval V Deliver local mail immediately upon reception V Deliver remote mail immediately upon reception Monday at 12 00 12 00 PM Simple scheduling I Wednesday Monday at 16 00 4 00 PM Thursday at 00 00 12 00 AM V Wait 30 minutes after the last mail What hour Thursday at 08 00 8 00 AM session starts before initiating the next one Every hour 7 Scheduling options Tuesday at 00 00 12 00 AM F A eee eee
231. e mailing list Messages submitted to a moderated list that have the appropriate password specified as the first X characters of the subject line will not be subject to moderation that is the message will be immediately posted as if it had come from the moderator For example to bypass the moderator on a moderated list called MDSUPP which has a password of ALTN make ALTN the first 4 characters of the message subject 278 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Membership limit Limit this list s membership to xx members 0 no limit With this feature you can place an upper limit on the number of people who are allowed to subscribe to the Mailing List Enter a zero into this field if you do not wish to limit list subscriptions Note This limit is only placed upon those who can Subscribe to the list through the Subscribe command This limit does not apply to subscriptions entered through the MDaemon interface or through Subscription commands that are accompanied by the list Password MAILING LIST EDITOR 279 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Subscriptions Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Subscribe IV Allow people to subscribe to this mailing list via email This switch controls whether or not you will allow people to join this mailing list by sending SUBSCRIBE mail to MDaemon
232. e messages while restricting that from others Once a public or user IMAP folder has been created you can use the Content Filter to set criteria by which certain messages ate moved into that folder For example it might be useful to make a rule that would cause messages containing support mydomain com in the TO header to be moved into the Support public folder The Content Filter actions Move Message to Public Folders and Copy Message to Folder make this possible For shared user folders you can use your personal IMAP Mail Rules to route specific messages to them In addition to using Content Filters and IMAP Mail Rules you can associate a specific account with a shared folder so that messages destined for that Submission Address will be automatically routed to the shared folder However only users who have been granted post permission to the folder will be able to send to that address For added convenience the mailing list editor also contains a Public Folders tab that makes it possible for you to configure a public folder for use with a particular list If you enable this feature then a copy of each list message will be placed into the specified public folder All public folders are stored in the Public Folders directory within the MDaemon directory hierarchy 99 CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Shared IMAP Folders To reach the Shared IMAP Folders dialog click Setup gt Shared IMAP Folders on MDaemon
233. e new content filter rule Select Conditions For This Rule iia Mli the FROM HEADER contains If the TO HEADER contains C If the SUBJECT HEADER contains C If the CC HEADER contains If the REPLY TO HEADER contains xl Select one or more conditions that will tigger this rule into action Select Actions For This Rule Delete Message Strip All Attachments From Message Move Message To Bad Message Directory Skip n Rules Sto i Processine R ules Select one or more actions that this rule will take NOTE Actions will be processed in sequential order and any messages deleted or moved will cease all further actions from being processed Rule Description Apply this rule to messages in the LOCAL amp REMOTE queue If the FROM HEADER contains specific strings Then Remove attachments specify information and Stop processing rules for this message gt This dialog is used for creating Content Filter Rules It is reached by clicking the New Ru button on the Content Filter dialog Give This Rule a Name Type a descriptive name for your new tule here By default it will be called New Rule n Define New Content Filter Rule Select conditions for this rule This box lists the conditions that may be applied to your new tule Click the checkbox corresponding to any condition that you want to be applied to the new rule Each enabled condition will appear in the Rule Description box below Most Co
234. e theirs goes down GIF Graphics Interchange Format is a popular format for image files and is the most common format of images found on the Internet GIF uses indexed colors or a palette of a certain number of colors which greatly reduces file size especially when the image contains large areas of the same color The reduced size enables them to be quickly transferred between systems and accounts for their popularity on the Internet The GIF compression formula was originally developed by CompuServe and thus you will often see GIF referred to as CompuServe GIF Graphical User Interface See GUI below GUI Pronounced gooey this acronym stands for Graphical User Interface A GUI makes it possible to interact with your computer or application by using a pointing device to click graphical elements on the screen rather than typing in text at a command line The Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac operating systems are both GUI based but although first introduced by Apple the idea of a graphical user interface actually originated from Xerox Host Any computer on a network that acts as a server for other computers on the same network The host machine may be running a web server email server or other services and it is common for it to provide several services at once Host is also often used in the verb form to host For example a machine running an email server would be hosting the email On peer to peer ne
235. e using mail example com 523 will connect to that host on port 523 Ghosts Terminal Services Support If you start MDaemon from the command line and pass the ghost command line switch an engine less copy of the GUI will start We call these detached GUIs ghosts Since ghosts are detached from the main MDaemon and don t do any mail processing you can usually get better responsiveness out of them Ghosts use a green tray icon and say Ghost in the window caption You can run a ghost through Terminal Services and edit the properties of the actual MDaemon service For a ghost WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 CHAPTER 1 MDAEMON V6 0 to display logging information within the various services tabs you will need to enable the new logging option Log each service into a separate log file This option is enabled by default MDaemon 6 0 0 supports only a single running ghost instance Improved Logging A new switch was added to the Logging Options which will cause MDaemon to maintain separate logs by service rather than a single file For example with this switch set MDaemon will log SMTP activity in the MDaemon SMTP 1log file and IMAP activity in the MDaemon IMAP 1log file One side effect of these changes is that it is no longer possible to specify an arbitrary file name for the logs so this control has been removed from the Logging Options dialog Further a new Spam Blocker log file has been added which will allow you to have an e
236. ears as POP3 is the most commonly used email protocol for retrieving email from a mail server Most email clients use the POP protocol although some also support the newer IMAP protocol as well POP2 became a standard in the mid 1980s and required SMTP to send messages It was replaced by the newer version POP3 which can be used with or without SMTP POP is sometimes used as a verb when referring to collecting your email from a server For example I m going to POP my mailbox to get my mail POP3 is addressed in RFC 1939 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfcl939 txt Port In TCP IP and UDP networks and the Internet a port is the endpoint of a logical connection and is identified by a number from 0 to 65536 Ports 0 to 1024 are reserved for use by certain privileged protocols and services For example web servers typically are listed on port 80 SMTP servers typically communicate on port 25 and POP servers send and receive mail on 25 Generally only one program at a 350 GLOSSARY time can use or bind to any given port on each machine When browsing the Internet oftentimes certain servers will be running on non default ports which require you to specify the port in the URL after a colon For example www example com 3000 Port can also be used to refer to the sockets on a computer used for connecting peripheral devices and hardware to it For example serial ports parallel ports USB ports and s
237. eat deal of flexibility with regard to the amount and type of information that is logged in those files See the Log File dialog page 188 for more information on logging options Composite Log View Located on the Windows menu of MDaemon s menu bar is a Composite log view option Clicking that option will add a window to the router that will combine the information displayed on one or more of the router s tabs Use the controls on the Miscellaneous Options dialog s GUI tab page 194 to designate which tabs information to combine in that window Note The layout of the panes in the Message Router window is not limited to the default positions described above You may change the layout be selecting the Windows menu selection and then clicking the Switch panes control corresponding to the desired layout Tray Icon Whenever the MDaemon server is running its icon will be visible in the system tray However apart from simply letting you know whether the server is running the icon is also dynamic and will change colors based upon the current server status The following is a list of the icon indicators All okay No mail in local or remote queues oO All okay Mail in local or remote queues Oo Available disk space below threshold see page 205 7 4 Network is down dialup failed or disk is full Icon i Blinking A newer version of MDaemon is available TRAY ICON CHAPTER 2 MDAEMON S MAIN DISPLAY There is additiona
238. ecause MDaemon Pro supports the IMAP email protocol accounts created in MDaemon Pro can also be accessed by clients using that protocol instead of just the POP protocol Mailbox Name logon Enter the POP USER name that the client domain will use to access the messages stored in its mailbox Password or shared secret Enter the password or shared secret that the client s domain will use to access the messages stored in its mailbox GATEWAY EDITOR 297 CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Create update account Click here to create an account or to update the Mailbox name and Password values if the account already exists Note You can completely edit or even remove an account using the Account Editor Be careful if you remove an account because that will delete the account s mail and file directories which also happen to be the ones the gateway is using 298 GATEWAY EDITOR CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Quotas Gateway Editor notmycompany 21x Domain Settings ESMTPETRN ATANZAUTH Mail Forwarding POP IMAP Quotas Quota options IV This gateway must observe these quota settings Maximum number of messages stored at once 2000 Once this limit has been reached any further attempts to deliver messages to this gateway will be refused Maximum disk space alowed 20000 KB Once this amount of disk space has been consumed any further attempts to deliver messages to this gateway will be refused When a gateway exceeds one
239. econd Baud rate and bits per second are not necessarily synonymous terms since each signal can encode more than one bit in high speed connections Bit A single Binary digit It is the smallest unit of computer data a single digit number in base 2 Le 0 or 1 It is usually abbreviated with a lower case b as in bps bits per second A full page of text is approximately 16 000 bits Bitmap NMost pictures you see on your computer including all the ones found on the Internet are bitmaps A bitmap is a really just a map of dots or bits that looks like a picture as long as you re not to close to the screen or have the bitmap magnified too much to see the shape they make Common Bitmap file types include BMP JPEG GIF PICT PCX and TIFF Because bitmap images are made up of a bunch of dots if you zoom in on a bitmap it looks blocky rather than smooth Vector graphics usually created in CorelDraw PostScript or CAD formats scale up much better because they are geometric shapes generated mathematically rather than simply being made of seemingly random dots Bps Bits Per Second is a measurement of how fast computer data can be moved from one place to another For example a 33 6 kbps modem can transfer 33 600 bits per second Kilobits 1000 bits per second and megabits 1 000 000 bits per second are abbreviated Kbps and Mbps respectively Browser Short for Web browser it is a
240. ect Class ccscssceeeseeeeseeeeeseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeees 95 ODMR cccseeseeeenseeeeeneeeeeeneneenseeeens 41 51 294 On Demand Mail Relay sc00eesseeeee 51 294 Options cseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Outbound Session Threads OVvervieW usossssonoussnunununuouonnunononuonunounanunounenene P Parsing Deduping Mail csccsecnseeeneeeeeeeeenenees 155 List of parsed headers ss 155 Names preceeding email address 163 parsing received headers 155 Parsing Subject for addresses 155 Skipping over Received headers 155 Password ssss1 1 ISP POP accounts POP ports sccccscseeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeneeseeenees POP Servel sccscsceseeeneeseeseeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees Postmaster cscseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee informed when dialup fails 2 200005 143 Precedence csceseesnseneeseeseseeeeeeeeneeseneeeees 325 Prepost Processing Preventing duplicate messages 00008 155 Primary Domain Configuration 00c000 34 Archival s sssssan2nn00202002 0 22222 2 Dequeue Directories ccsceceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 57 Primary Domain Setup s Priority Mail cscsecsceeeneeeeeeeneneeennee Priority mail database PrOCESS senssesesssenensnnsnnnnnnensonseone
241. elay mail for these domains The domains listed here do not require DUN or RAS in order to be contacted 4 message in the message queue set to be delivered to one of these domains will not initiate a dialup session and will be spooled at scheduled local mail processing intervals These MSG files are stored in a directory called LNDOMAIN which stems off the LOCALO directory Cancel Apply These domains are on my local LAN The domains listed here are considered by MDaemon to be part of your local LAN Therefore no dialup is required in order to deliver a message to one of them New local LAN domain Enter a domain name to add to the Local LAN list and click the Add button to add it Relay mail for these domains If this switch is selected MDaemon will relay mail for these domains This provides some measure of control over the traffic sent to and from these domains Add Click this button to add an entry to the list of LAN domains Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the list of LAN Domains 148 RAS DIALUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP LAN IPs RAS Dialup Settings HE Dialup Settings ISP Logon Settings Post Connection LAN Domains LAN IPs Remove These IP s are on my local LAN WAS 456 456 456 456 mP 1192 168 New local LAN IP Add The IPs listed here do not require RAS DUN to reach Thus it s ok to shut down a RAS session if needed even when connections fro
242. emand for a low cost solution for those companies that need to their own mail server but cannot afford a static IP address or dedicated online presence ODMR is addressed in RFC 2645 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2645 txt OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM is an often confusing and misunderstood term An OEM is a company that uses another company s equipment or products in its own product that is packaged and sold under a different brand or company name For example HyperMegaGlobalCom Inc is an OEM because it purchases computer components from one or more different companies puts them all together into a single customized product and then sells it with HyperMegaGlobalCom stamped on it The company that sold HyperMegaGlobalCom the components might also be an OEM if they in turn got their components from someone else as well OEM is an unfortunate misnomer because OEMs are not actually the original manufacturers they are the packagers or customizers In spite of this many people still often use the term OEM when referring to the actual hardware manufacturers instead of those who repackage it and understandably so On the fly The term on the fly is commonly used it two different ways First it is often used to denote something that can be done in a hurry or easily while in the middle of performing some other task For example a bookkeeping product might s
243. enabling disabling any of MDaemon s various servers Routing Displays the routing information To From Message ID and so on for each message that is parsed by MDaemon SMTP All send receive session activity using the SMTP protocol is displayed on this tab POP When users collect email from MDaemon using the POP3 protocol that activity is logged here IMAP Mail sessions using the IMAP protocol are logged on this tab RAW RAW or system generated message activity is logged on this tab CFG All MDConfig activity is displayed on the CFG tab MPOP This tab displays MDaemon s MultiPOP mail collection activities DPOP This tab displays MDaemon s DomainPOP activity CF AV MDaemon s Content Filter and AntiVirus operations are listed on this tab When a message is scanned for viruses or matches the criteria of one of the Content Filter s message rules the relevant information related to that message and the actions taken are logged here 30 MESSAGE ROUTER CHAPTER 2 MDAEMON S MAIN DISPLAY WorldClient Displays WorldClient s session activities Active This tab displays an entry for each active connection to MDaemon Whether SMTP POP IMAP WorldClient or other type of connection information about that connection is displayed here Note The information displayed on these tabs has no affect on the amount of data that is actually stored in the log files However MDaemon does support a gr
244. er for certain words and then delete or replace them When creating this rule click the specify information 170 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS link in the Rule Description to open the Header Search and Replace dialog on which you will designate the header and words to replace or delete Jump to Rule Use this action to jump immediately to a rule further down in the list skipping over all rules between the two Rule description This box displays the new rule s internal script format Click any of the rule s conditions or actions listed as hyperlinks and the appropriate editor will be opened for specifying any needed information Modifying an Existing Content Filter Rule To modify an existing content filter rule select the rule and then click the Edit Ru button on the Content Filter dialog The rule will be opened for editing in the Modify Rule editor The controls on this editor are identical to the Create Rule Dialog CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 171 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Admins Attachments Content Filter x Notifications Anti irus AntiVirus Updater Content Filter Admins Attachments File Compression Administrators This is the list of the Content Filter administrators that will receive notification messages postmaster mycompany com postmaster example com Renave O Restricted attachments These files will be removed from mes
245. ers to serve as the delimiter instead of only a single character such as P For example using at will allow you to make logon values of arvel at altn com Several key features such as Accounts Mailing Lists and Security Settings are on a per domain basis When you create a mail account you must specify the domain to which the new account belongs The same goes for Mailing Lists This means that features such as the IP Screen and IP Shield are tied to domains individually Some features however such as the DomainPOP Real Name Matching feature are tied exclusively to the primary domain As part of the multi domain process when you create a secondary domain the following aliases will be set up to automatically MDaemon secondarydomain com MDaemon primarydomain com listserv secondarydomain com MDaemon primarydomain com listserver secondarydomain com MDaemon primarydomain com list serv secondarydomain com MDaemon primarydomain com These aliases will be automatically removed if the secondary domain is deleted Secondary Domain Editor MDaemon Server Version 6 contains full support for multiple domains In addition to the Primary Domain Configuration settings page 34 it contains the Secondary Domains Editor used for designating any number of additional domains that you wish to support as well as the IP address to which each will be associated MDaemon supports both dedicated static and multi homed IP ad
246. es Personal J Misc Shared Mise Inbox Shared Important Drafts Inbox New IMAP folder Remove Folder name JInbox Shared Create Replace Edit access control list Creating removing or changing entries cannot be undone by clicking Cancel Cancel IMAP Folders This area displays all of the users IMAP Folders and can be used to share access to them with other MDaemon users When the account is first created this area will be empty until you use the Fodder name and Create controls or the controls on the IMAP Mail Rules tab to add a folder to it Subfolders in this list will have the folder and subfolder names separated by the delimiter character designated on the Shared Folders tab of the Shared IMAP Folders dialog click Setup gt Shared IMAP Folders gt Shared Folders Remove To remove a Shared IMAP folder from the list select the desired folder and then click the Remove button New IMAP Folder Folder name To add a new folder to the list specify a name for it in this control and click Create If you want the new folder to be a subfolder of one of the folders in the list then prefix the new folder s name with the parent folder s name and the delimiter character designated on the Shared Folders tab of the Shared IMAP Folders dialog For example if the delimiter character is and the parent folder is My Folder then the ACCOUNT EDITOR 245 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR new sub
247. esh Because mail queues are dynamic while MDaemon is active with message files constantly being transferred to and from them you should regularly click this button to refresh any list of files that you may have displayed Note You can edit the MDstats ini file to cause displayed lists to automatically refresh To do this simply open the MDstats ini file located in MDaemon s app directory and edit the AutoRefresh key under the QueueOptions heading to reflect the number of seconds that AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 305 CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER you wish to elapse between refreshes Entering the value 0 means that you do not want the list to automatically refresh Example AutoRefresh 15 the list would refresh every 15 seconds Copy When one or more files are selected click this button to copy the selected files to another queue or user s mailbox folder After clicking this button the Copy Message s dialog box will open from which you can select the desired location to which you wish to copy the selected files Move When one or mote files are selected click this button to move the selected files to another queue or uset s mailbox folder After clicking this button the Move Message s dialog box will open from which you can select the desired location to which you wish to move the selected files Note Files copied or moved to other queues will rarely retain their original file names To avoid overwriting
248. esses Enter one or more addresses to which you wish to send archival messages Multiple addresses must be separated by a comma You may specify Local and Remote addresses and Address Aliases Include MDaemon mailing list messages in the archive also Select this switch if you want archived mail to include your mailing list messages Include MultiPOP collected mail in the archive also Select this switch if you want archived mail to include messages collected through MDaemon s MultiPOP feature Label archive messages with archive copy in message subject Enable this switch if you want to include Archive Copy in the Subject header of archived mail 52 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 Pruning Primary Domain Configuration 24x PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Account and old mail pruning BD Automatically delete account if inactive for 30 days 0 never Delete messages older than 90 days 0 never Delete deleted IMAP messages older 60 days 0 never MV Delete old messages from IMAP folders as well Cancel Apply The controls on this dialog are used to designate when or if inactive accounts or old messages belonging to this domain will be deleted by MDaemon Each day at midnight MDaemon will remove all messages and accounts that have exceeded the time limits st
249. et supposedly local users will be returned to the message originator if this option is activated Send message to the Postmaster user Messages that arrive at the server destined for unknown yet supposedly local users will be forwarded to whatever user has been aliased as the postmaster Place message in bad message directory Messages that arrive at the server destined for unknown yet supposedly local users will be routed to the bad message directory Advanced Options Enable advanced options Click this checkbox to enable the following advanced mail routing properties 60 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Send the message to this host If a mail host is specified here messages addressed to unknown local users will be sent to it Use this address in SMTP envelope This address will be used in the SMTP Mail From statement used during the session handshaking with the accepting host Normally the sender of the message is used in this portion of the SMTP envelope If you require an empty command MAIL FROM lt gt then enter trash into this control Use this TCP port MDaemon will send this message on the TCP port specified here rather than the default SMTP outbound port DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 61 SECONDARY DOMAINS Chapter Secondary Domains Hosting additional Domains with MDaemon Hosting Multiple Domains MDaemon Pro only Daemon Server Version 6 contains
250. eue 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 54 OK lt 65754 gt bytes A LAN queue 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 54 GETF Collect A RAW queue 0 Sat 2002 05 04 23 04 54 Transmission Complete lt C MD aemon 4pp MDCFGWARK AK eee ee at UD U4 ye Closing transmission channel Status report for domain mycompany com Version MDaemon PRO v6 0 0rc2 R Uptime 1 hrs 02 min Last successful POP session 0 Last successful SMTP session Sat 04 May 2002 22 04 17 Last successful IMAP session 0 Last MDCONFIG download 0 Last MDCONFIG update 0 sa samme v b Tools j System Remote j mycompany com h Introduction The capability to remotely control MDaemon s configuration parameters is fully supported using the MDConfig Remote Configuration Client Utilizing a POP3 like proprietary protocol a method exists whereby a client package such as MDConfig can connect to a running instance of MDaemon Server and mimic its configuration and setup This makes it possible for MDConfig to alter the setup parameters of the host MDaemon Once the desired configuration changes have been made MDConfig reestablishes contact with the remote MDaemon site and uploads all the new changes which will take effect immediately The steps involved are straightforward A connection is made to a remote site that is running MDaemon MDConfig and MDaemon exchange handshaking information which includes a username and password for security see Remote Configuration p
251. even if this control is enabled MAIL FROM Postmaster requires an authenticated session Click this checkbox to require the postmaster user s account to be authenticated before MDaemon will accept mail claiming to be from the Postmaster This will prevent unauthorized users from being able to present themselves as the domain s postmaster Current Aliases This window contains all current Address Aliases that you have created Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the Current Aliases list Up Aliases are processed in the order in which they are listed You can move an Alias to a higher position in the list by selecting it and then clicking this button Down Aliases are processed in the order in which they are listed You can move an Alias to a lower position in the list by selecting it and then clicking this button ALIAS EDITOR 257 ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES Chapter Auto Responders and MBF Files Creating and Using Auto Responders and MBF Fikes message One popular use for auto responders is to send back a user defined message to any person who sends an email to a user who will be unable to read it due to a vacation illness or some other circumstance Using the auto response mechanisms provided with MDaemon Server v6 located in Accounts Auto Responders incoming mail can act as a trigger generating automated and personalized replies or as the cause of a server hosted process in whic
252. eways 288 Queue and Statistics Manager 302 Additional MDaemon Features 314 Appendix A 323 Appendix B 325 Appendix C 326 Appendix D 327 Appendix E 330 Appendix F 332 Glossary 335 Index 354 Table of Contents MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 Section I MDaemon s Primary Features CHAPTER 1 MDaemon v6 0 15 Introduction 15 MDaemon Standard and Pro 15 MDaemon Features 15 What s New in MDaemon Version 6 17 Expanded and Improved WorldClient 17 New WorldClient Themes 17 Shared Calendaring and Scheduling 17 Improved Email Features 17 Run WorldClient under IIS 18 Alt N ComAgent 18 Automatic Address Book Synchronization 18 Secure Accountable Instant Messaging System 19 WebAdmin Integration 19 Enhanced IMAP Features 20 Improved IMAP Folder Sharing 20 Public Folder Per user Flags 20 Support for InsightConnector from Bynari Inc 20 Performance Enhancements 21 Configuration Caching 21 Smarter Smart Spooling 21 Improved Mailing List Catalog Control Command Processing 22 Improved Mailing List Subscribe Unsubscribe 22 Enhanced MultiPOP Collection Options 22 Ghosts Terminal Services Support 22 Improved Logging 23 Automated Configuration Backup 23 Security Enhancements 23 Host Screening 23 Enhanced Spam Blocking 23 Improved Import Export Capabilities 23 Additional Changes 25 Information for those Upgrading from Previous Versions 25 Version 6 Special Notes 25 Version 5 Special Notes 26 Version 4 Special Notes 26 Version 3 S
253. f this you can t use procnow as an email mailbox for one of your accounts Mail to domains listed in the LAN DOMAINS tab is kept in a directory called LNDOMAIN which stems off the LOCALQ directory Ifyou send a message to getaddress mydomain com MDaemon will send a message back to you telling you the domain name and IP address that has been assigned to MDaemon s computer This is useful if you want to know what IP address has been assigned to your computer from your ISP when you have a dynamic dial up situation MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION 321 CHAPTER 28 ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES 322 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION APPENDIX A Appendix A Semaphore Files MDaemon responds to numerous semaphore files that can be used for a variety of useful purposes Periodically MDaemon will scan the APP subdirectory for the existence of these files If it finds one the associated behavior is triggered and the semaphore file is removed This provides for a simple mechanism which will allow administrators and or developers to manipulate MDaemon without actually handling the interface The following is a list of all the semaphores and what they do FILENAME USERLIST SEM EDITUSER SEM ADDUSER SEM DELUSER SEM PROCNOW SEM PROCLOC SEM PROCREM SEM PROCDIG SEM PROCRETR SEM PROCBAD SEM EXITNOW SEM SCHEDULE SEM PRIORITY SEM EXCPTION SEM APPLYNOW SEM ACTION Forces MDaemon to reload the USERLIST DAT file and reb
254. f this setting is set to three then each session will collect mail from five Multi POP sources You should experiment with the number of sessions to determine what number will yield the best performance for your bandwidth It is possible to specify so many sessions that your bandwidth will be overloaded or your Windows machine will run out of resources and you will lose processing efficiency Remember that each POP sessions created by MDaemon will collect mail until all sources have been exhausted Therefore four sessions collecting mail from twenty sources might perform better and faster than twenty sessions collecting from a single source A good place to start would be two to five sessions with a 28 8 modem and five to ten for ISDN Maximum concurrent POPAMAP inbound sessions This value controls the maximum number of concurrent POP and IMAP inbound mail sessions that the server will accept before it begins responding with a Server Too Busy message 48 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Dequeue Primary Domain Configuration HEI Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Dequeue engine IV Signal ISP to dequeue waiting mail Use these controls if you need to send a signal to your ISP to dequeue mail Send signal once every 0 times remote mail is processed O every time Remote server Send signal to t
255. fic to be included in the InstantMessaging 1og file located in the MDaemon LOGS folder IM buddy list includes members of other domains Click this option if you want all of your MDaemon domains users to be available for adding to the selected domain s buddy lists Clear this checkbox if you want only users of the same domain to be available for adding to buddy lists For example if your MDaemon is hosting mail for example com and mycompany com then activating this control for your example com users will enable them to add buddies to their lists from both domains Clearing it would mean that they could only add other example com users Reminders sent via IM system are sent From When an Appointment or Meeting is scheduled on a users WorldChient calendar the event can be set to send a reminder to the user at a specified time If the IM system is active for the user s domain then the reminder will be sent in an instant message if he or she is using ComAgent Use this text box to specify the name that you wish the message to appear to be From 84 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Address Book WorldClient RelayFax Properties 24x Server Options Domain Options Address Book Calendar amp Scheduling RelayFax Address book Select domain Default v Get ta defaults MV Use LDAP server as address book provider Public Address Book Private Address Books H
256. fication of your accounts MDaemon version 6 contains the Account Manager Accounts Account Manager This dialog provides access to account information and can be used to sort accounts by domain name or mail directory Account Manager x Account management EH Only show account which match x f in the mailbox field 7 Gol Account List 13 total 13 displayed 12 user accounts 1 system account Domain Mailbox RealName Mail Directoy al amp altn com FT homas Frank Thomas D MDAEMONSUSERS Saltn com FT homas amp company mail Durge Durge D MDAEMON USERS company mail D company mail FThomas Frank Thomas D MDAEMONSUSERS company mail FT homas amp company mail HF ord Henry Ford D MDAEMONSUSERS company mailSHFord amp company mail HMudd Harry Mudd D MDAEMONSUSERS company mail HMudd E company mail MDaemon MDaemonServer D MDAEMON USERS company mail MServer E mdaemon com FThomas Frank Thomas D MDAEMONSUSERS mdaemon com F Thomasi Mike mail Mike Mike Mason D MDAEMON USERS Mike mail MMason E mycompany com MMan Mr Man D MDAEMONSUSERS mpcompany com MMan amp mydomain com HSherbert Herbert Sherbet D MDAEMON USERS mydomain com HSherbert amp that com FThomas Frank Thomas D MDAEMON USERS that com F Thomas this com FThomas Frank Thomas D MDAEMON USERS this com FT homas worldclient com HFord Henry Ford D MDAEMONSUSERS worldclient com HFord Md gt
257. file size xx KB This is the maximum size in kilobytes that a log file may reach Once this size is reached the log file is copied to LOGFILENAME OLD and a new log is started MDConfig collects last xx KB of log file data When using MDConfig to configure MDaemon remotely this amount of data will be copied from the bottom of MDaemon s current log files and displayed in MDConfig s interface Perform no more than one automatic backup per da When limiting the log file size click this checkbox if you want no more than one log file to be backed up per day Each day the first time that the maximum log file size is reached it will be renamed to OLD and saved normally The subsequent log file will continue to grow regardless of the maximum size specified It will not be rolled over until the next day even if the maximum size setting is surpassed Logging Options Log SMTP activity Enable this option if you want to log all of MDaemon s send receive SMTP activity LOGGING 189 CHAPTER 16 LOGGING Log POP activity Click this checkbox to log all POP mail activity This will log your users POP mail collection sessions from MDaemon and will log MDaemon s DomainPOP and Mult POP activity Log IMAP activity Enabling this option causes all of your users IMAP sessions to be included in MDaemon s log files Always log to screen Click this option if you want the logged data to be copied to the MDaemon GUI even when i
258. filepath method gt X Example X FLAG ATTACH lt c utils pkzip exe MIME gt x This X FLAG specifies the value ATTACH along with two parameters within the lt gt characters The first parameter is a complete path to the file which should be attached to the message The second parameter which is separated from the first by a comma character and specifies the method of encoding that is to be used when attaching the message MDaemon Server v6 supports two values for this parameter The method of MIME instructs the server to use the Internet standard Base64 method of message encoding The method of ASCII instructs the server to simply import the file into the message An optional X parameter at the end of the string instructs the server to remove the file from disk once it has been attached Delivery Status Notification X FLAG CONFIRM DELIVERY 316 THE RAW MESSAGE SPECIFICATION V3 1 CHAPTER 28 ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES When converting a RAW message which contains this flag into RFC 822 mail the string is transformed to the Return Receipt To lt sender host org gt construct Placing Specific Header Value Combinations Into the RFC 822 Message If you wish to place a specific header value combination into the RFC 822 message which will be generated from a RAW file you will need to use the HEADER macro For example if you want the header Delivered By mail machine domain com to be placed into the
259. folder name would be My Folder My New Folder If you don t want it to be a subfolder then name the new folder My New Folder without the prefix Create After specifying a folder s name click this button to add the folder to the list Replace If you wish to edit one of the Shared Folders click the entry make the desired change and then click Replace Edit access control list Choose a folder and then click this button to open the Access Control List dialog for that folder Use the Access Control List dialog to designate the users that will be able to access the folder and the permissions for each user 246 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Access Control List IMAP Folder Inbox Shared AES Access Control List Access rights Email Access level Default rights anyone lt none gt Frank n nycompany com Irswi pc da amp HMudd mycompany com Ir 3 CKent dailyplanet com Irswipeda Dwimble example com Irswid Email address Frank mycompany com x Add Replace Remove Access rights Import J Lookup I Insert V Set Seen Flag V Read IV Create M Administer MV write MV Delete M Post Help wen _ a _ Access Rights This area is for designating the MDaemon user accounts that you wish to grant access to the shared folder and for setting the access permissions for each one You can reach this dialog from the Shared Folders tab of the Account Editor cl
260. for specific types of networks and protocols such as Ethernet or token ring and TCP IP Network News Transfer Protocol See NNTP below NIC See Network Interface Card above NNTP Network News Transfer Protocol NNTP is the protocol used to transfer and distribute messages on USENET newsgroups The most common and popular browsers and email clients now have NNTP clients built in NNTP is addressed in RFC 977 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc977 txt Node Any single computer connected to a network ODMR On Demand Mail Relay is a new protocol designed to enable mail servers with only an intermittent connection to a service provider and which do not have a static IP address to recetve mail similarly to those servers that do have one and use the ETRN command If the system has a static IP address the ESMTP ETRN command can be used However systems with dynamic IP addresses have no widely deployed solution ODMR solves this problem Among other things ODMR introduces the Authenticated TURN command ATRN which causes the flow of an SMTP session to be reversed like 348 GLOSSARY the older TURN command but with the added security of requiring that the requesting server be authenticated This makes it possible for an SMTP server with a dynamic IP address to connect to its ISP and have one or more host s email delivered to it via SMTP rather than collect it via POP or IMAP This helps meet the widespread d
261. fresh Click this button to update the currently displayed Report of MDaemon settings Progress indicator As with the other tabs in MDStats the Report Page contains a progress indicator bar that serves as a visible indicator that the program is still operating while large files are being loaded or saved Save Click this button to save the currently displayed Report After clicking this button a standard Save As dialog will open so that you can designate a file name and location where you want to save it AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 311 CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Customizing the Queue Statistic Manager The following is a list of settings that can be modified in the MDstats ini file located in MDaemon s app directory MDstats ini File MDaemon AppDir C mdaemon app _ Location of MDaemon s app directory QueueOptions Editor NOTEPAD EXE Editor to use when a message is double clicked or when a message is tight clicked and then Edit is selected LockOnEdit No Whether or not to create a LCK file when editing a message This will prevent a message from being moved out of the queue while it is being edited AutoRefresh Yes Time in seconds between auto refreshes of the message listing 0 means no auto refresh ShowDirectories Yes Show subdirectories of the queues in the list box in addition to the messages Directories will appear as lt DirectoryName gt UserOptions Show
262. full support for multiple domains In addition to the Primary Domain Configuration settings page 34 it contains the Secondary Domain Editor used for designating any number of additional domains that you want to support as well as the IP address to which each will be associated MDaemon supports both dedicated and multi homed IP addresses In order to support multi homing sharing the same IP across multiple different domains MDaemon automatically detects the IP address that an incoming connection is attempting to reach and uses the appropriate domain name accordingly For example suppose you have the following domains and accounts configured altn com IP t111 user l altn com logon user 1 POP password ALTN arvelh com 2 2 2 2 user 2 arvelh com logon user 2 POP password ARVELH If a connection is attempted to 1 1 1 1 then MDaemon will answer as altn com If a connection is made to 2 2 2 2 then arvelh com will be used If user 1 altn com connects to 1 1 1 1 to check his mailbox he will supply user 1 as his logon and ALTN as his password to log in However if user 2 arvelh com connects to 1 1 1 1 to check his mail then he is technically connecting to the wrong server he should be connecting to 2 2 2 2 In that case he will need to supply his full email address in the login field to gain access Of coutse if he had connected to 2 2 2 2 he would only need to supply his login value Therefo
263. g values on the LDAP Options tab see page 94 Normally you should leave those options set to lt USER gt to require each user to bind using their unique account credentials Note If you are not using LDAP Options to mirror your MDaemon account database to an LDAP server then this control will be unavailable Use disk file as public address book provider If you wish to use a plain text file as WorldClient s Public Address book rather than an LDAP database click this option and specify the location of the file When this option is selected each user s Private Address Book will also be maintained in a plain text file called addrbook txt The Private Address Book file is located in each user s WC subfolder for example USERS example com HFord WC This subfolder and file will be created the first time a user creates a private contact from within WorldClient Address Book text files are tab delimited and each entry may contain a name email address and comment in that order Automatic Address Book Synchronization By using ComAgent in conjunction with Alt N s LDaemon LDAP server v2 0 or later to maintain WorldClient s Public and Private address books you can provide two way synchronization between LDaemon and the Outlook Outlook Express address book on each uset s local computer Thus if you use both Outlook or Outlook Express and WorldChient at different times the address books will match in both products MDaemon can mai
264. gs on MDaemon s menu bar to reach the following security features Security Settings Address Suppression Lists addresses that are not allowed to send mail traffic through your server IP Screening Used to designate IP addresses from which you will allow or refuse connections to your server Host Screening Used to designate hosts domain names from which you will allow or refuse connections to your server IP Shielding If a domain name specified in this list attempts to connect to your server its IP address must match the one that you have assigned to it SMTP Authentication Used for setting several options that denote how MDaemon will behave when a user sending a message to MDaemon has or has not been authenticated first POP Before SMTP The controls on tab are used to require each user to first access his or her mailbox before being allowed to send a message through MDaemon thus authenticating that the user is a valid account holder and allowed to use the mail system Spam Blocker Allows you to specify several ORDB and MAPS RBL type hosts that will be checked each time someone tries to send a message to your server If the connecting IP has been blacklisted by any one of these hosts the message s will be refused or flagged Relay Settings Used to control what MDaemon will do when a message arrives at your mail server that is neither from nor to a local address Trusted Hosts Domain names and IP addresses that will
265. h the message itself is passed as a command line parameter Automated response message files RSP files can contain any template string available to an MBF file page 263 N uto responders are useful tools for automating events to be triggered by an incoming email MBF or Mailbox Format Files are text files designed to allow cross compatibility with other email transport systems that can accept ASCII text files into their mail streams MBF files are essentially templates that contain a set of special formatting macros that enable MDaemon to transform an RFC 822 message into a variety of other text based formats Using MBFs MDaemon can be configured to automatically reformat incoming mail into specific alternatives on a per mailbox basis When a message arrives for an MDaemon account the account s MBF file is used to reformat the incoming data before distributing it to the user See Creating Auto Response Scripts page 261 for more information on creating automated response message files to be used by Auto Responders See Creating and Using MBF Files page 263 for more information on MBF files CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES Auto Responders Mailbox listing FThomas altn com Frank Thomas 7 Remove Autoresponse evet __ Use this auto response script Tellmeimalyin rsp Browse Do not send auto response if message is from one of these addresses altn com Del New excluded address Durge nosfentor com a
266. han your Local Area Network There is a switch on the New Account Defaults dialog page 216 for designating whether or not new accounts will have this restriction enabled by default Inbound Mail Restriction This account can t receive messages from the outside world Click this checkbox if you want the displayed account to be prevented from receiving email messages from non local domains except if from one of these addresses Addresses specified in this area are exceptions to the Inbound Mail restriction Wildcards are permitted Thus if you designated altn com as an exception then all inbound messages from any address at altn com would be accepted and delivered to the account New address If you wish to add an address exception to the Inbound Mail Restrictions list then type it here and click the add button 232 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Add After entering an address into the New address control click this button to add it to the exceptions list Remove If you wish to remove an address from the restrictions list select the address and then click this button Messages from unauthorized sources should be The options in this drop down list box govern what MDaemon will do with messages that are destined for this account but originate from a non local or otherwise unauthorized domain You may choose any of the following options Refused Restricted messages will be refused by MDaemon Retur
267. harge from www altn com For information on using an LDAP server as the Public and Private address book provider for your WorldClient users see the Address Book tab of the WorldClient RelayFax Properties dialop page 85 93 CHAPTER 7 LDAEMON ADDRESS BOOK OPTIONS LDAP Options LDAP Options 21x LDaemon LDAP Options LDAP options al Note LDAP functionality under Windows 95 requires IE 3 or greater Use standard flat file USERLIST DAT as account database Use LDAP server as complete backend user database PRO version only IV Mirror account email addresses and full names to LDAP address book This option keeps an LDAP server up to date with address information LDAP server properties Host name or IP RDN filter i234 0t SC dm i SEMAILG Bind DN Bind password Port on Michael A Mason osAlt N Tec frm 389 Base entry DN database Base entry DN address book Object class database Object class address book MDaemonU ser MDaemonContact See the MDaemon Users Manual for an explanation of these LDAP fields Configure Cancel LDAP Options Use standard flat file USERLIST DAT as account database Choose this option if you want MDaemon to use its internal USERLIST DAT file as the account database This is MDaemon s default setting and causes all of the MDaemon user account information to be stored locally Use LDAP server as complete backend user database PRO version only
268. hat the read confirmation was requested or responded to Clear the check box if you want WorldClient to ignore read confirmation requests regardless of whether the message is read or not Require IP persistence throughout WorldClient session As an added security measure you can click this checkbox to cause WorldClient to restrict each user session to the IP address from which the user connected when the session began Thus no one can steal the users session since IP persistence is required This configuration is more secure but could WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 79 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER cause problems for users who may be using a proxy server or dial up account that dynamically assigns and changes IP addresses Bind WorldClient s web server to these IPs only If you wish to restrict the WorldClient server to only certain IP addresses then specify those addresses here separated by commas If you leave this field blank then WorldClient will monitor all IP Addresses that you have designated for your Primary and Secondary Domains Restart WorldClient required to recognize new TCP port Click this button if you wish to restart the WorldClient server Note when changing WorldClient s port setting you must restart WorldChient in order for the new setting to be recognized Running WorldClient under IIS WorldClient is equipped with a built in web server and therefore doesn t require Internet Information Server IIS to
269. hat will perform multiple tasks and use and or logic Therefore considering the example above you can create a single rule that will accomplish all of those tasks and more New rule Click this button to create a new content filter rule This will open the Setup New Rule dialog Edit rule Click this button to open the selected rule in the Modify Rule editor Copy rule Click this button to clone the selected content filter rule An identical rule will be created and added to the list The new rule will be given a default name called Copy of Original Rule Name This is useful if you wish to create multiple similar rules You can create a single rule clone it several times and then modify the copies as needed Delete rule Click this button to delete the selected content filter rule You will be asked to confirm your decision to delete the Rule before MDaemon will do so Move up Click this button to move the selected rule up Move down Click this button to move the selected rule down Rule Description Rule Name Enabled Disabled This box displays the currently selected rule in its internal script format Click any of the rule s conditions listed as a hyperlink and the appropriate editor will be opened for changing that particular condition CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 167 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Creating a New Content Filter Rule Create Rule x Give this rule aname S New Rule 13 Defin
270. he MDaemon ini file and change the MaxAccountManagerEntries 500 key to whatever value that you prefer Show only accounts from this domain Choose All Domains from this drop down list box to display all MDaemon accounts Choose a specific domain to show only that domain s accounts New Click this button to open the Account Editor in order to create a new account Edit Select an account from the Account List and then click this button to open it in the account editor Delete Select an account from the Account List and then click this button to delete it You will be asked to confirm you decision to delete the account before MDaemon will proceed Show more accounts The account list will only display 500 accounts at a time If there are more than 500 accounts in the domain that you have chosen then click this button to display the next 500 See the note above for instructions on how to increase the maximum number of accounts that may be displayed Top Click this button to quickly move to the top of the Account List Import This opens the OPEN dialog from which you can choose a text file to import accounts from This button is identical to the Accounts Import From a text file menu selection New account defaults Click this button to open the New Account Defaults dialog See page 216 for more information Creating an MDaemon User Account Create a new MDaemon user account by clicking the new account button on the toolbar
271. he stored mail for delivery using subsequent SMTP transactions Please note that the SMTP session that issues an ETRN request will not be the one that recetves any stored mail MDaemon will use subsequent independent SMTP transactions to send any mail it has stored for the domain This preserves the message envelope and is more secure Also note that the host to which MDaemon will spool any stored mail may not immediately begin reception of these messages ETRN only guarantees that any stored mail is spooled for delivery The actual process of delivery is subject to other administrator imposed restrictions and may have to wait in the outbound mail queue for the next scheduled remote mail processing event to take place Because of these limitations we recommend using On Demand Mail Relay ODMR and its ATRN command rather than ETRN This method is not supported by all clients and servers however and will therefore only be available to client domains using a server that does so MDaemon fully supports ODMR on both the client and server side 292 GATEWAY EDITOR CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Spool all mail to this host This is the host name or IP address to which any stored mail will be sent when an ETRN request is received and honored This machine must be running an SMTP server to receive these messages If the domain listed above is local treat it as if it were foreign Activate this control if the domain is local but you want its mail to be spooled
272. he Remote MDaemon Site File Update Once you have finished modifying any MDaemon configuration parameters choose this menu selection of its corresponding button on the toolbar to upload your modifications to the remote site Since only one host can be configured at a time pressing this button updates the last host from which configuration information was gathered Clearing Alterations without Updating the Remote Site Resetting MDConfig for a New Connection File Reset This function clears the workspace and prepares MDConfig to connect to a new remote MDaemon site Any MDaemon settings currently displayed in MDConfig s interface will be erased Therefore take care to update any changes to the remote site before resetting unless you wish to abort your configuration changes Downloading MDaemon s configuration and then Resetting or closing MDConfig without uploading the changes will in no way affect MDaemon nor alter any MDaemon settings 72 MDCONFIG REMOTE CONFIGURATION CLIENT CHAPTER 5 REMOTE CONFIGURATION Moving MDConfig to Another Computer Use MDaemon s executable installation file to install only MDConfig on the remote machine Simply proceed through the normal MDaemon installation process but enable only the MDConfig installation option when asked which items to install Alternatively you can copy the necessary files from your current installation and manually move them to the other machine To do that copy these files
273. he SMTP session to progress However should you wish to return a 501 error code close the socket connection or do both other switches are provided for those purposes Trusted IP addresses and localhost 127 0 0 1 are always exempt from reverse lookups Reverse Lookups Perform reverse PTR record lookup on inbound SMTP connections Enable this option if you want MDaemon to perform reverse pointer record lookups on all inbound SMTP connections Send 501 and shut down connection if no PTR record match If this box is checked then MDaemon will send a 501 error code syntax error in parameters or arguments and shut down the connection if the result of a reverse pointer record lookup fails to match Perform reverse lookup on HELO EHLO domain Click this box if you want a reverse lookup to be performed on the domain name that is reported during the HELO EHLO portion of the session The HELO EHLO command is used by the client sending machine to identify itself to the server The domain name passed by the client in this command is used by the server to populate the from portion of the Received header Perform reverse lookup on value passed in the MAIL command Enabling this switch will cause a reverse lookup to be performed on the domain name that is passed during the MAIL command portion of the mail transaction The address passed in the MAIL command is supposed to be the reverse path for the message and is usually the mailbox from which the
274. he Setup gt Security Settings gt IP Shielding menu selection to configure IP Shielding The IP Shield is a list of domain names and matching IP addresses that will be checked during the SMTP MAIL FROM command An SMTP session claiming to be from someone at one of the listed domains will be honored only if it is coming from a machine with one of the associated IP addresses For example suppose your domain name is mdaemon com and your local LAN computers use IP addresses in the range from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 0 255 With this information you can set up IP Shielding to associate the domain name mdaemon com with the IP address range 192 168 0 wildcards are allowed Thus anytime a computer connects to your SMTP server and states MAIL FROM lt someone mdaemon com gt the SMTP session will continue only if the connecting computer has an IP address within the required range from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 0 255 Currently Defined Domain IP Pairs This is the list of domain names and their corresponding IP addresses that will be compared when someone attempts to connect to MDaemon claiming to be from one of them Messages to valid local users are exempt from domain IP matching Click this option if you want only those messages that are destined for a non local user or invalid local user to be checked for a domain IP match This will prevent others from posing as one of your local users in order to relay their mail through your server but save re
275. heckbox if you want MDaemon to recognize email addresses of this format as valid as long as the list actually exists in order to facilitate an easier method for users to join and leave your mailing lists For example suppose you have a list called MyList altn com People will be able to subscribe unsubscribe to your list by sending an email message to MyList Subscribe altn com and MyList Unsubscribe altn com The content of the subject and message body is irrelevant Also when this feature is active MDaemon will insert the following header into all list messages List Unsubscribe lt mailto lt List gt Unsubscribe domain com gt NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 211 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS Some mail clients can pick up on this and make an UNSUBSCRIBE button available to users automatically Subject header for new account welcome messages When MDaemon sends the Welcome message to new accounts this text will appear as the message s Subject header The welcome message is constructed from the Welcome dat file contained in the MDaemon app directory and this subject header control may contain any macros permitted in auto response scripts page 261 212 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS SECTION II MDaemon s Account Features MANAGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS Chapter Managing MDaemon Accounts Managing and editing your MDaemon User Accounts Account Manager o better manage the selection addition deletion or modi
276. hecks for virus signature updates at specific times on specific days or by a Simple Scheduling method that causes MDaemon AntiVirus to check for updates once every so many minutes There is also an Activate urgent updates option on this tab that can be used to activate or deactivate Automatic Urgent Updates This option is the same as the control of the same name described above Test Scanner Send EICAR Click this button to send a test message to the postmaster with the EICAR virus file attached This attachment is harmless it is merely used to test MDaemon AntiVirus By watching the Content Filter s log window on MDaemon s main interface you can see what MDaemon does with this message when it is CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 181 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS received For example depending upon your settings you might see a log excerpt that looks something like this Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 lt MDA Mon 2002 02 25 18 Mon 2002 02 25 18 Mon 2002 02 25 18 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 14 14 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 2002 02 25 2002 02 25 2002 02 25 2002 02 25 2002 02 25 18 18 18 18 18 14 14 14 14 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 admin Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 182 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 C MDaemon CFilter T Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 Mon 2002 02 25 18 14 postmaster mycompany postmaster myco
277. hen the DNS lookup is skipped which can save a surprising amount of processing time The settings in this window allow you to manipulate the parameters under which the cache will operate You may also manually add and remove entries and set the maximum size of the cache The IP Cache can be reached from the Setup IP Cache menu selection IP Cache IP Cache 2 x IP Cache Caching options IV Automatically cache uncached domains n order to speed message delivery and shorten mail processing time MDaemon caches the IP T Clear cache at each processing interval Default time to live minutes 60 use 9999 and entry will not expire Maximum cached entries 50 Currently cached IPs somedomain org 123 123 123 123 for 60 more minutes someotherdomain org 123 0 123 0 for 42 more minutes myhomedomain me 10 10 10 10 for 9999 more minutes myisp net 00 11 00 11 for 21 more minutes Remove Clear No cache Add new IP cache entry Domain Sle Seema IP it Cancel Apply 135 CHAPTER 11 IP CACHE AND DNS LOOKUP Caching Options Clear cache at each processing interval If selected the entite contents of the cache will be flushed at the start of each mail session This allows the cache to be refreshed at each processing interval Automatically cache uncached domains This switch governs MDaemon s internal auto caching engine If you want MDaemon to cache domains automatically then enable this
278. hentication before mail is dequeued Further it utilizes a new ESMTP command called ATRN that does not require the client customer to have a static IP address because it immediately reverses the flow of data between the client and server provider and despools the messages without having to make a new connection to do so unlike ETRN MDaemon fully supports ODMR on the client side via using the ATRN command and authentication controls on the Dequeue tab and on the server side using the Domain Gateways features on the ATRN AUTH tab of the Gateway Editor page 294 Many mail servers do not yet support ODMR therefore you should check with your provider before attempting to use it Dequeue AUTH Dequeue AUTH Dequeue authentication MV Use ESMTP AUTH when sending dequeue signal to host AUTH logon MyCompary AUTH shared secret i If your dequeue host requires authentication you can enter the logon and shared secret here Cancel Dequeue Authentication Use ESMTP AUTH when sending dequeue signal to host Besides requiring their customers to authenticate themselves before sending mail some ISPs require their customers to authenticate themselves before sending the signal to dequeue any incoming mail that is being held for them If you are required to do this then click this checkbox to cause MDaemon to send your authentication information before attempting to collect any queued email AUTH logon If authentication is require
279. hese users never have permission to create global memos EeEOEOEr These users always have permission to read global memos ee o o These users never have permission to read global memos M sGossip mycompany com Calendar Options Event creator has event access on all calendars This is a global setting it cannot be set per domain Allow meetings to be created without specifying a location Click this option if you do not want to require that users specify a meeting location whenever a meeting event is created Clear the check box if you want to force all meetings to have a location specified when they are scheduled This is a global setting it cannot be set per domain Select a domain Use this drop down list to choose the domain whose Group Scheduling and Calendar settings you wish to edit If you make changes to any of the settings on this tab then you must Apply them before switching to a different Select domain setting If you make changes and then attempt to select a different domain without first applying them a box will appear asking you to choose whether or not you wish to save the changes before switching to the new domain Click Yes to save the changes or No to discard them WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 89 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Provide shared calendar capabilities to all members of this domain Click this option if you want to make the Calendar System available to WorldClient users of the selected d
280. his checkbox if you do not want the postmaster to be informed when auto generated messages cannot be delivered Examples of auto generated messages are return receipt notifications auto responder generated messages results of account processing and so on ISP AUTH ISP AUTH ISP authentication IV Use ESMTP AUTH when sending mail to ISP gateway AUTH logon MyCompary AUTH shared secret fm In order to combat SPAM some ISPs are requiring their customers to log on using the ESMTP AUTH command before they will accept SMTP delivered mail If your ISP requires this you can enter the logon and shared secret here Cancel ISP Authentication Use ESMTP AUTH when sending mail to ISP gateway As an added security measure some ISPs require their customers to log on using the ESMTP AUTH command before they are allowed to send mail through the ISPs servers If your ISP requires you to do DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 39 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION this then you can use the controls under this section to configure MDaemon to do so Click this checkbox to cause MDaemon to send your authentication information before it attempts to deliver messages AUTH logon Enter you AUTH logon here AUTH shared secret This is the password used in the ESMTP AUTH command s shared secret 40 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Ports Primary Domain Configuration Pruning Pre proce
281. his host Using this TCP port myisp net 25 default 25 This is the host that is storing the mail and needs to be signaled to release it Dequeue instruction Send this string to host JETRN MyCompany com This is the text to send which unlocks the queue Typical values might be ETAN domain com or ATAN domain com V Send ESMTP EHLO before transmitting string to host must authenticate before sending the dequeue signal required for ATRAN Session windows l IV Hide dequeue session windows while they are in progress Cancel Apply Dequeue Engine Signal ISP to dequeue waiting mail When it is time to process remote mail MDaemon can connect to any server on any port and send any string that you wish to send This is useful when you need to signal a remote server to release your mail by sending some string to them For example ATRN ETRN or QSND You can also use this feature when a FINGER or TELNET session is briefly required in order for your ISP to determine that you ate online Send signal once every xx times remote mail is processed By default the dequeue signal will be sent each time that remote mail is processed Entering a number into this control will prevent the dequeue signal from being sent every time It will be sent every x number of times as designated For example setting this value to 3 would cause the signal to be sent every third time that remote mail is processed Remote Serve
282. his is the number of messages that MultiPOP will leave on the POP server before they will be deleted When this number has accumulated all stored messages will be deleted Enter 0 into this control if you do not wish to place a limit on the number of messages that may be stored Note Some ISP s limit the number of messages that may be stored so you should check with them about any restrictions that may apply to your account Don t download messages larger than XX KB 0 no limit Enter a value here if you wish to limit the size of messages that may be downloaded Remove Click this button to remove the selected MultiPOP entries from the list Enable disable Clicking this button toggles the state of the selected MultiPOP entries This switch gives you control over whether MDaemon will collect mail for this entry or skip over it when it performs its MultiPOP processing Add Press this button to add your values to the list of MultiPOP records ACCOUNT EDITOR 243 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Replace When an entry is selected from the list it will be presented for editing After making any desired changes click this button to apply them 244 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Shared Folders Account Editor Frank Thomas HEI Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MultiPOP Shared Folders IMAP folders Trash CI Sent I Personal Pictur
283. his local FP eee Undefined IPs can not connect to this local IP IP Screening works by comparing the IP of the incoming connection to the IPs specified in this dialog If a match is made the incoming connection is either allowed or disallowed based on how you have things configured here Cancel Apply Current IP Screen Entries This window displays all IP addresses that are being screened by MDaemon They are listed either globally or according to the Local IP Address to which they apply New IP Screen Entry Local IP Choose from the drop down list either All IP s or the local IP to which you wish to apply the screen Remote IP Enter an IP address that you wish to add to the screened list You must enter this address in dotted decimal form The IP Screen works with IP addresses only Click the Add button to add the specified IP address to the address listing SECURITY SETTINGS 111 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS This remote IP can connect Selecting this option will allow only those IP addresses specified under the given domain to connect and deliver messages Attempts to connect via IP addresses not specified in the listing will be refused and immediately aborted This option is useful for setting up private mail network systems This remote IP can not connect Selecting this option will allow all IP addresses other than those specified in the address listing to connect and deliver messages Attempts to connect from I
284. hnologies LTD 333 333 Sales and Reseller Inquiries Documentation Issues 333 334 MDaemon Beta Testing 334 Glossary Index 12 335 354 MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 13 MDAEMON V6 0 3 SECTION I MDaemon s Primary Features MDAEMON V6 0 Chapter MDaemon v6 0 Versatile Email Server for Windows Introduction Daemon Server v6 brings SMTP POP IMAP and MIME mail services commonplace on UNIX hosts and the Internet to Windows based servers and microcomputers MDaemon is designed to manage the email needs of any number of individual users and comes complete with a powerful set of integrated tools for managing mail accounts and message formats MDaemon offers a scalable SMTP POP3 and IMAP4 mail server complete with LDAP support an integrated browser based email client content filtering spam blockers extensive security features and mote MDaemon Standard and Pro Alt N Technologies MDaemon Server is available in two versions MDaemon Standard and MDaemon Pro With the powerful features of MDaemon Standard you can collect your network s email from a single ISP provided POP3 account or host an entire domain with MDaemon s full fledged SMTP server With the increased functionality of IMAP4 and Multiple Domain Support MDaemon Pro is an ideal email backbone for enterprise level organizations MDaemon Pro also adds group calendar and scheduling an instant messaging system multiple la
285. how long a uset s session will be kept open while they are composing a message and the session remains inactive It is a good idea to set this timer higher than the Sessions not composing a message timer since inactivity time is typically greater while a user is composing a message This is because composing a message requires no communication with the server until the message is sent Cache HTML templates to increase web server performance Click this box to cause WorldClient to cache templates in memory rather than read them each time they need to be accessed This can dramatically increase server performance but WorldClient will have to be restarted if you ever make a change to one of the template files Use cookies to remember logon name theme and other properties Click this option if you want WorldClient to store each user s logon name theme and certain other properties in a cookie on his or her local computer Using this feature gives your users a more customized login experience but requires that they have support for cookies enabled in their browsers Respond to read confirmation requests Click this option if you want WorldClient to respond to incoming messages that contain a request for read confirmation When the WorldClient user opens the message MDaemon will send a notification to the sender indicating that it was displayed by the recipient The WorldClient user who received the message will not have seen any indication t
286. hus highly useful products Some web browsers also contain support for File Transfer Protocol though sometimes for downloading only Additionally most FTP servers are anonymous FTP which means that anyone can log in to them in order to download files usually by specifying anonymous as the user name and then your email address as the password Oftentimes you can download files from anonymous FTP sites without having to log in at all they can be retrieved by simply clicking on a link For browsers that support FTP usually all that needs to be done is to connect to the FTP site using ftp in its URL rather than http FTP is addressed in RFC 959 which can be viewed at 341 GLOSSARY http www rfc editor org rfc rfc959 txt Gateway Computer hardware or software that translates data between two applications or networks with protocols that are dissimilar Gateway is also used to describe any means by which access is provided from one system to another For example your ISP is a gateway to the Internet Alt N Technologies MDaemon email server can function as an email gateway for other domains through the use of its Domain Gateways feature It acts as an intermediary or Gateway by collecting the domain s email and then holding it until the domain collects it This is useful both for domains that do not maintain a continuous connection to the Internet and for domains that require a backup server in cas
287. ialog to add text to the message informing the user that an infected attachment was deleted Quarantine the infected attachment to Choose this option and specify a location in the space provided if you want infected attachments to be quarantined to that location rather than deleted or cleaned Like the Delete the infected attachment option the message will still be delivered to the recipient but without the infected attachment Clean the infected attachment When this option is chosen MDaemon AntiVirus will attempt to clean or disable the infected attachment If the attachment cannot be cleaned it will be deleted Delete the entire message This option will delete the entire message rather than just the attachment when a virus is found Because this deletes the whole message the Add a warning option doesn t apply However you can still send a notification message to the recipient by using the controls on the Notifications tab Quarantine the entire message to This option is like the Delete the entire messag option above but the message will be quarantined in the specified location rather than deleted Add a warning message to the top of the message body if infected When one of the a tachmenf options is chosen above click this option if you want to add some warning text to the top of the previously infected message before it is delivered to the recipient Thus you can inform the recipient that
288. ice Settings Service Settings 24x Service Settings Network Resource Access Service options Be Service name do not use or characters M Daemon Under Windows NT you can configure MDaemon to operate as a system service This means that no one needs to be logged on to the server for MDaemon to operate Dependancies Start service Remove Automatically C Manually C Disabled New dependency Add Install service Service Options Service name This is the name that NT will use for the service Start service This is the initial state of the service Dependencies A list of Services that must be active before the MDaemon service should attempt to load 192 CHAPTER 17 SYSTEM SERVICE SETTINGS Network Resource Access Service Settings HEI Service Settings Network Resource Access Network resource access m 8 Ifyou run MDaemon as an NT service you may need to provide some logon m credentials so that MDaemon can access your network resources MDaemon runs as a service under the LocalSystem account This account does not have access to network devices This means that if you have accounts storing mail on other computers across your LAN you will need to provide some logon credentials here so that MDaemon can access those other computers Logon name M Daemon ccount Password im Domain ALT N Leave the Domain field blank to logon to the default domain Cancel Apply When running MD
289. icial standard number associated with them that is listed in the Internet Official Protocol Standards document which itself is STD 1 and currently RFC 2900 You can find RFCs on the Internet at many locations but the authoritative source is The RFC Editor located at http www rfc editor org The Internet Official Protocol Standards document is located at http www rfc editor org rfc std stdl txt RTF Rich Text Format is a universal file format developed by Microsoft that is supported by nearly all word processors In contrast to plain text format RTF enables you to retain formatting font information text color and so on The file size of RTF files can be very large when compared to other file formats such as Word 2000 s document format doc and Adobe PDF Server A computer or program that provides a specific kind of service to client software running on other computers The term can refer to a particular piece of software such as an SMTP server or a machine on which the software is running A single server machine could have many different server programs tanning on it concurrently For example your network s server might be running a web server email server FTP server fax server and others all at once SMTP An acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is the primary protocol used to send email on the Internet from one server to another or from a client to a server SMTP consists of a set of rules for how a progr
290. ick Accounts gt Account Manager gt User Account gt Shared Folders Double click the desired folder or click the folder and then click Edit access control list to open the Access Control dialog for that folder Each entry lists the email address of the account and a one letter Access Level abbreviation for each Access Right that you grant to the user Email address From the drop down list choose the MDaemon account that you wish to grant access to the shared folder Add After choosing an Email Address from the list and the access rights that you wish to grant to the user click Add to add the account to the list Replace To modify an existing Access Rights entry select the entry make any desired changes to the Access Rights and then click Replace ACCOUNT EDITOR 247 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Remove To remove an entry from the Access Rights list select the desired entry and then click Remove Import With the Import feature you can add the members of an existing Mailing List to the list of users with Access Rights Choose the access rights that you wish to grant to the users click Import and then double click the desired list All of the list s members will be added to the list with the rights that you set Access Rights Choose the rights that you wish to grant to individual users by clicking the desired options in this area and then clicking Add for new entries or Rep ace for existing entries You can grant the
291. ients of the MSG file being sent Sometimes hosts might refuse a particular address to which you are attempting to send a copy of the message Ordinarily under SMTP regulations the session should be aborted This switch will allow MDaemon to proceed to the next recipient in the list without aborting the session completely Port Port xXxx This switch specifies the port that the TCP IP connection and delivery attempt should be made on 25 is the default for SMTP email LocalRcpts Rept 0 address my domain com Reptl other address my domain com Rept2 yet another address my domain com 330 APPENDIX E RemoteRcpts Rept 0 address foreign domain com Reptl other address foreign domain com Rept 2 yet another address foreign domain com These sections of the route slip allow you to specify any number of local and remote recipients who should recetve a copy of the associated MSG file Local and remote recipient addresses must be kept separate and placed in their corresponding LocalRcpts and RemoteRcpts sections Route slips provide a good mechanism for delivering or redirecting email but they are not generally necessary One use that MDaemon makes of route slips is in the case of routed mailing list mail When you have a mailing list that is set to route a single copy of the list message to some remote host a route slip is employed to accomplish this It is a very efficient method of mail delivery when you have bulk addresses
292. igest will be conformed to The default DIGEST MBF file provides typical functionality comparable to most other mailing list software For MAILING LIST EDITOR 283 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS complete details on how to create MBF files see Creating and Using MBF Files page 263 Edit MBF Click this button to edit the Mailbox Format file listed in the Svorage format control When to Spool Digest Messages Send digest mail at 9 12 3 6_am and or pm Mailing list digests must periodically be sent to those list members who are set to receive mail in digest format These controls allow you to configure when you wish MDaemon to do this Spool digest mail if XX messages have accumulated 0 N A Sometimes digests should be sent to list members based upon the number of messages that have accumulated rather than or in addition to specific times This control allows you to specify the number of messages that the list will accumulate before sending the digests to digest mode list members Spool digest mail if XX lines of message text received 0 N A This control will cause Digest mail to be sent immediately when a digest grows to this many lines of text Permanent Archive Archive digests into a file catalog which catalog do you want to use These controls allow you to place digest messages into a file catalog so that back issues of the digests can be collected in the future MDaemon will generate a unique archive name for each dige
293. ignate the port on which MDaemon will listen for IMAP events and the UDP port used for querying DNS servers In most cases the default settings will not need to be changed However being able to configure these port settings is useful when attempting to integrate MDaemon with various other products that you may be using on your system DNS This dialog is used for designating a primary and backup DNS server s IP address It also contains various controls governing MDaemon s handling of MX and A records and SMTP errors that are encountered during mail delivery Timers This area contains various time limits that MDaemon will observe while connecting to remote hosts waiting for protocol dialogs waiting for DNS server responses and so on In addition this dialog contains 34 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION the Maximum Message Hop Count limit which is used to help prevent messages from being caught in a delivery loop Sessions Here you will designate the maximum number of concurrent session threads that MDaemon will use for sending and recetving SMTP POP and IMAP mail You will also designate the number of messages that MDaemon will attempt to send receive at the same time In addition if you so choose you can set a limit on the number of outbound SMTP messages that will be spooled per session thread Dequeue Use the Dequeue tab to have MDaemon automatically send ETRN QSND or similar commands to an ISP in order to have
294. iguration Editor Wait XX seconds for A record DNS server responses This timer governs how long MDaemon will wait while attempting to resolve a remote host s IP address If the attempt fails MDaemon will send the message to either the Gateway Host or Retry Queue depending upon which option you have chosen on the Domain ISP tab page 36 of the Domain Configuration Editor SMTP and POP sessions timeout after XX inactive minutes If a successfully connected and operating session remains inactive no i o for this length of time MDaemon will abort the transaction MDaemon will try again at the next scheduled processing interval IMAP sessions timeout after XX inactive minutes If an IMAP session has no activity for this number of minutes MDaemon will close the session IMAP NOOP commands trigger I minute inactivity timeout When this checkbox is enabled the IMAP inactivity timer will be set to one minute when a NOOP command is encountered Some IMAP clients will issue NOOP commands simply to keep sessions open even though there is no actual mail transaction activity going on This feature will prevent such sessions from remaining active and thus will reduce resources consumed which can be extremely useful for higher volume IMAP based mail sites Loop Detection and Control Maximum message hop count 1 100 RFC standards stipulate that a mail server must stamp each message each time that it is processed These stamps can be counted a
295. iguration file processing V Debug packet handling J Access control list processing I Heavy trace debugging I Stats connections ops results I Connection management Stats log entries sent T Log alll 0 packets I Communication with shell backend J Search filter processing T Entry parsing debugging For the latest LD aemon installer and information visit http www altn com LD aemon This tab is used to control Alt N Technologies LDaemon LDAP server Note these controls will not be available until LDaemon has been installed LDaemon can be downloaded free of charge from ftp ftp altn com LDaemon LDaemon LDAP Server Properties Start amp Stop LDaemon when MDaemon starts amp stops Click this checkbox if you want to launch the LDaemon LDAP server when MDaemon starts and stop it when MDaemon stops LDaemon command line optional If you wish to utilize some command line switches for LDaemon you can do so by typing the command line into this control Edit LDaemon configuration file Click this button to open the LDaemon configuration file for editing in the default text editor Stop amp Restart LDaemon WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 97 CHAPTER 7 LDAEMON ADDRESS BOOK OPTIONS After make any changes to LDaemon click this button to stop and restart the LDAP server so that your changes will be implemented LDaemon Logging Debugging Options This section contains various logging debugging options for LDaemon You must
296. il session amp SMTP outbound to altn com session 2 lel Es Session transcript Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 46 264 2 250 altn com Hello mike mail ESMTP hello Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 49 264 2 250 EXPN Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 49 264 2 250 ETRN Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 49 264 2 250 SIZE Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 49 264 2 MAIL From lt mike altn com gt SIZE 1674903 Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 52 264 2 250 lt mike altn com gt Sender ok Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 52 264 2 RCPT To lt Frank altn com gt Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 54 264 2 250 lt Frank altn com gt Recipient ok Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 54 264 2 DATA Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 57 264 2 354 Enter mail end with lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt Mon 2000 02 21 13 36 57 264 2 Sending lt c mdaemon remotegpd50000000 Message from to __ Remote host IP mike altn com altn com Frank altn com 100 100 100 100 Message transfer stats _ Inactivity Timeout r 319488 of 1674908 19 1 2 34 kb s 9 Min 55 Sec Disconnect Session transcript This window displays all session i o Remote hostAP This window tells you the name and IP address of the remote computer MDaemon with which MDaemon is interacting Message from to This window displays the sender s address and the address of the intended recipients Message transfer statistics This keeps a running total of the number of bytes transmitted to or collected from the remote system the percent
297. ill be reset whenever MDaemon is launched Minimize to task bar When this control is enabled and MDaemon is minimized it will appear on both the taskbar and in the system tray Clear this checkbox if you do not want MDaemon to appear on the Windows taskbar when the program is minimized only the tray icon will be visible Restrict MDStats GUI to a single instance only Click this checkbox if you do not want more the one copy of MDaemon s queue and statistics manager to be able to run at once Attempting to launch MDStats when it is already running will simply cause the currently running instance to become the active window MDStats shows queue and mail directory subfolders Click this checkbox if you want the queue statistics manager to display subfolders contained in the various queues and user mail directories Max number of accounts shown in GUI controls 0 show all This is the maximum number of accounts that will be shown in the drop down list boxes on various dialogs Further when the value in this control is set to anything other than 0 show all the Edit Account and Delete Account options will no longer appear on the Accounts menu Those functions will only be available from the Accounts Manager You must restart MDaemon before any changes to this control will go into effect Max domains listed in tool window controls 0 show all This is the maximum number of secondary domains that will be listed under the
298. ill move you to the book marked location or cause the linked document to be displayed Usually hypertext links are apparent because the text is underlined and a different color but that is not required Sometimes hypertext will look no different than normal text but will almost always be indicated by some sort of graphical change to your pointer when the mouse pointer is paused over it Hypertext Markup Language See HTML above IMAP Developed by Stanford University Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP is a protocol used for managing and retrieving email messages The latest version is IMAP4 and is similar to POP3 but with a number of additional features IMAP4 is best known as a protocol used for managing email messages on the server rather than on the user s local machine messages can be searched for keywords organized in folders specifically selected for downloading and other features all while they are still on the server Thus IMAP places less demand on the user s machine and centralizes email so that it can be accessed from multiple locations IMAP is addressed in RFC 2060 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2060 txt IMAP4 ACL extension See ACL above Internet The Internet was created in 1969 by the United States military originally to be a communications network that couldn t be destroyed during a nuclear war It now consists of millions of computers and networks all over the world By desig
299. ill reboot the tray icon and make the interface accessible This is useful if you are running MD as a service and the interface is not present Reloads the Forward Exception database Reloads the Delete Exception database Reloads the Delivery Exception database Reloads the suppressed address list for all domains Forces a reload of the Dedupe value list Reloads Mailing List names dynamically Reloads Catalog names dynamically MDaemon will check for and remove this semaphore from the APP directory at approximately 10 20 second intervals This file can be used by external apps to check if MDaemon is running If this file remains in the APP directory for more than 20 seconds that is a good indication that MDaemon is no longer running SEMAPHORE FILES APPENDIX B Appendix B Message Precedence System This feature makes it possible for you to assign a Precedence value level of importance of 0 to 99 to messages This value signifies the relative sort order of the messages during the delivery process The lower the value the higher its importance and the further up it will be in the sort order within a message queue Thus MDaemon will attempt to deliver a message with a value of 10 before one with a value of 90 As a guideline for assigning Precedence values 10 Urgent 50 Normal and 80 Bulk You will find controls related to this feature on the Headers tab of Miscellaneous Options page 199 and on the Options tab of th
300. in an attempt to determine whether the sender might be forging their identity Oftentimes the sending mail server s IP address will not match any known MX or A records for a given domain and yet still be delivering the mail legitimately The purpose of the Reverse Lookup process is therefore not to exclude mail but to include as much information as possible in the log files and to provide the means whereby the postmaster can act according to their own local policies regarding these suspicious messages To that end an option exists that makes it possible for a special header to be inserted into all messages that do not pass a reverse lookup The content filter system can then be used to determine the fate of messages containing the header You can also perform reverse lookups on pointer PTR records of incoming IP addresses When using this option the connection can be aborted or a warning header inserted into the message if the incoming IP address does not match any PTR record Finally it is generally agreed that accepting mail from sources that identify themselves by using a domain that does not exist should be optional Therefore a switch exists that makes it possible for you to refuse messages for which the reverse lookup process returns a domain not found message from the DNS RELAY SETTINGS 129 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS server In such cases MDaemon will return a 451 error code refuse to accept the message and then allow t
301. ing engine This feature is useful if you wish MDaemon to try and determine the recipient of the mail message based on the non address information that may be present in one of the fields being parsed For example if the TO field contained TO John Doe lt common mailbox domain com gt then MDaemon would attempt to find the recipient based on a match to the real name John Doe rather than the address common mailbox domain com IV Only apply this feature if the address portion matches this value common mailbox M yCompany com You can put an address here such as common mailbox domain com and this feature will only attempt a real name match when the address portion is equal to this value Cancel Apply Note The Name Matching feature is only active in conjunction with the DomainPOP Mail Collection engine If you wish to use this feature you must make sure that you have DomainPOP enabled DomainPOP can be reached from the Setup DomainPOP Mail Collection menu selection Real Name Matching Engine Activate real name matching engine This feature allows MDaemon to determine who should receive a DomainPOP collected message based not upon what the email address is but upon what the text portion typically a person s real name is For example a message s TO header might read TO Joe User lt common mailbox isp com gt or TO Joe User lt common mailbox isp com gt DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 163
302. ings from a remote location The Remote Configuration dialog is used to designate whether or not MDaemon will allow remote configuration from MDConfig WebAdmin or both In addition you may assign separate logon and password values for both Administrator and Supervisor access from MDConfig and you may designate specific IP addresses from which it will be permitted to connect to MDaemon This effectively makes it possible to permit remote configuration access from only specific machines Finally you may specify a directory in which MDaemon will place a backup of its existing configuration files before it updates any changes that you make Note WebAdmin is not installed by default with the MDaemon server It is a free plug in that can be obtained from Alt N Technologies at www altn com For more information regarding MDConfig and WebAdmin see MDConfig Remote Configuration Client page 70 Web Access Defaults page 218 Account Editor Web page 234 WebAdmin Remote Server Administration For complete information on WebAdmin see the WebAdmin User Manual You can obtain the manual from www altn com 67 CHAPTER 4 Remote Configuration Remote Configuration x Remote configuration engines am V Enable MDConfig remote configuration engine LB IV Enable WebAdmin remote configuration engine MDContig security issues logon password values do not apply to WebAdmin Administrator administrator Supervisor supervisor P
303. ion of the MDaemon API see MD API htm1 in MDaemon s docs API subfolder Multiple new accounts can be specified one account record per line MDaemon will process the file one line at a time and add each new account You can create ADDUSER LCK to lock the file while you are updating it and MDaemon will not touch ADDUSER SEM until ADDUSER LCK is deleted To see a sample ADDUSER SEM file open ADDUSER SMP in your APP directory with a text editor You can use this semaphore file to delete one or more user accounts Create a text file containing the addresses of each account that you want to be deleted one address per line name the file DELUSER SEM and then move it to MDaemon s app directory MDaemon will delete the accounts and then delete the DELUSER SEM file MDaemon will immediately go into mail processing mode MDaemon will immediately go into mail processing mode and convert all RAW files transact all local and LAN domain mail and process any messages waiting in the MDaemon account s mailbox MDaemon will immediately go into mail processing mode and transact all remote mail Forces Digests to be sent immediately Forces the Retry Queue to be processed Forces the Bad Message Queue to be processed MDaemon will terminate and remove itself from memory Forces MDaemon to reload the SCHEDULE DAT file Forces MDaemon to reload the PRIORITY DAT file Forces MDaemon to reload the EXCPTION DAT file Causes the
304. is many attempts to establish a session MDaemon will attempt to connect to the remote host this many times before giving up After dialing wait this many seconds for a valid connection This value determines how long MDaemon will wait for the remote computer to answer and complete the RAS connection Connection Persistence Once established MDaemon will not close the RAS session By default MDaemon will shut down a created connection immediately after all mail transactions have been completed and the session is no longer in use Selecting this option will cause the connection to remain open even after all transactions have been completed Note MDaemon will never close a connection that it did not create Keep sessions alive for at least xx_minutes If enabled this option will cause an MDaemon created RAS session to remain open for at least the number of minutes specified or until all mail transactions have been completed whichever is greater 144 RAS DIALUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP ISP Logon Settings RAS Dialup Settings HE Dialup Settings SP Logon Settings Post Connection LAN Domains LAN IPs Dialup profile re M Use any currently active dialup session Logon name Use this RAS dialup profile my logon name M y Connection E Logon password E New Profile Edit Profi Maximized use IV Maximize use of this connection profile Every so many minutes MDaemon will check the computer system
305. is will immediately make all displayed information current Progress indicator Because User Information lists can at times be very large below the User Information list box is a progress indicator bar that provides a visible indication that the program is still operating when large files are being loaded by MDStats Save The information contained in the User Information list box can be saved as a file in comma delimited format for use with databases or as a plain ASCII text file by clicking the Save button After choosing a name and location for this file in the Windows Save As dialog MDStats will ask you whether you want to save the file in comma delimited format or as a plain text file 308 AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Log Page amp MDaemon Queue Stats Manager lel x Queue Page User Page Log Page Report Page r C MDaemon LOGS MDAEMON LOG 127 0 Mike na n a 2000 10 02 14 13 mail air mikenlou n a n a 2000 10 02 14 13 n a analyst this mike mike UPDATE TLO 2000 10 16 14 02 n a Dymphna_Ti Frank dom RE Subject 0 2001 02 27 17 50 n a pamela rout Durge dom RE Removing 2001 02 27 17 50 n a listmanager Frank dom Routing Rules 2001 03 05 15 48 n a listmanager Issues dom How to Send 2001 03 05 15 48 127 0 Mike n a n a 2001 03 05 15 48 mail air mikenlou n a nza 2001 03 24 19 4
306. isable Multi POP collection Note This permission doesn t grant users the ability to create delete or edit MultiPOP entries in any way MultiPOP entries must be created by the administrator using the MDaemon interface This feature is for allowing users to control whether or not MultiPOP Mail Collection for their account is turned on Edit autoresponder settings Click this checkbox if you want users to be able to add edit or delete AutoResponders for their account Edit allow changes via email Click this checkbox if you wish to allow users to modify their Account Settings via specially formatted email messages Apply these defaults to all accounts now Click this button to cause these default settings to be applied to all MDaemon accounts Any alternate settings that have been specified under individual accounts will be lost the Web settings of all current MDaemon users will be changed to the settings specified here 220 NEW ACCOUNT DEFAULTS ACCOUNT EDITOR Chapter Account Editor Using MDaemon s Account Editor to create and edit accounts he Account Editor contains all settings specific to MDaemon accounts It is used for creating new user accounts and for editing existing accounts When creating a new account most fields will be automatically filled in while typing the Real Name of the user This auto generated information is based on the templates and settings found in New Account Defaults page 216 See Accoun
307. ist box by whichever column you choose Simply click once on the desired column to sort it in ascending order A Z 1 2 or click twice to sort it in descending order Z A 2 1 Columns can also be resized by positioning the pointer over the line between any of the column headings until it changes shape and then dragging the column to the desired width Selecting Files To select files individually Click the desired file To select contiguous files Click the first file in the contiguous list of files that you wish to select then while holding down the SHIFT key click the last contiguous file in the desired list Alternatively you may use the ARROW HOME END PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys while holding down the SHIFT key to select files in contiguous order To select non contiguous files Click on the desired files in the Fv Name column while holding down the CTRL key Message queues Click an entry in the lower left pane and a list of all files contained within the specified queue will be displayed in the Queue Page list box If you click the User Folders option a list of all MDaemon users will be displayed in the User List Bax to the right of the Message Queues section Users list box This box displays a list of all MDaemon users when the User Folders option is clicked in the Message Queues section lower left pane Click a user s name to display a list of all message files currently contained in the uset s mailbox folder Refr
308. ital data to an analog format modulates and then transmits it to another modem where the process is reversed demodulates Put simply a modem is an analog to digital and digital to analog converter The speed at which the data is transferred is expressed in either baud rate e g 9600 baud or kilobits per second e g 28 8 kbps MultiPOP A component of Alt N Technologies MDaemon email server that can be configured to collect email via the POP3 protocol simultaneously from various email servers on behalf of MDaemon s users This makes it possible for MDaemon account holders who have email accounts elsewhere on other email servers to have that email collected and pooled with their MDaemon account email Thus storing all of their email in a single mailbox NAT See Network Address Translation below 347 GLOSSARY Network Two or more computers connected together in some fashion The purpose of a network is to enable the sharing of resources and information between multiple systems Some common examples are multiple computers sharing printers DVD ROM drives hard disks individual files and so on There are many types of networks but the most broadly defined types are Local Area Networks LANs and Wide Area Networks WANs In a LAN the individual computers or nodes are geographically close together usually in the same building They are also usually connected together directly with wires although wireless connections are
309. ith their email remember WorldClient is not workstation dependent so mobile can also mean just traveling across the building Use WorldClient to offer web based email services to your customers and customize the interface to display advertising banners Use it on a kiosk or in a computer lab to provide email to students or other individuals who may not have a personal computer of their own WorldClient also provides many benefits to email administrators Now you don t have to configure and maintain each individual email client since WorldClient isn t workstation dependent Customize the graphical images and HTML pages used in WorldClient to suit your corporate needs or the needs of your customer Further give your users the ability to maintain their own account settings thus saving you time you can give as much or as little control to your users as you want Finally there are features that will benefit your customers directly such as extensive email functionality wherever you find a browser client side interface available in 18 languages personal and global address books manageable mail folders and filters send receive file attachments multiple visual themes for interface and much mote Calendar amp Scheduling System New to WorldClient in MDaemon 6 0 is a complete calendar and event scheduling system The Calendar System can be used to post memorandums and schedule and review appointments and meetings both for you and
310. ividual account s settings to override these defaults Delete accounts within this domain if inactive for XX days 0 never Specify the number of days that you wish to allow an account belonging to this domain to be inactive before it will be deleted A value of 0 in this control means that accounts will never be deleted due to inactivity Delete messages kept by users within this domain if older than XX days 0 never A value specified in this control is the number of days that any given message may reside in a uset s mailbox before it will be deleted by MDaemon automatically A value of 0 means that messages will never be deleted due to their age Delete deleted IMAP messages in this domain older than XX days 0 never Use this control to specify the number days that you wish to allow IMAP messages that are flagged for deletion to remain in this domain s users folders Messages flagged for deletion longer than this number of days will be purged from their mailboxes A value of 0 means that messages flagged for deletion will never be purged due to their age Delete old messages from IMAP folders as well Click this checkbox if you want the Delete messages kept by users control to apply to messages in IMAP folders as well When this control is disabled messages contained in IMAP folders will not be deleted regardless of their age Note When old messages are pruned rather than actually delete them
311. k his mail twice in order to see new MultiPOP messages once to trigger Mult POP and a second time to see the mail that was collected But no more often than XX times per hour In order to reduce the load that extensive use of MultiPOP can potentially place on your MDaemon you can use this control to specify a maximum number of times per hour that Multi POP can be collected for each uset Wait at least XX minutes between each collection This option can help to reduce the load on the mail server by limiting how frequently MultiPOP messages can be collected by each user It will restrict MultiPOP mail collection to once every so many minutes per user Specify the number of minutes that you wish to require the user to wait before being allowed to check MultiPOP again 208 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS e WAB Miscellaneous Options x GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MultiPOP WAB Misc Windows Address Book WAB options BE Note WAB functionality under Windows 95 requires IE 3 or greater IV Mirror email addresses and full names to Windows Address Book This option keeps your WAB up to date with address information Use this specific WAB file c Documents and Settings SomeUserApplication Data Micr Browse Leave this control empty and MDaemon will use the Shared Contacts within the default Windows address book Cancel Apply MDaemon version 6 has the ability to
312. l information about the server available through the icon s tooltip Pause the mouse pointer over it and the tool tip will appear mycompany com 1 2 3 4 Q 2 4 The first bit of information that the tool tip displays is the Primary Domain s name Next is its IP address Finally following the letter Q signifying the mail queues are two numbers denoting the number of messages in the queues The first numbers indicates the number of messages in the remote queue The second number indicates the number of messages in the local queue Shortcut Menu About Alt N MDaemon About Alt N Technologies Right click on MDaemon s tray icon to open the shortcut menu This menu gives you quick access to virtually all of MDaemon s menus and features without having to open the main user interface Setup b Accounts gt n Pr hoe p Click the About Alt N options in the top section of the shortcut e menu to find out more about MDaemon or Alt N Technologies Gateways d Catalogs gt Ge p In the second section you can access the following MDaemon menus Setup Accounts Lists Gateways Catalogs and Queues Each of these Open account manager cascading menus is identical to the menu of the same name located on Process all queues now Queue and stats manager the menu bat of the main interface The third section has controls to open the Account Manager and Queue and Statistics manager an
313. l o JLovell ForestParkLanes com Add Wildcards like mailer ok Run a program Fun this program joo Browse J Pass message to process Advanced options Ra Add sender to this mailing list Mylist mycompany com x Remove Sender From This List x Cancel are Mailbox Listing This control lists all available local mailboxes that can host an Auto Responder Select a mailbox from this drop down list and then fill in the desired auto response parameters to cause the Auto Responder to be triggered whenever a message arrives for the mailbox Remove Clicking this button will remove any Auto Responder that is associated with the account selected in the Mailbox drop down list box Autoresponse Event Use this auto response script This field specifies the full path and filename of the response file RSP that will be processed and dispatched to the message sender This file will first be passed through the filtering mechanism associated with MBF files Any template string available for use in an MBF file will also be available for use in an auto response file AUTO RESPONDERS 259 CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES See Creating Auto Response Scripts page 261 Creating and Using MBF Files page 263 Do not send auto response if message is from one of these addresses Here you can list addresses that you wish to be excluded from responses initiated by this Auto Responder Note Occa
314. lacklisted result from a Spam Blocker lookup Y Warning Although caching addresses may conserve some resources since Spam Blocker lookups will not need to be performed on those IP addresses that have already been cached it is not recommended by the Spam Blocker Hosts Since a blacklisted IP address could have its status corrected in a matter of minutes caching entries could result in mail being refused unnecessarily Caution should therefore be used when caching entries If you choose to use this feature then we recommend keeping small the amount of time that any given entry is cached For more information on the implications of caching Spam Blocker lookups see www mail abuse org SPAM BLOCKER 123 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Enter New Cached Entry IP address Enter the IP address that you wish to manually add to the Spam Blocker cache Default time to live in minutes This is the amount of time that the entry will remain in the Spam Blocker cache Entering 9999 into this field will prevent the entry from expiringe however this is not recommended Automatically cached entries use default time to live also Click this check box if you want automatically cached entries to use the Default time to live setting specified above Normally the time to live TTL parameter is based on information returned during the DNS lookup rather than by the Default time to live setting Maximum cached entries This is the maximum number of e
315. lar to Microsoft Outlook Express Simple is designed to be very basic and fast in order to accommodate slow Internet connections It doesn t use frames and contains a greatly limited number of graphics Shared Calendaring and Scheduling WorldClient has been enhanced with a complete calendar system for scheduling meetings and appointments and for creating global and personal memos You can schedule meetings and designate attendees causing an email notification to be sent to each person schedule appointments for yourself create global and personal memos and even import and export to Microsoft Outlook and other iCalendar compliant email programs Additionally you can set permissions for your calendar and thus control the level of access that others will have to it i e whether they can see or create events on your calendar You can also view or modify the calendars of other WorldClient users based upon the permissions that they have set Finally when used with ComAgent you can receive instant messages each time your calendar is modified and when reminders about approaching calendar events are needed For more information see Calendar Scheduling System page 74 Improved Email Features WorldClient now behaves more like a traditional IMAP client You have the option to flag messages as deleted or undeleted instead of using a trash or deleted items folder like in POP clients although the trash method is still a
316. lder for use with this list This will cause the Public Folders dialog page 102 to be opened MAILING LIST EDITOR 285 CATALOGS Chapter Catalogs Utilizing MDaemon s Catalogs feature se the Catalogs New Catalog or Catalogs Edit Catalog menu selection to open the Catalogs Editor for creating or editing a file catalog Catalogs give users the ability to request files across the network and have them encoded and mailed back to them Catalogs work by allowing the mail administrator to assign magic names shortcuts to files on disk Magic names are like aliases which point to a specific file located somewhere accessible to MDaemon A user can then use a special type of email message to request the file using the magic name The format of this special email message is described in the Remote Server Control section see the GET command in Mailing List and Catalog Control page 319 Catalog Editor Catalog Editor x Catalog properties f Catalogs are password protected lists of files on your network Each file is ay given a magic name shortcut which is used with the GET command to have MDaemon MIME encode and email you the associated file See the manual for a deeper understanding of how catalogs work Name Info Password Enter a name and a password for this catalog Add new file Click here to add a new file to this catalog Add file File listing book D Docs book ZIP Logo D
317. le Postmaster com Actual address HMudd mycompany com Harcourt Fent x The wildcard used to the left of the symbol will be replaced by the original mailbox A used to the right of the symbol will be replaced by the original domain name Ex arvel arvelh com arvel altn com or arvelh com user sub T It s OK to relay mail for aliases that include foreign domains IV Aliases are ignored if address matches an existing account or mailing list T Fully qualified aliases no wildcards are allowed to be list members IV MAIL FROM Postmaster requires an authenticated session Current aliases listserv mycompany com mdaemon mycompany com listserver mycompany com mdaemon mycompany com list serv mycompany com mdaemon mycompany com MD aemon example org MD aemon mycompany com listsery example org MDaemon mycompany com listserver example org MD aemon mycompany com list serv example org MD aemon mycompany com MDaemon company com MDaemon mycompany com listserv company com MDaemon mycompany com listserver company com MD aemon mycompany com list sery company com MD aemon mycompany com MDaemon aaaa com MD aemon mycompany com x Bemove Up Down OK Cancel Define a New Alias Address alias Enter the email address for which you wish to create an alias Wildcards of and are acceptable Actual address Select an account from the drop down list or type a new a
318. le and distribute it to new users when their account is created Enable this control if you want to prevent the message from being generated Create Everyone mailing lists Clear this checkbox if you do not wish Everyone mailing lists to be created and maintained for your 210 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS domains Maintaining mailing lists of every user on every MDaemon domain could be a potential waste of resources if the lists are never used or are for very large numbers of users Clear this checkbox if you do not want MDaemon create these lists Honor requests for account information Provides the user list when requested via EXPN or LISTS commands Auto responders are triggered by local as well as remote mail Sometimes it is advantageous to disable the auto response engine for local mail traffic System generated messages use NULL reverse path Click this checkbox if you want auto generated emails to be sent with a NULL reverse path This switch is checked by default in order to comply with SMTP email standards but in spite of these standards some servers refuse to accept emails which are generated with a NULL reverse path so you can clear this switch if you desire However in some cases such as auto responders for example using anything other than a NULL reverse path can lead to mail loops Apply content filter rules to list mail before individual messages for list members are cracked When
319. le listing RAS setup This button is provided so that you can quickly review or edit your RAS settings Tip The amount of time needed to load the Scheduler when MDaemon starts will vary The length of time this process will take is proportional to the number of event entries that have been created Most configurations will do well to simply use the slide bar and Simple Scheduling to control mail processing intervals For example it is wasteful to schedule every minute of every day using the scheduler when you can simply set the slide bar to one minute intervals place it in control and accomplish the same thing On the other hand if you want 140 EVENT SCHEDULER CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP the remote intervals to be further apart than the local intervals but still frequent then you could use Simple Scheduling for Remote and the slide bar for Local See Configuring Your RAS Settings page 143 AntiVirus Updates Event Scheduling RES Send amp Receive Mail AntiVirus Updates Simple scheduling Scheduled AntiVirus updates lV Wait 240 minutes after the last AntiVirus What day er at alt azo aM aaa onday a x update before conducting another one I Sunday I Thursday Sakae at 00 00 12 00 AM Sunday at 00 00 12 00 AM Thursday at 00 00 12 00 4M Tuesday at 00 00 12 00 AM Wednesday at 00 00 12 00 AM I Monday I Friday I Tuesday Saturday Urgent updates IV Activate urgent updates MDaemon
320. led mail sessions MV Log IP Screen activity C Log summarized mail sessions Vv Log Spam Blocker activity MV Always log to screen Cancel Apply 188 CHAPTER 16 LOGGING Note There are several controls on the Miscellaneous Options dialog governing the amount of log data that may be displayed in the router window of MDaemon s main interface For more information see Miscellaneous Options GUI on page 194 Logging Mode Create a new set of log files each day If this option is selected then separate log files will be generated each day The name of the files will be correspond to the date they were created Create log files based on the day of the week If this option is selected separate log files will be generated for each day of the week The name of the log files will correspond to the day of the week on which they were created Create standard set of log files Click this option to maintain a standard single set of log files Log each service into a separate log file Click this checkbox to cause MDaemon to maintain separate logs by service rather than in a single file For example with this switch set MDaemon will log SMTP activity in the MDaemon SMTP 1log file and IMAP activity in the MDaemon IMAP 1log file This option must be selected when you are running a ghost or Terminal Services instance of MDaemon in order for the tabs on the interface to display the logged information Log File Sizes Max log
321. les and removes this macro There is no longer a separate field in the user database for a FILES directory Now an account s FILES directory is always within its mail directory in a subdirectory called FILES The conversion utility automatically invoked during installation adds entries to a file called TRACKDIR TXT which details any incompatibilities this might cause for any of your accounts Additionally there is no longer a separate FILES directory for Domain Gateways The FILES subdirectory is always maintained as part of the overall mail directory The aliasing system page 256 was completely redesigned Aliased accounts will be modified therefore go to the Address Aliases selection from the Setup menu and carefully inspect your aliases as soon as possible INSTALLATION 27 CHAPTER 2 Installation MDaemon Server v6 requires a Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 NT4 2000 or better computer system with a Pentium IIT 500MHz equivalent microprocessor and 256 MB of RAM or better a 1 GHz computer with 1 GB of RAM is recommended SMTP POP IMAP and related services require a Winsock compliant TCP IP stack such as that which ships with Microsoft Windows and Internet access with an ISP service If you will be using MDaemon as an internal email server only you will not be using it to send or receive messages externally then an Internet Service Provider is not necessary To install MDaemon Server v6 click Start gt Run
322. levels of access for each one For example you might allow some users to delete messages while restricting that from others These access rights are controlled through support for Access Control Lists ACL that has been added to MDaemon 6 0 ACL is an extension to the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP4 that makes it possible for you to create an access list for each of your IMAP message folders thus granting access rights to your folders to other users who also have accounts on your mail server If your email client doesn t support ACL you can still set the permissions via the MDaemon version 6 interface Right now very few email clients support ACL directly but there is an excellent utility from www bynari net called InsightConnector that will add this functionality and more to Microsoft Outlook ACL is fully discussed in RFC 2086 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2086 txt For more information see Shared IMAP Folders page 100 Public Folder Per user Flags IMAP public folders can now store flags i e new unread deleted on a pet user basis With this option enabled IMAP users will not share the same message flags globally with all other users but will maintain their own message flags independent of other users These flags are stored under the uset s mail directory in the PublicFolderFlags directory A new option has been added to the Public Folders dialog which will let you set whether or not the f
323. licts Then you can either accept the suggested timeslot or choose a new one WorldClient is also equipped with support for Internet Calendar iCal used by Microsoft Outlook and other iCalendar compliant email programs WorldClient can detect and process iCalendar information sent to your users and update their calendars accordingly When a user opens an iCalendar attachment from within WorldClient the information contained in the attachment will be reflected in the users WorldClient calendar Also when users create new meetings or appointments they can list one or more email addresses to whom they wish an iCalendar email to be sent This feature can be set on a per domain basis and then over ridden by individual users in their WorldClient Options The Calendar System can also be used to post Global Memos memorandums that will appear on everyone s calendar This feature can be used to post a notice to an entire domain s group of users by simply creating a memo normally and then clicking a single checkbox In addition for added security and versatility permission to create or see global memos can be controlled completely from within MDaemon These controls are located on the Calendar amp Scheduling tab of the WorldClient RelayFax Properties dialog Setup gt WorldClient RelayFax gt Calendar amp Scheduling You can grant read or write permission to all domain users no one or specific individuals whatever you prefer These permissions are
324. ling list IV Insert HTML shortcut links into digest messages T Force all list members to use digest mode Storage format DIGEST 7 Edit MBF When to spool digest messages Send digest malat 9M 127 37 6 M AMT PM Spool digest mail if 20 messages have accumulated 0 N A Spool digest mail if 200 lines of message text received 0 N A Permanent archive i IV Archive digests into a file catalog Which catalog do you want to use Public Use this feature to keep a permanent archive of all your digest messages Cancel Digest Settings Enable digest support for this mailing list This control determines whether this mailing list support message digests When digest support is enabled a copy of each message sent to the mailing list will be archived Members of the mailing list who have elected to receive traffic from this list in digest form will be sent these archived messages in a compact and easy to use indexed format Insert HTML shortcut links into digest messages When this control is enabled MDaemon will convert all URLs found within digest messages to hypertext links Force all members to use digest mode By default list members can control whether they wish to receive list traffic in digest or regular format This control forces all members to use digest mode irrespective of the mode they may have chosen for themselves Storage format Select the MBF file that individual messages placed into the d
325. list mail into the mail stream in such a way that return mail will not be possible MAILING LIST EDITOR 277 CHAPTER 24 Security MAILING LISTS Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Notifications Security Digest Public Folder List administration Password XXXXXXXXX This list uses a password in order to provide the list administrator access to list features that may be disabled For example a list administrator can specify this password in a SUBSCRIBE command and it will be honored even if support for subscription requests is switched off List moderation IV This list is moderated by FThomas example org Frank Tho All messages posted to this mailing list will be forwarded to the moderator Only the moderator or someone appointed by the moderator can post to the list as a whole MV Anyone can post who knows the list s password Membership limit List Administration Password Enter the lists access password in this control List Moderation This list is moderated by Limit this list s membership to 0 members 0 no limit Tf set the list will be moderated by the specified user Moderated lists forward all posts to the moderator The moderator alone may submit or forward messages to the list Anyone can post who knows the list s password If this option is checked the moderator can assign a password to th
326. list name then that address is set to receive in normal format instead of the sender Ex NORMAL MDSupportList mydomain com Ex NORMAL mdsupp mydomain com joe mdaemon com listname address This command sets address to nomail mode The account will enter a suspended state and will no longer receive list traffic If no address is specified then the originator of the message will be used ex NOMAIL list mydomain com me mydomain com listname address This command returns address to normal mode from nomail mode If no address is specified then the originator of the message will be used Ex MAIL list mydomain com Ex MAIL list mydomain com me mydomain com listname address real name This command sets the real name value for address who is a member of list listname to the given value The real name must be enclosed in and characters Ex REALNAME mdsupp altn com Frank Thomas catalog magic name password Retrieves a file from the specified catalog MIME encodes it in an email message and sends that message to the originating account or to the one specified in a RESULTS TO directive Ex GET utils myutil mypass NOTE The special PUBLIC catalog doesn t require a catalog name or password in order to retrieve a file catalog Retrieves a directory of the files and magic names available through the catalog Ex DIR public General Email Controls COMMANDS HELP RESULTS TO STATUS 320 PARMS DESCRIPTIONS
327. lity to create delete or edit MultiPOP entries in any way MultiPOP entries must be created by the administrator using the MDaemon interface This feature is for allowing users to control whether or not Multi POP Mail Collection for their account is turned on Edit autoresponder settings Click this checkbox if you want the user to be able to add edit or delete AutoResponders for their account Edit allow changes via email Click this checkbox if you wish to allow the user to modify their Account Settings via specially formatted email messages Apply defaults Click this button to cause the default settings designated on the Web Access Defaults dialog page 218 to be applied to this MDaemon account Any alternate settings that have been specified on this individual s account will be replaced by the Web Access Defaults settings 236 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Auto Responder Account Editor Frank Thomas EEG Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Web Auto Resp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders Auto response event V Enable an auto responder for this account Use this auto response script Tellmeimalyin rsp Browse Do not send auto response if message is from one of these addresses Del altn com Durge nosfentor com Roman bastages mail New excluded address wildcards ok LOOO Run a program foo Run this program Browse J Pass message to proce
328. livery Addresses will also be considered dead and removed when their message is moved to the Retry system and subsequently expires from that system Note The Automatically remove dead addresses switch is only designed to assist in situations where the remote mail server refuses to accept messages This will only work when you have configured MDaemon to crack the mailing list page 273 and not use a smart host If you are routing list messages to a smart host then see Enhanced List Pruning below for more information Enhanced List Pruning When the Automatically remove dead addresses control is enabled and you have specified a local mailbox as the return path for the list s messages see the Returned Mail control on the Notifications tab each day at midnight MDaemon will attempt to parse problem addresses from the returned mail and remove those members that couldn t be reached This will aid in more efficiently pruning invalid addresses from mailing lists especially when you are routing the list s messages to a smart host rather than delivering them directly On the Misc tab of Miscellaneous Options page 210 there are two controls related to this feature One of them will cause returned messages that do not contain a parsable address to be deleted The other will cause all messages that result in a list member being deleted to be saved 272 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Routing Mailing List Editor
329. ll not accept a message for delivery unless it is either FROM or TO a known user IV Refuse to accept mail for nonexistent local users MV Sender s address must be valid if it claims to be from a local domain Mail addressed to known aliases can always be relayed IV Mail sent via authenticated SMTP sessions can always be relayed Mail can always be relayed through domain gateways Cancel Apply Mail Relay Control This server does not relay mail for foreign domains When this switch is selected MDaemon will refuse to accept messages for delivery that are both FROM and TO a non local user RELAY SETTINGS 125 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Refuse to accept mail for nonexistent local users When this checkbox is enabled MDaemon will refuse to accept mail that is for a local domain but addressed to a nonexistent user Local includes both LAN and Domain Gateways Sender s address must be valid if it claims to be from a local domain If the person sending a message claims to be from one of MDaemon s domains the account used will be verified against the account database The local account must exist or MDaemon will refuse to accept the message for delivery Mail addressed to known aliases can always be relayed Click this control if you want MDaemon to relay mail for Address Aliases page 256 regardless of your Relay Control settings Mail sent via authenticated SMTP sessions can always be relayed When this checkbox
330. ls section below Ex MAILBOX RFC 822 AUTODECODE Y N Automatic decoding of incoming MIME attachments for the account specified in the subject line will be turned on or off Y on N off Ex AUTODECODE Y BEGIN SIGNATURE none Begins recording of a new signature file to be appended to messages generated by the account passed in the subject line Subsequent lines will be treated as the text of the signature file until the word END is encountered on a line by itself or the end of the control message is reached NOTE The signature file feature is only available for RAW format messages RFC 822 mail that arrives at the server using SMTP or POP will not append the signature file In these cases see your mail client s documentation for information concerning signature files BEGIN AUTORESPONDER none Begins recording of a new autoresponder file Subsequent lines will be treated as the text of the autoresponder until the word END is encountered on a line by itself or the end of the control message is reached Ex BEGIN AUTORESPONDER I m on vacation right now Pll get back to you ASAP END To erase an active autoresponder use the same command but without any response text Ex BEGIN AUTORESPONDER END 318 REMOTE SERVER CONTROL VIA EMAIL CHAPTER 28 FORWARD TO UNFORWARD MULTIPOP address none on off ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES The forwarding address for the account passed in the subject line will be changed to address a
331. lue pairs gt MSMail Priority High Remove From TheBoss altn com To VIP MyCompany com E ti Subject Urgent Message Sub string ma lala OK Cancel Priority Mail Engine Enable priority mail checking engine Click this switch to enable the Priority Mail feature MDaemon will inspect incoming messages for priority status 186 CHAPTER 15 PRIORITY MAIL Enter New Header Value Header Enter the message header in this field Do not include the ending colon character Value Enter the value that must be found in the specified header in order for the message to be considered high priority Trigger even if value is a sub string When entering a new Priority Mail setting you may select this feature to enable priority matching of a portion or sub string of a header value For example you could create a Priority Mail Setting for the To header with the value Boss Then any email containing Boss anything in that header would be considered Priority Mail If an entry is created without this feature enabled then the value of the header must match the entry exactly matching only a portion will not be sufficient Add After entering the Header Value information in the specified text boxes and after specifying whether this entry will apply to sub strings click the Add button to create the new Priority Mail entry Current Priority Mail Header Value Pairs This window lists all the currently defined p
332. lues associated with accounts such as Mailbox and POP Password can be constructed using a variety of special macros that will be replaced by actual values when an account is being created or imported Use of these templates can greatly simplify and automate new account management Default Account Settings Mailbox Use this field to specify a default Mailbox name template for new accounts In addition to being the Mailbox this value will be the name passed in the USER POP command which enables access to a mailbox from a remote location or POP aware mail clients See Macros below for a list of the Macros that can be used in this template string 216 NEW ACCOUNT DEFAULTS CHAPTER 19 MANAGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS Password This template specifies a default POP Password for new accounts This is the value passed in the PASS POP command which allows access to a mailbox from a remote location or POP aware mail clients See Macros below for a list of the Macros that can be used in this template string Mail directory Use this field to specify a default mail directory for new accounts These directories are where the actual mail files delivered to the mailbox will be stored Care must be taken to ensure that once expanded the template provided here will form a true DOS path Default Account Options These switches are used for designating default values for various account settings For more information on these switches see Account Editor
333. lup Settings ISP Logon Settings Post Connection LAN Domains LAN IPs CHAPTER 13 DomainPOP Mail Collection DomainPOP Mail Collection Account Parsing Processing Routing Rules Foreign Mail Security Name Matching CHAPTER 14 Content Filter and Anti virus Content Filter Editor Creating a New Content Filter Rule 119 120 122 123 125 125 127 129 132 133 134 135 135 137 138 138 138 139 141 143 143 145 147 148 149 150 152 152 155 157 159 161 162 163 165 166 168 MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 Modifying an Existing Content Filter Rule Admins Attachments File Compression AntiVirus AntiVirus Updater Notifications Message Macros CHAPTER 15 Priority Mail Priority Mail CHAPTER 16 Logging Logging CHAPTER 17 System Service Settings Service Settings Network Resource Access CHAPTER 18 Miscellaneous Options GUI Servers Headers Fixes System Disk MultiPOP WAB Misc Section II MDaemon s Account Features CHAPTER 19 Managing MDaemon Accounts Account Manager Creating an MDaemon User Account New Account Defaults Account Defaults Template Macros Web Access Defaults CHAPTER 20 Account Editor Account Editor 171 172 174 177 180 183 184 186 186 188 188 192 192 193
334. m these IPs are still being processed Wildcards like 192 168 are acceptable Cancel Apply These IPs are on my local LAN Like the LAN Domains tab this tab is used to list IP addresses that reside on your LAN and thus do not require dialup in order to deliver messages to them If a RAS session is in progress while messages are being delivered to these IP addresses and no non local addresses remain MDaemon will close the RAS session and continue to deliver the remaining Local IP messages Remove Select an IP address from the list and then click this button to remove it You may also double click an entry to remove it New local LAN IP Enter an IP address to add to the local IP list and click Add Wildcards like 127 0 are permitted Add After entering an IP Address into the New ocal LAN IP control click this button to it to the list RAS DIALUP SETTINGS 149 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Chapter DomainPOP Mail Collection Using MDaemon DomamnPOP Mal Collection features MDaemon to download mail from a remote POP mailbox for redistribution to your users This feature works by using the POP protocol to download all the mail found in the ISP s POP mailbox associated with the specified logon Once collected the messages ate parsed according to the settings provided on this dialog and then placed in user mailboxes or the remote mail queue for MDaemon to deliver just as if the messages had arrived at the serve
335. mail address es to which a copy of the incoming message will be sent IV Retain a local copy of forwarded mail Select this option if you wish to retain a copy of the forwarded message in the local account s mailbox Advanced forwarding options Forward the message to this host Use this address in SMTP envelope Use this TCP port 25 SMTP default is port 25 Mail Forwarding Options This account is currently forwarding mail This switch governs whether or not mail will be forwarded to the address specified in the Forwarding Address field Forwarding address es This field allows you to specify an address where copies of all inbound mail messages destined for this account will be automatically forwarded once they arrive at the server and are delivered to the account s local mail directory A copy of each new message arriving at the server will be automatically generated and forwarded to the address specified in this field provided the This Account Is Currently Forwarding Mail switch is selected Retain a local copy of forwarded mail If the account is forwarding mail to another address it may not be necessary for MDaemon to retain a copy of the message in the users local mailbox This switch governs that action Advanced Forwarding Options 226 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Forward the message to this host If a mail host is specified here the forwarded message will be delivered to it rather than to the do
336. main specified by the value found in the Forwarding Address field Use this address in SMTP envelope If an address is specified here this address will be used in the SMTP Mail From statement used during the session handshaking with the accepting host Normally the sender of the message is used in this portion of the SMTP envelope If you require an empty SMTP Mail From command looks like this MAIL FROM lt gt then enter trash into this control Use this TCP port MDaemon will send this message on the TCP port specified here rather than the default SMTP outbound port ACCOUNT EDITOR 227 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Options Account Editor Frank Thomas HE Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Account options i I Hide account from calendar Everyone list and VRFY results By default MDaemon uses account information for 4 variety of internal purposes Click here if you wish this account to be private and hidden from other users I Store mail messages in an encrypted state If selected message files of less than 4096 bytes will be encrypted by MDaemon while stored in the account s mailbox IV Allow changes to account settings via email messages Most of the account settings can be altered by sending specially formatted email messages Click this option if you wish to allow this account to make configuration ch
337. me the sender the recipient the content of the Deliver To header the subject of the message its size and how long it has been at its current location listed by date and time Above this box the complete file path to the currently displayed directory is given as well as the number of messages displayed and the size of the directory You may copy move or delete one or more files by selecting them from the list and then clicking the appropriate button below it The content of these files may also be edited directly from the Queue Page list box Simply double click the file that you wish to edit or choose Edit from the right click shortcut menu and MDStats will open the file for editing in Window s Notepad Note If you want MDStats to open an editor other than Notepad by default then you must edit the mdstats ini file located in the mdaemon app directory Change the Editor key 304 AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER located under the QueueOptions section heading to editor youreditor exe without the quotes If the file path of the exe file is not in your current path then you will have to include the path here as part of the file name The list box can be navigated by using the vertical or horizontal scroll bars or you can click anywhere within the list box and use the ARROW keys for navigation You can sort information contained in the Queue Page l
338. me in all email addresses parsed from the message converting it into the one you specify on this screen This could create some addresses which do not have a corresponding mailbox account at your site Since the domain name will match your primary domain name MDaemon will consider such addresses local but undefined Such mail typically generates a No Such User message directed at the postmaster This switch will prevent the Domain Name Replacement Engine from generating No Such User messages Address Filtering Always strip the following text from all parsed addresses Some ISP s will stamp each message with a line that indicates who the recipient of the message should be DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 157 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION along with a bit of routing information appended to the address on either the left or right hand side This stamp would be perfect to use for parsing the recipient address except that the additional routing information makes this impossible without a lot of account aliasing Rather than do all that you can simply specify the value of this appended text in the edit control associated with this feature and MDaemon will strip any occurrence of this text from all addresses that it parses 158 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Routing Rules DomainPOP Mail Collection HEI Account Parsing Name Matching Processing Routing Rules Foreign Mail Se
339. message will be directed back to the sender of that message List Properties This list is private and only members can send list traffic When this control is enabled the list will only propagate messages from list members Messages originating from non members will be deleted This list responds to EXPN and LISTS requests If this option is selected the membership of the list will be reported in response to an EXPN or LISTS command during a mail session Otherwise the list s membership will be kept private MAILING LIST EDITOR 269 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Messages have list name in Subject This setting causes MDaemon to enclose the name of the list in brackets e g ListName and add it to the beginning of the Subject in all messages sent to the list Messages have thread numbers in Subject ie Subject text 5 This switch allows you to toggle whether thread numbers will be displayed in the Subject header of list messages They are appended to the end of the subject line in braces and used as a pseudo thread number Sorting your inbox by subject will align list mail in chronological order Delivery precedence level for this list s traffic Enter a number from 0 99 in this control This value signifies the relative sort order of the messages during the delivery process The lower the value the higher its importance and the further up it will be in the sort order within a message queue As a guideline for assigning v
340. messages sent to the list are distributed to each of the list s members Lists may contain members with local and or remote destination addresses be public or private moderated or open be sent in Digest or normal message format and more M ailing Lists sometimes called Email Groups or Distribution Lists allow groups of users to be Mailing List Editor The Mailing List Editor is used to create and maintain Mailing Lists and can be reached from the Lists New List or Lists Edit List menu selection Creating a New Mailing List When the Lists New List menu selection is chosen the Mailing List Editor will be opened for creating the new list Naming the list and designating the domain to which it will belong are the only required parameters for creating it All other options will contain default settings You can change these settings while creating the list or you can change them later by editing it Modifying an Existing Mailing List Click the Lists Edit List menu selection to open the Select Mailing List dialog This dialog is used to choose the Mailing List that you wish to edit When a list is selected from this dialog it will be opened in the Mailing List Editor for editing or review 268 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Options Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files List add
341. mpany postmaster mycompany 9 93 9 5 Qs Giz 249 NOS OS GW ousus 249 1503 EIOS EDOS peer Ole multipart alternatives 208 308 503 50 250 com IOS com 35 0 com 250 503 Processing C MDAEMON LOCALQ md75000001128 msg gt eicar com MP cf1772420862 att gt Message from pos gt Message to gt Message subject gt Message ID Performing viral sc gt eicar com is infe gt eicar gt eicar com quarant C MDAEMON CFILTER QUARANT gt Total attachments To at at at er no tachments tachments tachments tal tal tal tal Virus ender rus notifica pient us notifica n us no tifica HOR VA VA VA VV VV V e V admi Vir tifica Processing complete rors while tion tion tion tion tmaster mycompany com postmaster mycompany com EICAR Test Message EMON10001200202251814 AA1447619 mycompany com gt an cted by EICAR Test File com was removed from message ined to scanned 1 including infected disinfected removed scanning sent to a SP S sent to sent to sent to postmaster example com matched 0 of 12 active rules CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Notifications Content Filter x Content Filter Admins Attachments File Compression Notifications AntiVirus AntiVirus Updater Notification messages Notification mes
342. mple com then MDaemon will automatically create a new Domain Gateway for it and accept its email Messages for example com will then be stored in a special folder and if you so choose spooled to higher level MX hosts at each remote mail processing interval This feature effectively enables you to become a backup server for another domain by simply configuring the DNS system to use your IP as an alternate MX host To help secure this feature MDaemon can be configured to send a confirmation request to an email address of your choice While MDaemon is waiting for the confirmation response messages for the domain will be accepted and stored but not delivered Confirmation requests must be replied to within an 300 AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS amount of time that you designate or the automatically created gateway will be removed and all stored messages deleted If confirmation is received before the time has expired then the stored messages will be delivered normally w Caution It might be possible for a malicious person or spammer to attempt to exploit this feature by configuring their DNS server to list your MDaemon s IP address as one of their MX hosts Automatic Gateway Creation must therefore be used with caution To aid in preventing possible exploitation we recommend utilizing the Send creation confirmation message to feature whenever possible Automatically create domain gateways based on DNS lookup
343. myisp net then move tc p If lt SUBJECT gt contains You have won 1 000 000 then me _Biemove If lt CC gt contains Rip company mail then move to Misc Cia al If lt SUBJECT gt starts with Free Pom then move to Trash Bear al If lt SUBJECT gt contains your clock in time then move to Im If lt Spam gt exists then move to Trash Up gt Down New IMAP mail rule If the ro x header contains x This text Then move message to this folder Personal Pictures cla Zi With MDaemon IMAP users can have their mail routed automatically to specific folders on the server Similar to the Content Filters MDaemon will examine the headers of each message and then compare them to rules When a message for the account holder matches one of their rules MDaemon will move it to the folder specified in that rule This method is much more efficient for both the client and server than attempting to filter the messages at the client and since some IMAP clients do not even support message rules or filtering IMAP Mail Rules provides this functionality to them IMAP Mail rules and messages folders can be created directly on the server via the IMAP Mail Rules tab of the Account Editor They can also be created by the users themselves via specially formatted email messages see page 318 Support for managing IMAP Mail Rules has also been added to WebAdmin By simply logging in to WebAdmin with their browser the
344. n the Internet is decentralized tt is not controlled by any company organization or country Each host or machine on the Internet is independent of the others and can provide whatever information or services its operators wishes to make available Nevertheless most information transferred over the Internet at some point passes through backbones which are extremely high bandwidth high speed connections controlled by the largest Internet Service Providers and organizations Most people access the Internet through an online service such as AOL or through an Internet Service Provider ISP that maintains or is connected to one of these backbones Many people believe that the World Wide Web WWW and the Internet are the same thing but this is not the case The WWW is only one part of the Internet not the Internet itself It is the most visible and popular part largely driven by commerce but still only a part Intranet Simply put an intranet is a small or private Internet used strictly within a company or organization s network Although intranets vary widely from organization to organization they may contain any of the features available on the Internet They may have their own email systems file directories web pages to be browsed articles to be read and so on The primary difference between an intranet and the Internet is that an intranet is relatively small and confined to an organization or group IP An acronym for Interne
345. n application used to display web pages It interprets HTML code text hypertext links images JavaScript and so on The most widely distributed browsers are Internet Explorer and Netscape Communicator Byte A set of bits usually eight that represent a single character There are 8 bits in a byte sometimes more depending on how the measurement is being made Byte is abbreviated with an uppercase B Cache Pronounced like cash There are various types of caches but all are used to store recently used information so that it can be accessed quickly later For example a web browser uses a cache to store the pages images URLs and other elements of web sites that you have recently visited When you return to a cached page the browser will not have to download these elements again Because accessing the cache on your hard disk is much faster than accessing the Internet this significantly speeds up browsing MDaemon s IP Cache stores the IP addresses of domains to which you have recently delivered messages This prevents MDaemon from having to lookup these addresses again when delivering additional messages to the same domains This can greatly speed up the delivery process 336 GLOSSARY CGI Common Gateway Interface is a set of rules that describe how a Web Server communicates with another piece of software on the same machine and how the other piece of software the CGI program talks to the web server
346. n the mail message for valid addresses Skip over the first xx Received headers Sometimes it is useful to process Received headers but starting at the nth occurrence of them This setting allows you to enter the number of Received headers that MD will skip over before beginning its processing Stop parsing if Received yields a valid local address DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 155 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION If while parsing a received header MDaemon detects a valid local address this switch will cause all further parsing to stop and MDaemon will not search the message for more potential delivery addresses Parse Subject header for address inside and characters When this is selected and MDaemon finds an address contained in in the Subject header of a message this address will be added to the message s list of recipients along with any other parsed addresses Parse these headers for email addresses This control lists the headers that MDaemon will parse in an attempt to extract addresses Every header listed here is checked for addresses Remove This button will remove the selected entries from the header list Default This button will clear the current contents of the header list and add MDaemon s default list of headers The default headers are typically sufficient to extract all addresses from the message New header Enter the header you wish to add to the
347. n to the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP4 that makes it possible for you to create an access list for each of your IMAP message folders thus granting access rights to your folders to other users who also have accounts on your mail server If your email client doesn t support ACL you can still set the permissions via the controls on this dialog Currently very few email clients support ACL directly but there is an excellent utility from www bynari net called InsightConnector that will add this functionality and more to Microsoft Outlook ACL is fully discussed in RFC 2086 which can be viewed at REEDS WwW e ECSC COE OLG PEC FECZOR 6 4 XE MAIL QUEUES 105 CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Mail Queues Queues HES Mail Queues Extra mail queue directories D Temp Je mdaemon localg2 Local No De mdaemon gateways notmycompa Remote No gt New queue This is an extra Browse remote mail queue C local mail queue I This queue is temporary Add Adding or deleting entries cannot be undone by clicking Cancel OK Cancel Apply Use the Queues dialog click Queues gt Queues on the menu bar to create custom local and remote mail queues Custom queue support makes it possible for you to have MDaemon monitor several locations from which to send mail On the Mail Queues tab you can create new queues designating them as local or remote and specify whether or not the new queue
348. name mailbox name password full name and the language in which they want the interface to appear Message listing shows this many msgs per page This is the number of messages that will be listed on each page of the Message Listing for each of your mail folders If a folder contains more than this number of messages then there will be controls above and below the listing that will allow you to move to the other pages Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Personalize page within WorldClient Message listing refresh frequency in minutes This is the number of minutes that WorldClient will wait before automatically refreshing the Message Listing Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Personalize page within WorldChient Save messages to Sent folder Click this option if you want a copy of each message that you send to be saved in your mailbox s Sent folder Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Compose page within WorldClient Display time using AM PM Click this option if you want a 12 hour clock with AM PM to be used when times are displayed for this domain within WorldClient Clear the check box if you want to use a 24 hour clock for the domain Individual users can modify this setting from the Options gt Calendar page within WorldClient Compose in new browser window Click this option if you want a separate browser window to open for composing messages instead
349. nate a value of 20 and a given attachment can t be compressed by at least 21 then MDaemon will not compress it before sending the message Note MDaemon must first compress a file to determine by what percentage it can be compressed Thus this feature does not prevent files from being compressed it simply prevents file attachments from being sent in a compressed format when they cannot be compressed beyond the designated value In other words if after compressing the file MDaemon finds that it couldn t be compressed by more than this value the compression will be disregarded and the message will be delivered with its attachments unchanged Compress if total attachment size is greater than XX KB When automatic attachment compression is enabled MDaemon will only attempt to compress a message s attachments when their total size exceeds the value specified here Messages with total attachment sizes below this threshold will be delivered normally with the attachments unchanged Compression level Use the drop down list box to choose the degree of compression that you want MDaemon to apply to automatically compressed attachments You can choose three levels of compression minimum fastest compression process with least compression medium default value or maximum slowest compression process but highest degree of compression Compression exclusions Exclude these attachments Click this button to specify files that you want
350. nd mail forwarding will be activated for the account Ex FORWARD TO vacationing myhost com Mail forwarding will be deactivated for the account specified in the subject line Ex UNFORWARD MultiPOP will be enabled disabled for the account specified in the subject line Ex MULTIPOP ON Ex MULTIPOP OFF Mailing List and Catalog Control None of these commands require an account on the server thus the subject line need not contain any special value when specifying these instructions Parameters contained in brackets are optional For example name address could be entered as Clark alone or with the optional parameter added Clark CKent dailyplanet com Command parameters listed in or require those symbols to be used COMMANDS USERS LIST SUBSCRIBE UNSUBSCRIBE or SIGNOFF PARMS none none listname DESCRIPTIONS A listing of all user accounts which are not flagged to hide their information will be mailed back to the message originator Ex USERS A listing of all non concealed named lists Mailing Lists that are configured to respond to LIST commands along with the names and addresses of all members will be mailed back to the message originator Ex LIST Retrieves the membership of the list LISTNAME if it is configured to respond to the LIST command Ex LIST MDSUPP listname listpass This command retrieves the membership of the list LISTNAME even if i
351. nd used as a stopgap measure against recursive mail loops that can sometimes be caused by errant configurations If undetected these looping message delivery cycles will consume your resources By counting the number times the message has been processed such messages can be detected and placed in the bad message directory The assumption is that if a message hasn t reached its recipient after being processed by a given number of mail servers then there is probably a mail loop in progress Most likely the default setting of this control should be sufficient to prevent mail loops and will not need to be changed Latency Latency XX milliseconds This is the delay in milliseconds between POP SMTP IMAP protocol commands This is useful for preventing high speed connections from processing data faster than the recipient can extract it This delay takes effect only during the POP SMTP IMAP protocol command sequence the actual transfer of a mail message file is already fully buffered 46 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Sessions Primary Domain Configuration EES Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival SMTP Maximum concurent SMTP outbound sessions al This is the number of simultaneous sessions MDaemon will create when it s time to connect to a remote system and deliver mail Max SMTP outbound me
352. nditions will require additional information that you will specify by clicking on the Condition s hyperlink in the Rule Description box If the HEADER contains Click any of these options to base your rule on the content of those particular message headers You must specify the text for which to scan 168 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS If the user defined HEADER contains Click one or more of these options to base the rule on message headers that you will define You must specify the new header and the text for which to scan If the MESSAGE BODY contains This option makes the contents of the message body one of the conditions This condition requires you to specify a text string for which to search If the MESSAGE has Attachment s When this option is selected the rule will be contingent upon the presence of one or more message attachments No additional information is required If the MESSAGE SIZE is greater than Click this option if you want the rule to be based upon the size of the message The size must be specified in KB Default is 10KB If the MESSAGE HAS A FILE called This option will scan for a file attachment with a particular name The filename must be specified Wildcards such as exe and file are permitted If the MESSAGE IS DIGITALLY SIGNED The condition applies to messages that have been digitally signed No further information is required by this condition If AL
353. nect to this local IP Host Screening works by comparing the value passed in an incoming SMTP session s EHLO or HELO parameter with the values listed here If a match is found the connection is either allowed or disallowed according to the configuration found here Cancel Apply Current Host Screen Entries This window displays all hosts that are being screened by MDaemon They are listed either globally or according to the Local IP Address to which they apply New Host Screen Entry Local IP Choose from the drop down list either All IP s or the local IP to which you wish to apply the screen This is the IP address that the remote host is attempting to connect to Remote host Enter a host that you wish to add to the screened list Wildcards are permitted so you could enter example com to prevent or allow connections from all sub domains of example com or example to apply the screen to all top level domains beginning with example Click the Add button to add the specified host to the list This remote host can connect Selecting this option will allow only those host specified under the given domain to connect and deliver messages Attempts to connect by hosts not specified in the listing will be refused and immediately aborted This option is useful for setting up private mail network systems SECURITY SETTINGS 113 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS This remote host can not connect Selecting this
354. nection request MDaemon will wait this many seconds for the remote system to accept the connection If the remote system does not respond within this time frame MDaemon will send the message to either the Gateway Host or Retry Queue depending upon which option you have chosen on the Domain ISP tab page 36 of the Domain Configuration Editor Wait XX seconds for protocol dialog to start before giving up Once a connection has been established with a remote host this is the number of seconds that MDaemon will wait for the remote host to begin the SMTP or POP3 protocol dialog If the remote host does not begin the protocol session within this time frame MDaemon will send the message to either the Gateway Host or Retry Queue depending upon which option you have chosen on the Domain ISP tab page 36 of the Domain Configuration Editor Wait XX seconds for MX DNS server responses While using DNS services to resolve MX hosts for remote domains MDaemon will wait for responses to its MX queries for this number of seconds If the DNS server does not respond within this time frame MDaemon will attempt to deliver the message to the IP address specified in the remote host s A DNS DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 45 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION record If that attempt fails MDaemon will send the message to either the Gateway Host or Retry Queue depending upon which option you have chosen on the Domain ISP tab page 36 of the Domain Conf
355. ned to sender Messages from restricted addresses will be returned to the sender Sent to postmaster Messages that are restricted will be accepted but delivered to the postmaster instead of this account Outbound Mail Restriction This account can t receive messages to the outside world Click this checkbox if you want the displayed account to be prevented from sending email messages to non local domains except if from one of these addresses Addresses specified in this area are exceptions to the Outbound Mail restriction Wildcards are permitted Thus if you designated altn com as an exception then all outbound messages to any address at altn com would be delivered normally by MDaemon New address If you wish to add an address exception to the Outbound Mail Restrictions list then type it here and click the add button Add After entering an address into the New address control click this button to add it to the exceptions list Remove If you wish to remove an address from the restrictions list select the address and then click this button Messages to unauthorized sources should be The options in this drop down list box govern what MDaemon will do with messages that originate from this account but are destined for a non local or otherwise unauthorized domain You may choose any of the following options Refused Messages to unauthorized addresses will be refused by MDaemon Returned to sender Messages
356. neens 135 IP cache database cssssssssenseeeeeeeeneeeees 315 IP screen database c scssssseeseeeeeeeeneeeeens 315 IP Screening csscceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeenenenees 111 IP Shield c sccesecesseensseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenees 115 IP shield database ane 15 IP Shielding csccsceseceseneeeeenseeeeeesenenenens 115 ISP LAST command ssssss21 152 ISP Logon Settings scssssseeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 145 ISP POP Accounts K Knowledge Base sssssssssessseseeeseeeseeenenees 332 LAN Domains sssssssss22 148 Latency LDaemon command line 2 s0s0sceseseseeeeeeee 97 LDaemon LDAP Server s sceseeseseeeeseeenees 97 LDAP 2 ccsceeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seen eeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeneeee 93 LDAP poft ccccssssecenseeeeenseeeenseeeeensenees 42 95 Leaving mail at ISP cscsscseseeeeneneenenees 152 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 93 Limits nsss 152 230 List Members ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 271 List Moderation sssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 278 List Routing csccseceessseeeenseeeeeneeneeeeeneeees 273 List Security 278 Local Queue prepost processing s s 55 Locking the MDaemon interface 00005 32 Log File logon NAME cc sseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 145 Logon Settings cscsssssseesseeseeeeeeeneeneeees 145 Looking up IP
357. network configurations and various other products MDaemon s flexibility allows it to work well with LAN proxy servers such as WinGate To configure MDaemon to work through any proxy server all you must do is make sure that the port settings see Ports page 41 you are using do not conflict with any that may be set in the proxy server itself For example SMTP email normally takes place on port 25 Since an IP address can only have a single port 25 two servers cannot both listen for SMTP email at the same time on the same machine When attempting to integrate MDaemon with a proxy it is recommended that whenever possible you allow MDaemon as much control over mail processing and delivery as possible To this end SMTP and POP ports in the proxy should be disabled so that MDaemon can handle mail delivery independently However should you find it necessary to channel mail through a proxy MDaemon allows you to configure the ports which it will use to send and receive SMTP POP IMAP transactions You may need to set these ports to non standard values in order to filter your SMTP POP IMAP transactions through a proxy server or firewall For more detailed information on configuring MDaemon to work with a proxy server please consult the resources available at the following URL http www mdaemon com helpdesk Miscellaneous Information Ifyou send a message to procnow mydomain com MDaemon will generate the PROCNOW SEM file As a result o
358. nguage support for WorldClient automatic domain gateway creation and more to MDaemon Standard s already extensive set of features For a complete discussion on the differences between MDaemon Standard and Pro see the white paper MDaemon Versions Comparing Standard and Pro This white paper and other helpful resources can be obtained form out web site at www altn com MDaemon Features MDaemon is equipped with many features besides SMTP POP and IMAP email processing The following is a list of just some of those features _MDaemon s extensive parsing features make it possible to provide email for an entire LAN with as little as a single dial up ISP POP3 mailbox This makes it possible to provide email to an entire network for a fraction of the normally associated cost MDaemon Server v6 features a complete suite of Mailing List or email group management functions allowing for the formation of an unlimited number of distinct distribution lists that can contain local and or remote members Lists can be set to allow or refuse subscription requests be public or private post replies to either the list or the originator of the message be sent in digest format and be configured using numerous other features 15 CHAPTER 2 16 An integrated component of MDaemon is WorldClient This exciting product makes it possible for your users to access their email using their favorite web browser rather than from a workstation dependent email
359. nhancements Configuration Caching MDaemon now uses an in memory caching system for the settings found in many of the ini and dat files in the App directory This system will improve performance considerably but changes made manually or directly to those files while MDaemon is running will not be reflected in the program until MDaemon is restarted or it detects a file called RELOADCACHE SEM in the APP directory Smarter Smart Spooling In the past when a single message was spooled to multiple recipients at the same host MDaemon would abort the entire message transfer if even one of the recipients was refused by the receiving host This prevented messages from being delivered to valid recipients when a single invalid address was in the delivery list Although this behavior is technically allowed it is not very efficient MDaemon has been changed so that this no longer occurs When MDaemon encounters errors with one or more recipients during message delivery it will continue the delivery process Afterward a summary of those recipients which failed will be delivered to the sender of the message The smart spooling options will now function in the Send every outbound email message to this host type of configuration on the Primary Domain Configuration editor click Setup gt Primary domain gt Domain ISP Note As a result of this change the wording within the DELERR DAT file is no longer appropriate and h
360. nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 42 Domain alias database s 315 Domain and Gatway SettingS 36 Domain Gateway SettingS 290 Domain gateways automatically creating Domain GateWwayS Domain Name Replacement s s 12 Domain Settings ssssss2122 DomainPOP Connection Window DomainPOP Mail Collection s1c0sss000 ACCOUNE waccescesnentectensnseneeseessennseenneenesnene Name Matching Parsing wsectecsssstsenseensseressnenscensnensensenseansee Routing Rules csccscssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeee Security sssss1s112 1 Domains Domains Trusted ssssssss21s12211 127 Domain sssssssssnnn1n0nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 148 Download Size Limits csscsseeeeeeeeeeees 152 Downloading limits sssss2122 1 152 Duplicate mail csccsceeseenseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 155 E Editing Account Alias File ccssesessesnseeseeees 314 Domain Alias File 314 Global Suppression File sssssssseeses 314 IP Sreen File csccsessscesenseeeseneeneeneenseees 314 Mime Type Definition File 0 0000000 314 Editing a Domain Gateway 288 Editing Content Filter rules c0ss0s000 171 EICAR virus test Message ss s 180 Enabling DomainPOP Mail Collection 152 ESMTP ETRN F features sssssssnnnnnnnnnn
361. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 15 File attachment compression sss 174 Filtering MESSAGES ssssssssss22 165 Fingering an ISP FOOtET we cscsscercestsonsorsteusnssenensescessnnusessenseenene Forwarding Forwarding Mail 355 INDEX G Gateway Editor Domain Settings ESMTP ETRN scccnsssceceseeeesneseenseeenenee Mail Forwarding POP IMAP cccssscccnnseeeeneeeeeenseeeecnseeeenne QUOtAS cceeseeeeeneseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneneneneeeeenneeee Gateway Settings s s 11111 Gateway wns ecssceseneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeesnenens General Email Controls Global Suppression File c0sssseseseessees H HELP meSsage cscceseeeeeenseeeeeeseeeeeeenenes 314 Hosting Multiple Domains ssss 1 62 I TCOMN vce scnecneeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneeesenseeseeeseeseeeeneeeeses 31 ICON COLOPS sssnnsnnnnnns2s22 31 IMAP 22sceeecseseeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 34 46 223 229 IMAP port 2 ccsceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 42 Importing Accounts sssssss2s222 2 249 251 Inbound Session Threads s 48 Infected MESSAGES nsssssssss212 5 177 Installation 0sccsceseeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 28 Installing Domains Gateways 288 Integration Introduction ssssssss222 5 5 15 IP Cache cccsecesceseeeeeeeeeeensneeenseeeeeesenee
362. nnnonneneoasens Programs ssssonsnannnonnnnunannnnnunnonnnnnnnannnnnnannnna Proxy Servers Public IMAP Folders ssscssssssensenseenees Queued Mail ccssesceesensenecnsneesensenseneenenees 29 QUOS iin sctieniecintercenctscdseccedeteassnsewieceansenneease 38 QuotaS oo eeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 230 299 R RAS Dialup Engine csscsseseseneeeeeeeeneeees 143 RAS Dialup Settings Dialup SettingS c cccscssesessneseeeeenseees ISP Logon Settings LAN DOMAinS sssss 22 2 357 INDEX Relay Settings csccsessseeseeseeeeeeeeeeenenees 125 Relaying Mail sccssesseesenseeseeeeeeeeeeenenees 125 Remote Access and Control 318 319 320 Remote Configuration Remote Mail Scheduling Remote Queue prepost processing 55 Remote Server Control Via Email 318 Reseller info 1 ccsceeseeeceseneeeeeeeseeeeenenees 333 RESOUICES woe eesceeeenseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneee 29 Responding automatically to messages 259 on 72 Restrictions scessessessenseesenseeneessenseenenenees Restricting attachments Retry Queue Settings Reverse lookup cscseseseseseseseseseneeeneneneee Routing Routing mail to various users s s s 159 Routing Rules cscseseeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 159 Sales inf sssuononsusononuonuuounanonunuononnunonoonuunuess Saving Mail ssssssssnnn2s2
363. nologies LTD Alt N Technologies LTD 1179 Corporate Drive West Suite 103 Arlington TX 76006 http www altn com 817 652 0204 817 652 0009 fax Sales and Reseller Inquiries Sales questions of a non technical nature relative to MDaemon software should be directed to lt sales altn com gt Alternatively you can call Alt N Technologies at 817 652 0204 You can locate an MDaemon reseller near you by using the Alt N partner Database located at http www altn com partners CONTACTS 333 APPENDIX F Documentation Issues mdaemon docs altn com MDaemon Beta Testing Alt N Technologies maintains an open policy on Beta team participation If you would like to join Alt N s Beta test Team and receive advance beta copies of future MDaemon releases Service Packs and other Alt N software simply send a message to mdaemon altn com with the following in the first line of the body SUBSCRIBE md beta altn com myaddress mydomain com Our system will return an information packet to you with instructions for obtaining Beta software and participating in Beta testing For more information on the MDaemon Beta Team visit http www altn com Beta Default asp Note The Beta Team is for those who wish to acquire Alt N software before its general release and aid in its testing it is not a technical support alternative Technical support for MDaemon will only be provided through those methods outlined in the MDaemon Technical Support
364. nt to save the file in comma delimited format or as a plain text file 310 AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Report Page amp Queue Stats Manager OF x Queue Page User Page Log Page Report Page r Report Configuration Report Registration Information Product ID MDaemon PRO v5 0 0 Version 5 0 0 Service Pack OEM Registration Name Michael A Mason Registration Company Alt N Technologies Registration Key ABCDEFG HIJKLMN OPQURTU Domain Gateway Primary Domain Settings Domain Name mycompany con SMTP Helo Domain wmycompany com Domain IP 127 0 0 1 Bind To This IP No Report When the Report Page is clicked MDStats will produce a comprehensive report that lists every setting within MDaemon in an easily readable text format This feature greatly decreases the amount of time needed by an administrator to check MDaemon s many configuration settings and it can aid in quickly solving possible configuration problems You can navigate through this report using either the scroll bars or the CURSOR keys and the Report display is also a text editor making it possible to insert notations or additional information that you may want on the report before saving it to a file Additionally you can use the shortcut menu to Cut Copy and Paste to and from this display by right clicking your mouse and making the desired selection from the menu that opens Re
365. nt under IIS WorldClient is equipped with a built in web server and therefore doesn t require Internet Information Server IIS to operate However to accommodate those who wish to use IIS support has been added to MDaemon 6 0 thus making it possible for WorldClient to function as an ISAPI DLL For more information see Running WorldChent under IIS page 80 ComAgent Replacing WCWatch in MDaemon 6 0 is ComAgent a secure instant messaging system address book client and tray applet that provides address book synchronization and quick access to WorldClient s email features ComAgent can be downloaded by each WorldClient user and then installed on the individual s local computer It is preconfigured for the specific user when downloaded thus limiting the need to configure it manually For more information see ComAgent page 75 Automatic Address Book Synchronization By using ComAgent in conjunction with Alt N s LDaemon LDAP server v2 0 or later to maintain WorldClient s Public and Private address books you can provide two way synchronization between LDaemon and the Outlook Outlook Express address book on each uset s local computer Thus if you use both Outlook or Outlook Express and WorldClient at different times the address books will match in both products MDaemon can maintain an accurate and continuously up to date LDAP database of users by communicating with LDaemon each time an MDaemon account is added removed or mo
366. ntain an accurate and continuously up to date LDAP database of users by communicating with LDaemon each time an MDaemon account is added removed or modified see LDAP Options Page 94 for more information ComAgent has the ability to poll LDaemon at regular intervals and acquire all the contact information being stored there It then publishes this information to the local computer s Windows Address Book or contact store This has the effect of instantaneously updating any local software package which uses the local address book system for example Outlook Outlook Express Anyone using ComAgent with the proper LDaemon access credentials can also add Public contacts by using the Windows Address Book directly or through Outlook Outlook Express The new contact will be picked up by ComAgent and uploaded to LDaemon From there all other users on your network will have access to the new contact the next time their ComAgent poles LDaemon You must create two folders within your Windows Address Book to store contact information ComAgent Public Contacts contains contacts that you wish to share with all ComAgent users on your network ComAgent Private Contacts are personal contacts that may be seen only by you Optionally you can change these default folder values via settings on the Address Book tab of ComAgent Properties WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 87 CHAPTER 6 The following address book fields will be synchronized Note W
367. ntries that you want to allow to be cached Add After entering the IP Address and Default Time To Live click this button to add the entry to the list of cached IP addresses Currently cached entries This box list the IP addresses that are currently cached MDaemon will not perform a lookup on them They will be treated as blacklisted addresses Remove Select an entry and then click this button to remove it from the list of cached addresses Clear Click this button the clear the list of all cached IP addresses 124 RELAY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Relay Settings Use the Setup gt Security Settings gt Relay Control menu selection to define how your server reacts to mail relaying When a message arrives at your mail server that is neither from nor to a local address your server is being asked to relay or deliver the message on behalf of another user If you do not want your server to relay mail for unknown users you can use the settings provided here UY Warning Relaying email indiscriminately for other servers could result in your domain being blacklisted by one or more Spam Blocker hosts see page 119 Open relaying is greatly discouraged because spammers exploit open servers to hide their tracks Relay Settings Security Settings HES Relay Settings Trusted Hosts Reverse Lookup Mail relaying E V This server does not relay mail for foreign domains With this switch enabled MDaemon wi
368. nts to be able to access the WorldClient server which enables them to check their email via a web browser Web based Remote Configuration Defaults Account can modify its own settings via WebAdmin Enable this feature if you want to grant MDaemon users permission to modify their account settings via WebAdmin They will only be able to edit those settings that you designate on this dialog When this feature is enabled and the WebAdmin server is set to Aive on the Message Router users will be able to log in to WebAdmin using their browser by pointing it to http mdaemonsdomain com Port They will first be presented with a logon screen and then a screen that contains the settings that they have been given permission to edit All they need to do is edit 218 NEW ACCOUNT DEFAULTS CHAPTER 19 MANAGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS whatever settings they choose and then click the Save Changes button They can then close their browser there is no need to logoff or do anything further Accounts that have been given administrative permission designated on the individual account s Web tab will see a different screen after they log in to WebAdmin For a discussion on the administrative options within WebAdmin see the WebAdmin user manual By default accounts can do the following via WebAdmin Edit real name Enabling this feature will allow users to modify their Rea Name setting Edit password Click this checkbox if you wish to allow users to modify
369. o be a known spam source the message will be flagged or otherwise dealt with according to Spam Blocker settings Additionally new options have been added which allow you to restrict the depth of this new Received header processing to only a certain number of headers within each message One added benefit of this feature is that when you have configure Spam Blocker to process Received headers within an SMTP delivered email and then a hit is found MDaemon can be configured to immediately refuse the email without ever accepting it Improved Import Export Capabilities When you select the export option and choose a comma delimited format MDaemon will export much more account information now than in previous versions including forwarding and auto responder settings The import process has been enhanced to accept comma delimited files that contain many more fields than in the past Each line of the comma delimited text file must contain only a single entry and the WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 23 CHAPTER 2 first line must be a base line giving the names and sequence of the fields in subsequent lines A sample file would look something like this Mailbox FullName MailDir AllowAccess arvel Arvel Hathcock C Mail Arvel Y frank Frank Thomas C Mail Frank N For more information on importing accounts from a text file and for a list of all allowable fields see Importing Accounts From a Text Fil
370. o designate those IP addresses Add blacklisted sites to the IP Screen under All Domains When a Spam Blocker lookup determines that a site is blacklisted MDaemon will add it to the IP Screen if this control is enabled Adding its IP address to the IP Screen will prevent it from ever connecting to yout MDaemon in the future w Caution Hosts that are blacklisted will oftentimes correct whatever problem there was which caused them to obtain the blacklisted status in the first place If a blacklisted IP address is added to the IP Screen then MDaemon will never accept connections from that IP address again even if they correct the problem and are no longer blacklisted by the Spam Blocker Hosts You should therefore be aware that use of this feature could potentially prevent a valid host from connecting to you Authenticated sessions are exempt from Spam Blocker lookups Click this checkbox if you want those sessions that were authenticated using the AUTH command to be exempt from Spam Blocker lookups It will perform no lookups for those sessions For more information see On Demand Mail Relay page 51 IP Shielding page 115 Domain Gateways page 289 Always exempt Trusted IPs from Spam Blocker lookups Click this checkbox if you want addresses that are listed on the Trusted Hosts tab of Relay Settings see page 127 to be exempt from Spam Blocker lookups Exceptions Click this button to open the Spam Blocker Exceptions dialog on
371. o on Finally port is often used to describe the process of making a program designed for a specific platform or machine function on another platform For example to port a Windows application to UNIX or to create a UNIX port for an application Post lIn Internet messaging such as email or newsgroups it is a single message entered into a network communications system for others to see For example a message displayed on a newsgroup mailing list or discussion board is a post It can also be used as a verb as in post a message to the mailing list or on the newsgroup PPP Stands for Point to Point Protocol It is the Internet standard for dial up connections PPP is a set of rules that defines how your modem connection exchanges packets of data with other systems on the Internet PPP is addressed in RFC 1661 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfcl661 txt Protocol In computing a protocol is a set of guidelines or standards by which servers and applications communicate There are many different protocols used for many different purposes for example TCP IP SLIP HTTP POP3 SMTP IMAP FTP and so on Registry A database used by Microsoft Windows to store configuration information about software installed on the computer This includes things like user settings file extension associations desktop background color schemes and many others It has the following six parts HKEY _User
372. of these maximum values mail delivery attempts will be refused When a gateway exceeds its quota settings subsequent delivery attempts will be refused and a warning message may be placed in the gateway s mailbox addressed to the postmaster IV Place a warning message in gateway mail directory when over quota Address warning message to Postmastert notmycompany Address warning message from MDaemont notmycompany Cancel Apply Quota Options This gateway must observe these quota settings Here you can specify the domain s maximum number of allowable messages and the maximum amount of disk space in kilobytes that it can consume This includes any decoded file attachments in its Files directory Place a warning message in gateway mail directory when over quota If this control is enabled and a mail delivery to the domain is attempted that would exceed the maximum message or disk space limitations the message will be forwarded to the designated address along with an appropriate warning Address warning message to Specify the address to whom the over quota warning message should be sent Address warning message from Specify the address from whom the over quota warning message should appear to have been sent AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 299 CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Automatic Gateway Creation Automatic Gateway Creation 21x Automatic Gateways Automatic gateway creation PRO only m Click here to have
373. older should use per user flags For more information see Shared IMAP Folders page 100 Support for InsightConnector from Bynari Inc An exciting plug in from Bynari Inc called InsightConnector is available for Microsoft Outlook users This plug in adds ACL support to Outlooks IMAP capability and also allows you to use MDaemon as a complete replacement for Microsoft Exchange Server With MDaemon Outlook and WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 CHAPTER 1 MDAEMON V6 0 InsightConnector you can completely replace Exchange Server with no loss of functionality Users can share calendars contacts to do lists and everything else previously only possible with an Outlook Exchange Server combination MDaemon has been enhanced in the following ways to work well with InsightConnector 1 A new switch added to the Shared IMAP Folders dialog will allow you to configure an alternative to the character that MDaemon uses to delimit IMAP folder strings For example if is the delimiter character and Test Test2 is specified as a valid IMAP folder then Test2 will be considered a sub folder of Test This new configuration setting was provided because Bynari s InsightConnector expects a lt period character as the delimiter rather than MDaemon s default character 2 MDaemon s new ACL support within its IMAP server works well with the ACL support added to Outlook by InsightConnector Performance E
374. ologies WorldClient Server contain a built in client that is served to the user s web browser Thus their browser is used as the client rather than needing to install one on their machine This greatly enhances the portability and convenience of email Encryption A security measure encryption is the coding or scrambling of information in a file so that it will only be intelligible when it has been decoded or decrypted Encryption is frequently used in email so that if a third party intercepted the email they would not be able to read it The message is encrypted when it is sent and then decrypted at its final destination Ethernet The most common type of connection used in a Local Area Network LAN Two of the most widely used forms of Ethernet are 10BaseT and 100BaseT A 10BaseT Ethernet can transfer data at speeds up to 10 mbps megabits per second through a cable or wireless connection A 100BaseT Ethernet transfers data at speeds up to 100 mbps A Gigabit Ethernet can transfer data at rates up to 1000 mbps and is employed by some Apple computers ETRN An acronym meaning Extended TURN It is an extension to SMTP that enables an SMTP server to send a request to another SMTP server to send or dequeue mail that is being held for it Because SMTP by itself cannot request mail email is usually requested via the POP or IMAP protocols this makes it possible for the SMTP server making the ETRN request to cause the remote server
375. omain If you clear this option the Calendar System will be disabled for the domain and there will be no calendar link on WorldClient s navigation bar Members of this domain may access only their own calendar Click this option if you wish to prevent the domain s users from being able to view each other s calendar First day of week Choose a day from the drop down list The selected day will appear in the domain s calendars as the first day of the week Add iCalendar events found within emails to user s calendar WorldClient supports Internet Calendaring Cal used in Microsoft Outlook and other iCal compliant email programs Click this option if you want iCalendar events that WorldClient finds within email messages addressed to a WorldClient user to be added automatically to his or her calendar All domain users can read global memos Set this drop down box to Yes if you want global memos to appear on every WorldClient user s calendar Set it to No if you don t You can designate specific users as exceptions to this setting by using the text boxes below labeled These users abvays never have permission to read global memos These controls are set per domain All domain users can create global memos Set this drop down box to Yes if you want to give all of the selected domain s WorldClient users permission to create global memos Set it to No if you don t You can designate specific users as
376. ompany com Irswi pc da E HMudd mycompany com Ir 3 CKent dailyplanet com Irswipeda Dwimble example com Irswid Email address Frank mycompany com x Add Replace Remove Access rights Import J Lookup I Insert V Set Seen Flag V Read IV Create M Administer MV write MV Delete M Post Help Ei Access Rights This area is for designating the MDaemon user accounts that you wish to grant access to the shared folder and for setting the access permissions for each one You can reach this dialog from the Public Folders tab of the Shared IMAP Folders dialog click Setup gt Shared IMAP Folders gt Public Folders Double click the desired folder or click the folder and then click Edit access control list to open the Access Control dialog for that folder Each entry lists the email address of the account and a one letter Access Level abbreviation for each Access Right that you grant to the user Email address From the drop down list choose the MDaemon account that you wish to grant access to the shared folder Add After choosing an Email Address from the list and the access rights that you wish to grant to the user click Add to add the account to the list Replace To modify an existing Access Rights entry select the entry make any desired changes to the Access Rights and then click Replace 104 SHARED IMAP FOLDERS CHAPTER 8 SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Remove To remove an entry from the Access Rights list
377. on version of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT ALT N TECHNOLOGIES SOFTWARE LICENSE This SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed not sold The SOFTWARE PRODUCT consists of product documentation a server application and support files individually identified as COMPONENT and collectively referred to herein as SOFTWARE GRANT OF LICENSE Alt N Technologies grants to you as an individual a personal non exclusive non transferable license to install and execute a single instance of the SOFTWARE on a single computer or on multiple computers provided that there is no chance of concurrently running two or more distinct instances of the SOFTWARE simultaneously for the purposes of evaluating the performance of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT for a period of no more than 30 days If after that time continued use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is desired then the SOFTWARE PRODUCT must be registered with Alt N Technologies subject to the terms as laid out in the registration information which can be found in the documentation accompanying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT If you are an entity Alt N Technologies grants you the right to appoint an individual within your organization to use and administer the SOFTWARE subject to the same restrictions enforced on individual users COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT are owned
378. onal and well known IM clients we have designed ComAgent s instant messaging system to minimize those deficiencies First of all our system is not peer to peer individual ComAgent clients do not connect directly to each other Further because every IM passes through the server each message is logged in a central location accessible to the MDaemon WorldClient administrator Thus a record of all conversations can be maintained for the security of both your company and your employees ot users IM activity is logged in a file called InstantMessaging 1og located in the MDaemon LOGS directory The assurance of accountability is also the primary reason we do not support other IM clients 76 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER such as ICQ AOL and MSN We may however add that capability as an optional feature in some future version of MDaemon Finally our IM system is secure in that each transaction is strongly encrypted from start to finish so that plain text is never transmitted Instant Messaging is provided on a per domain basis Controls for activating instant messaging and designating whether or not IM traffic should be logged are located on the Server Options tab of WorldClient RelayFax Properties Getup gt WorldClient RelayFax gt Server Options Using WorldClient Starting WorldClient There are three ways to start stop the WorldClient server 1 On the Stats tab on the left hand side of the Message Router right click on the
379. ons so that if it detects that another program has established a connection it will process remote mail immediately regardless of scheduled times If the connection remains open it will continue to process remote mail at regular time intervals based on the Use existing connection every XX minutes setting Hang up now This button will close the connection to the ISP This button is active only if MDaemon has initiated the RAS session 146 RAS DIALUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP Post Connection RAS Dialup Settings 24x Dialup Settings ISP Logon Settings Post Connection LAN Domains LAN IPs Post connection process a Once connected run this process C utiles FingerProg exe Browse Use these settings if you wish MDaemon to run a program immediately after a RAS connection has been established This is useful when your ISP requires a FINGER program or other process in order to release your mail to you Pause server for 1 seconds 1 infinite 0 no waiting MDaemon s main execution thread can be paused for a specified interval to give the program you want to run time to do its thing T Force process to shutdown after pause interval has elapsed Use this switch if you wish to ensure that the program shuts down after the specified time interval has elapsed Some programs don t exit on their own and must be forced to terminate This switch does not work when the pause interval is set to 1 Cancel
380. onses to protocol requests require more than one line of information Click this checkbox if you want to log these additional lines w Caution Enabling this switch could potentially increase the amount of logged information a great deal Because the number of lines in a response can t be determined in advance and because 190 LOGGING CHAPTER 16 LOGGING some responses have great potential for filling up your log file with possibly unnecessary information POP TOP for example which lists the actual contents of the message we do not recommend using this feature if log file size or verbosity is of concern to you Log IP Screen activity Click this checkbox if you want the IP Screening activities to be included in MDaemon s log file Log Spam Blocker activity This option causes MDaemon to log Spam Blocker activity Using this option will allow you to have an easy reference to the sites that were logged as blacklisted LOGGING 191 SYSTEM SERVICE SETTINGS Chapter System Service Settings Running MDaemon as a System Service se the Setup System Service Settings menu selection to run MDaemon as a system service under Windows NT 2000 or Windows 9x ME MDaemon will detect if you are running Windows 9x and present a different Service Setup Dialog if you are Although much less sophisticated than under NT 2000 services in Windows 9x will still allow you to operate the software without anyone being logged in Serv
381. option If you want to build the IP Cache yourself then clear this checkbox Default time to live This is the default value in minutes that an entry in the IP Cache can survive Once the entry has been in the IP Cache for this number of minutes MDaemon will remove it If you want to set a permanent entry in the IP Cache then designate the Default Time To Live as 9999 in which case the entry will never expire Max cached entries This value determines how large the cache may be Once this setting has been reached the next cache entry will bump the first one out of the cache Currently Cached IPs Remove Select an entry in the Currently Cached IPs window and then click this button to remove it No cache Click this button to bring up a list of domain names and or IP addresses that you never want MDaemon to add to the IP Cache Clear This button will flush the cache Add New IP Cache Entry Domain Enter the domain name that you wish to add to the IP cache IP Enter the IP address that you wish to add to the IP cache Add Once you have entered a domain name and IP address click this button to manually add them to the cache 136 DNS LOOKUP CHAPTER 11 IP CACHE AND DNS LOOKUP DNS Lookup The DNS Lookup utility Setup Perform a DNS Lookup can be very useful when used in conjunction with the IP Cache DNS Lookup makes it possible for you to quickly and easily perform a DNS lookup for any valid Internet domain name A s
382. or mail directories by sending specially formatted mail messages to the server For a complete discussion on remote account manipulation see Remote Server Control Via Email 228 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Account can modify the public address book Click this option if you want the account to be able to add and delete entries from the WorldClient or LDAP based public address books w Caution If the Account is synchronizing folders with ComAgent then modifications could be propagated to all users Exercise caution when enabling this feature ACCOUNT EDITOR 229 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Quotas Account Editor Frank Thomas 21x Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Quota options Dy M This account must observe these quota settings When an account exceeds its quota settings subsequent delivery attempts will be refused and a warning message will be placed in the account s mailbox Maximum number of messages stored at once 1000 Maximum disk space allowed 5000 KB Account and old mail pruning F Use defaults for this domain Automatically delete account if inactive for 60 days 0 never Delete messages older than 30 days 0 never Delete deleted IMAP messages older than 30 days 0 never M Delete old messages from IMAP folders as well Quota Options This account must observe these quota settings Here y
383. or New on the Account Manager page 214 This will open the Account Editor for configuring the account You can designate default settings for new accounts by using the New Account Defaults dialog page 216 NEW ACCOUNT DEFAULTS 215 CHAPTER 19 MANAGING MDAEMON ACCOUNTS New Account Defaults Use the Accounts New Account Defaults menu selection to edit your Account Defaults and Web Access Defaults Account Defaults New Account Defaults 24x Account Defaults Web Access Defaults Default account settings Mailbox USERFIRSTINITIAL USERLASTNAME Password SUSERFIRSTINITIAL USERLASTNAME Mail directory EAM DAEMONSUSERSS DOMAIN S SMAILBOXSS Default account options T Auto decode M Keep a copy of forwarded mail j MV Allow POPAMAP access Encrypt stored mail T Account can modify the WorldClient public address book IV Allow changes to account settings via email messages I Hide account from Everyone list LDAP address book and VRFY results T Restrict account to sending and receiving local mail only Default quota settings I Account must observe quota settings Max number of messages 0o00 Max disk space 000000 KB Apply installation defaults to all template values mee ao Account Defaults contains various account setting controls and template strings Templates make it possible for you to specify default values for common user account components The various string va
384. or mail host s name or IP address here This is generally the SMTP server on your ISP Note Do not enter MDaemon s Primary Domain Name or IP address into this text box This entry should be an ISP or other mail server that can relay mail for you Send every outbound email message to this host Select this option if you want all outbound email regardless of its destination domain to be spooled to a gateway host for routed delivery If selected all outbound email will be sent to the host specified in the ISP or smart host s IP or domain name field Typically this feature is useful during high volume periods when direct message delivery would result in an excessive taxation of server resources Send only undeliverable outbound mail to this host Click this option if you want to spool only undeliverable outbound email to the gateway host specified in the ISP or smart host s IP or domain name field Undeliverable mail is email destined for hosts that could not be resolved to an actual IP address such as an unregistered gateway to a remote network or email destined for a host that was resolved properly but could not be connected to directly or is refusing direct connections Rather than return such mail to its originator this option causes MDaemon to pass the message off to a more powerful MTA Sometimes the mail system run by your ISP may have routed methods of mail delivery to which your local server may not have direct access Attempt to
385. ost name or IP Port Host name or IP Port Bind DN Bind DN fusen A fusee m Bind password Bind password usen puse m Base entry DN Base entry DN Search filter Search filter Select lt USER gt to require each user to bind using their unique account logon and password Select lt ANON gt to allow anonymous binding Match settings to those MDaemon uses when creating LDAP entries I Use disk file as public address book provider C MDaemon WorldClient addrbook txt Browse om a Address Book Select domain Use this drop down list to choose the domain whose address book settings you wish to edit Leave it set to Default if you wish to edit the default settings The default settings will be used for all domains whose settings you haven t specifically changed If you make changes to any of the settings on this tab then you must Apply them before switching to a different Select domain setting If you make changes and then attempt to select a different domain without first applying them a box will appear asking you to choose whether or not you wish to save the changes before switching to the new domain Click Yes to save the changes or No to discard them Set to defaults This option resets a domain to the Default address book settings Use the Select domain control to select a domain and then click Seto defaults to restore it WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES 85 CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Use LDAP server as ad
386. ot include file name C MDAEMON LOGS Browse Cancel Apply Directories RAW formatted mail is picked up from this directory Enter the directory path where MDaemon Server v6 should expect to find RAW format messages that are to be processed and entered into the mail stream This directory is scanned at each local mail processing interval for RAW mail which the server then converts to RFC 822 and delivers to its intended recipient s For a complete discussion of RAW message specifications see The RAW Message Specifications page 316 Bad messages parsing errors unknown _users etc are placed here Enter the directory path where bad messages should be placed The bad message queue will contain messages destined for unknown yet supposedly local users and messages that cause parsing problems When collecting inbound mail work files should be stored here Enter the directory path where MDaemon should store incoming transient SMTP mail messages This work directory is used only while an SMTP session is in progress While a session is ongoing the messages being delivered to the server are stored in temporary files in this directory DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 57 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION RFC 822 compliant remote message queue non local mail only Enter the directory path that MDaemon should use as the outbound mail queue This directory will contain only processed RFC 822 format messages that are
387. ote that the dash is missing on the last line and is replaced with a blank space For example C MDAEMON APP gt Copy con POLICY DAT 220 This site does not authorize you to relay mail 220 So don t do it aL 326 APPENDIX D Appendix D Customizing SMTP and POP Protocol Strings MDaemon contains a mechanism for altering the SMTP and POP protocol strings that it uses You can provide custom strings for most of the SMTP and POP dialog Each string that MDaemon uses has a unique number and a specific default value These defaults will be used unless a custom string is found in the Custom SMTP or Custom POP sections in the MDAEMON INT file When creating custom SMTP strings pay close attention to the following 1 Some SMTP default strings start with a blank space character see chart below Any replacement for these strings must also start with a blank space character Failure to do so will result in servert failure You must enclose the custom string in quotation marks when you place it into the mdaemon ini file Failure to do so will result in server failure Some strings contain macros such as s or od These macros are dynamically filled in with data when the string is loaded and used Custom strings are not required to use these macros However a custom string may duplicate these macros provided they are placed in the same sequence as they appear in the default string Failure to place macros in
388. ou can specify the account s maximum number of allowable messages and the maximum amount of disk space in kilobytes that the account can consume this includes any decoded file attachments in the account s Fie Directory If a mail delivery to the account is attempted which would exceed the maximum messages limit or the maximum disk space allocated then the message is forwarded to the postmaster along with an appropriate warning If a MultiPOP collection would exceed the account s maximum a similar warning is issued and the account s MultiPOP entries are automatically switched off but not removed from the database Account and Old Mail Pruning The controls in this section are used to designate when or if this account will be deleted by MDaemon if it becomes inactive You can also designate whether or not old messages belonging to the account will be deleted after a certain time period Each day at midnight MDaemon will remove all messages that have exceeded the time limits stated or it will delete the account completely if it has reached the inactivity limit The default controls for these settings are located in the Primary Domain Configuration page 53 and Secondary Domains page 63 dialogs but the controls on this tab can be used instead if you want this account s settings to override the domain defaults 230 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Use defaults for this domain If you want to use the default Account and Old
389. outlines a number of resources to help you learn more about MDaemon troubleshooting problems and so on By utilizing the Help Desk you can often avoid the need to contact Technical Support The MDaemon Help Desk contains a number of useful resources including MDaemon Knowledge Base You can search our support database for answers to your questions With support for time based natural language and article based searching plus a listing of Frequently Asked Question you re sure to find the right answer Helpful Articles The Help Desk contains a number of useful articles addressing various MDaemon configuration issues and other related topics Free Add on amp Complimentary Software Here you can download free supplementary software and utilities written by MDaemon s developers and users MDaemon Support Mailing List The MD Support email discussion group is a mailing list hosted by Alt N Technologies It is an open membership list where users can get help and discuss MDaemon with other users MDaemon s Development Team other support staff and a large mix of MDaemon users regularly participate in the discussion and contribute feedback and help Odds are that someone will have an answer to your MDaemon question in the MD Support email group To join MD Support send a message to mdaemon altn com with the following in the first line of the body 332 APPENDIX F SUBSCRIBE md support altn com myaddress mydomain com M
390. override this behavior by using the SMESSAGES macro Use this macro in place of where the message file name should be placed This allows more 238 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR flexibility in the use of this feature since a complex command line such as this will be possible Llogmail e j message MESSAGES q Advanced Options Add sender to this mailing list If a mailing list is entered in this field then the sender of the mail message will be automatically joined to that mailing list This is a very handy feature for building automatic lists Remove sender from this mailing list If a mailing list is entered in this field then the sender of the mail message will be automatically removed from the specified mailing list Tip Auto Response events are always honored when the triggering message is from a remote source For messages originating locally whether or not an Auto Responder will but triggered is contingent upon a setting on the Miscellaneous Options dialog page 194 The control is Auto Responders are triggered by Local as well as Remote Traffic Enable the control if you want Local mail to trigger an auto response ACCOUNT EDITOR 239 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR IMAP Mail Rules Account Editor Frank Thomas 21x Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Web AutoResp IMAP MailRules MutiPOP SharedFolders Existing IMAP mail rules If lt FROM gt is equal to MrsThomas
391. oxy The Update URLs tab contains a list of sites to which MDaemon AntiVirus will connect to check for virus signature updates You can add and remove web sites to and from the list and move the URLs up and down in the list by using the provided arrow buttons the web sites are checked for updates from top to bottom Clicking the control Use random starting point in the URL fisf will cause the sites to be checked in random order rather than in the order that they are listed The Connection tab is used to designate the Internet Connection Profile that you wish MDaemon AntiVirus to use when connecting to the update sites The Use Internet Settings from Control Panel option uses your default Internet settings The Setup Internet settings manually option and subsequent controls can be used to manually choose a Connection Profile and designate its user name and password settings The Proxy tab contains options for configuring any HTTP or FIP proxy settings that your current network configuration may require in order to connect to the update sites View update report The MDaemon AntiVirus Log Viewer is opened by clicking the View update report button The viewer lists the times actions taken and other information about each update Scheduler Click this button to open MDaemon s Event Scheduler to the AntiVirus Updates tab The controls on this tab are similar to those on the Send amp Receive Mail tab and can be used to schedule c
392. pdater cscscnscsensseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 138 180 Viewing update report MDaemon Knowledge BaS 332 MDaemon Server V6 1csssessseseneeeeeeeeeneeeees 15 MDaemon Technical Support 200000005 332 MDaemon s Text Editor MD Config sssssss22222 5 MDConfig port scssceseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeees Message Precedence Message Router MIME type definition database 005 315 Miscellaneous cscceseeeceeenseeeeneeeeeeeeenenees 321 Moderation cscescseeeneeeeeesenseeeeeeseneeesenenes 278 Modifying Content Filter rules 0 0000 171 Multiple Domains Multiple homed IP 0sescesseeeseeeneeeeeeeeenees 62 MulltiPOP ccccsssessseseeensseeeenee 207 242 243 Collection freqUenCy 207 MX cache MX cache database cscseesseeeseeeeseeeeeees 315 MX records sssssssss2 43 N Name Matching NEW ACCOUNES 2s cssesseeeeneeeneeeeenseeneneee New user welcome Message us 315 No valid command found Message 315 No cache database sssssssseesseenseeenseeeneee 315 non local mail Notification messages AV update s cscseseceeesesenseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 183 Restricted attachmMent 183 NT System Service Settings 0s000000 192 NT Win 95 System Service Settings 192 O Obj
393. pecial Notes 26 Installation 28 TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 2 MDaemon s Main Display Message Router Tray Icon Shortcut Menu Locking Unlocking MDaemon s Main Interface Connection Window CHAPTER 3 Primary Domain Configuration Domain Configuration Editor Domain ISP Retry Queue Settings ISP AUTH Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue On Demand Mail Relay ODMR Dequeue AUTH Archival Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail CHAPTER 4 Secondary Domains Hosting Multiple Domains MDaemon Pro only Secondary Domain Editor Adding a Secondary Domain Editing a Secondary Domain Removing a Secondary Domain CHAPTER 5 Remote Configuration Setting up Remote Configuration WebAdmin Remote Server Administration Remote Configuration MDConfig Remote Configuration Client Introduction Connecting to a Remote MDaemon Site Updating the Remote MDaemon Site Clearing Alterations without Updating the Remote Site 29 29 31 32 32 33 34 34 36 38 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 51 52 53 55 57 59 60 62 62 63 65 66 66 67 67 67 68 70 70 71 72 72 MDAEMON VERSION 6 0 3 Resetting MDConfig for a New Connection 72 Moving MDConfig to Another Computer 73 CHA
394. pping Received headers x SMTP Connection Window s SMTP ports c cscseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees Spam Blocker sccseseeseneeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeenes Spam Blocker caching Statistics ccscssceeeeeeseeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee Subs cribe ccscssessessseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeens Summary Support 22 0 cccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Support Files csccscseeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Suppressed UselS csccscsceseeseseneeseeeeeeeenes Suppression Suppression File 0ssscesseseseneeseeeeeeeenes System Service csccsscsseeeeeeeseeeneeeeneeees Technical Support csceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenes Telephone Support Templates cccceceseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneee Threading T MCOUt anansnununosssnnuunuannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan TOPS acetic stinsitncesavannndnnnanncesnwanwkasinanncesaweanied TOOUD aD wasisnisesuicnnscnaienincauicnsniauienincanisnensaaiends Tooltip Transient delivery failure message 315 Tray ICON sssssss1s21 31 Trusted Domains ssnsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 127 Trusted hosts U Undeliverable Mail sssssssesessseeseseneeeeees 39 Unknown Local Mail cscsesseeeeeeeeeneeeeens 60 Unlocking the MDaemon interface 32 Updating virus definitions
395. r Send signal to this remote host This is the host to which you wish to connect to signal the release of your mail Use this TCP port Enter the port on which you wish to make the connection The default is 25 the SMTP port which is DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 49 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION appropriate for the ETRN or QSND signaling method Port 366 is typically used for ATRN and port 79 is used for FINGER Dequeue Instruction Send this string to host This control is for specifying the text string that needs to be sent in order for your email to be released For example the ETRN method requires the text ETRN followed by the domain name of the site being queued Other methods require different text to be sent Consult your ISP if you need more information on what to send to unlock your mail queue Note When using a dequeue method of mail hosting we recommend using On Domain Mail Relay ODMR whenever possible We believe that it is currently the best method available for hosting your email in this manner ODMR requires the ATRN command to be used in this control Send SMTP EHLO before transmitting string to host If you enable this checkbox then you should be connecting to an SMTP server to signal release of your mail This switch causes an SMTP session to be initiated with the specified host and allows the session to progress just beyond the SMTP EHLO stage before sending the unlock string
396. r Z A Columns may also be resized by positioning the pointer over the line between any of the column headings until it changes shape and then dragging the column to the desired width Further you can double click any entry and MDStats will be shifted to the Queue Page with the contents of their mailbox folder displayed Note By default the list displays the Message Count not file count and the Disk Space used by messages Not the space used by all files in the directory This is the Quota information AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 307 CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER reported by MDaemon Alternatively MDStats can display the fz count and disk space used by all fs instead of by messages To change this setting simply open the MDstats ini file located in MDaemon s app directory and change the ShowQuota Yes key under the UserOptions heading to ShowQuota No w Warning User folders contain a file called hiwater mrk that MDStats reads to determine some of this user information You should avoid deleting this file unnecessarily as it will prevent MDStats from being able to obtain some of the information listed in the User Information list box Refresh User statistics such as the number of messages contained in their mailboxes and the amount of disk space that their accounts are using are constantly changing You can easily update the information contained in the User Information list box by clicking the Refresh button Th
397. r more information Edit MXCACHE file Click this button to view or edit the MXCACHE DAT file with MDaemon s text editor Edit hosts File Click this button to view or edit the HOSTS file with MDaemon s text editor 44 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Timers Primary Domain Configuration 24x Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Event timers IMAP options available in PRO version only Wait 30 seconds for sockets to connect before giving up Wait 30 seconds for protocol dialog to start before giving up Wait 10 seconds for MX DNS server responses Wait 10 seconds for 4 Record DNS server responses SMTP and POP sessions timeout after 10 inactive minutes IMAP sessions timeout after 20 inactive minutes MV IMAP NOOP commands trigger 1 minute inactivity timeout Loop detection and control Maximum message hop count 1 100 20 This setting places an upper limit on the number of times a message can be processed by SMTP mail servers before being removed and placed in the bad message queue Latency 125 Milliseconds 1 EEEN 250 O O E E eee aay Millisecond delay between POP IMAP SMTP commands 0 no delay Cancel Apply Event Timers IMAP options available in Pro version only Wait XX seconds for sockets to connect before giving up After initiating a con
398. r using conventional SMTP transactions U se DomainPOP Mail Collection Setup DomainPOP Mail Collection to configure It is important to note that messages stored in POP mailboxes and retrieved using the POP protocol will be devoid of the important routing information sometimes called the message s envelope that would ordinarily be supplied had the messages been delivered using the more powerful SMTP protocol Without this routing information MDaemon is forced to read the message and examine the headers in an attempt to determine to whom the message was originally intended This is not an exact science to say the least Message headers are sometimes notorious for their lack of sufficient information that is needed to determine the intended recipient This lack of what would seem to be a fundamental characteristic of an email message the recipient may seem surprising but one must keep in mind that the message was never intended to be delivered to its recipient using the POP protocol With SMTP the contents of the message are irrelevant since the protocol itself dictates specifically to the server during the mail transaction the intended recipient of the message In order to allow for POP retrieval and delivery of mail messages in a reliable and consistent way MDaemon employs a powerful suite of header processing options When MDaemon downloads a message from a remote POP soutce it immediately parses all the relevant headers
399. re if an account connects to the IP address corresponding to its domain and that IP address is not used by any other domain then the account need only specify the login value Otherwise it must specify a complete email address In this way support for servicing multiple domains can be accomplished using a single IP address When several domains share the same IP address then the login must contain the full email address Otherwise MDaemon will not know which user is attempting to log in When in doubt use the full email address as your login value So how is the login and domain specified You would expect that providing the account s email address would work like this arvel altn com MDaemon will always accept logon values that contain the symbol so if your mail client supports using the symbol in the logon value then there is no 62 CHAPTER 4 SECONDARY DOMAINS problem However it turns out that many email clients on the market today will not allow the symbol to be used in the login field To accommodate those mail clients that do not permit this MDaemon allows you to specify an alternative character MDaemon s default alternative character is That means that you could use arvelSaltn comas easily as arvel altn com The alternative character is specified on the System tab of the Miscellaneous Options dialog page 203 This value can be up to 10 characters long making it possible to provide a string of charact
400. replaced by the original message s subject text This makes the string equivalent to SetSubject RE Original Subject Text 262 AUTO RESPONDERS CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES 2 MDaemon replaces the original subject which it has stored in its internal buffers with this newly calculated one From then on any call to SSUBJECTS or use of the subject field will return the new result Note the placement of the new macros they are listed at the bottom of the response script This is needed to avoid side effects For example if the SSetSubject macro were placed before the SSUBJECTS macro which appears in the third line of the response script the subject text will have been changed by the time the SUBJECTS macro is expanded Therefore instead of replacing SUBJECTS with the content of the original message s Subject header it will be replaced with whatever you have set the value of Set Subject to be Creating and Using MBF Files MBF or Mailbox Format Files are text files designed to allow cross compatibility with other email transport systems that can accept ASCII text files into their mail streams MBF files are essentially templates that contain a set of special formatting macros that enable MDaemon to transform an RFC 822 message into a vatiety of other text based formats Using MBFs MDaemon can be configured to automatically reformat incoming mail into specific alternatives on a per mailbox basis When a message
401. resses Name MyList mycompany com si List s Reply To address M pList mycompany com v Leave Reply To field blank and replies will be directed back to poster List properties IV This list is private member use only and hidden from address book hs J This list responds to EXPN and LIST requests MV Messages have list name in subject ie Subject LISTNAME text IV Messages have thread numbers in subject fie Subject text 5 Delivery precedence level for this list s traffic 80 0 99 Use this as 4 guideline 10 urgent 50 normal 80 bulk Replace TO field with C N A list s name member s full name IM Include MyList List Member in TO field Don t distribute messages larger than 500 KB 0 don t care List Addresses Name Specify a name for the mailing list and then choose the domain to which the list will belong form the drop down list box Messages directed to this list will use the name and domain specified here e g mylist mydomain com List names cannot contain P or cep List s Reply To address Type the email address to which you want replies to this list to be directed Enter the list s address if you want replies to be directed back to it You may enter an address other than the list name or choose an address from the drop down list if you want replies to this list to be directed to an alternate address If you leave this field blank then replies to any list
402. restart LDaemon after making any changes to these options before the new settings will take effect 98 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES SHARED FOLDERS MAIL QUEUES Chapter Shared Folders Mail Queues Creating additional mail quenes and configuring and utilizing Shared IMAP folders shared Public folders are extra folders that do not belong to any particular account but can be made available to multiple IMAP users User folders are IMAP folders that belong to individual MDaemon accounts Not to be confused with public FTP or html folders MDaemon s Shared IMAP folders whether Public or User may not be accessed by everyone Each shared folder must have a list of MDaemon users associated with it and only members of that access list may access it via WorldClient or an IMAP email client M Daemon version 6 supports Shared IMAP Folders Public and User folders may both be When IMAP users access their list of personal folders shared public folders and shared user folders to which they have been given access will also be displayed In this way certain mail folders can be shared by multiple users but still require each user s individual logon credentials Further having access to a folder doesn t necessarily mean having full read write or administrative access to it Specific access rights can be granted to individual users thus allowing you to set different levels of access for each one For example you might allow some users to delet
403. rg rfc rfc1517 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfc1518 txt http www rfc editor org rfc rfc1519 txt Client A software program that is used to contact and obtain data from or send data to a server software program The server is usually located on another computer either on your local network or at some other location Each cent program is designed to work with one or more specific kinds of server programs and each server requires a specific kind of client A web browser is a specific kind of client that communicates with web servers Common Gateway Interface See CGI above Cookie In computer terminology a okie is data sent by a web server to your web browser which is saved and later used for vatious purposes when you return to the same site or go to another location on the site When a web server receives a request from a web browser that includes a cookie it is able to use the information the cookie contains for whatever purpose it was designed such as customizing what is sent back to the user or for keeping a log of the user s requests Typically cookies are used for storing passwords usernames preferences shopping cart information and similar things related to the site to which they correspond so that the site can appear to remember who you are and what you ve done there 337 GLOSSARY Depending on your browser s settings you may accept or not accept the cookies and save them for various amounts of time
404. riority mail header value combinations Double click on an item in this list to remove it Remove Click this button to remove a selected entry from the Current Priority Mail Settings window Exceptions This allows you to define field value combinations that will cause a message to be considered an exception to the priority mail settings This gives you more flexible control over this feature PRIORITY MAIL 187 LOGGING Chapter Logging Configuring MDaemons Logging options lick the Setup Logging options menu selection to configure your Log File settings The log file is a useful tool for diagnosing problems and seeing what the server has been doing while unattended Logging Logging Options RES Logging Options Logging mode C Create a new set of log files each day C Create log files based on the day of the week Create standard set of log files MV Log each service into a separate log file Log file sizes Maximum log file size 0 KB 0 no size limitation MDConfig collects last 25 KB of log file data T Perform no more than one automatic backup per day Limit OLD file log roll overs to one per day active log could grow larger than max size Logging options Ta MV Log SMTP activity I Log sessions in real time aky M Log POP activity lV Log message parsing activities M Log IMAP activity IV Log content filter activity M Log RAS transcripts I Log multiline protocol responses Log detai
405. rs and exclusions This feature could significantly reduce the amount of bandwidth and throughput required to deliver your outbound messages Outbound Compression Enable compression of attachments for outbound messages Click this checkbox if you want to enable automatic message attachment compression for outbound remote mail messages Enabling this control will not cause all message attachments to be compressed it simply turns the feature on Whether an outbound message s files are compressed or not is determined by the remaining settings on this tab Compress outbound local domain attachments Enabling this control will cause the file compression settings to be applied to all outbound mail even those messages whose destination is another local address Compression Options 174 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Create self extracting zips Click this checkbox if you want the compression files that MDaemon creates to be self extracting zip files with an EXE file extension This is useful if you are concerned that the message recipients may not have access to a decompression utility Self extracting zip files can be decompressed simply by double clicking on them Compress only if compression is greater than XX MDaemon will not compress a message s attachments before sending it unless they can be compressed by a percentage greater than the value specified in this control For example if you desig
406. s Cancel Apply Primary Domain Properties Domain name Enter your primary domain name here This is the default domain name used when creating new accounts Typically the value entered here will be the registered Internet domain name that a DNS server resolves to the IP address of the local machine running the server or a qualified alias of that name Alternatively you may choose to use a fictitious domain name for your Primary Domain Name such as company mail in some situations When configuring your server in this way it may be necessary to use the Header Translation feature page 133 and or the Domain Name Replacement Engine page 157 to enable proper mail distribution HELO domain This Domain name will be used in the SMTP HELO EHLO instruction when sending mail In most cases this will be your Primary Domain Name Domain IP This is the Primary Domain s IP addtess 36 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Bind listening sockets to this IP only Selecting this switch causes MDaemon to bind its listening network sockets using the specific IP address found in the Domain IP text box Ordinarily this control will only need to be used in certain circumstances when hosting multiple domains For more information on this type of configuration see Hosting Multiple Domains page 62 ISP or Smart Host Properties ISP or smart host s IP or domain name Specify your ISP
407. s Remote Traffic Enable the control if you want Local mail to trigger an auto response Creating Auto Response Scripts Auto Response scripts define the messages that are returned as the result of an auto response event They are constructed the same as MBF files and can contain the same macros page 264 However several additional macros ate provided which allow you to develop more powerful auto response messages In addition to those template variables defined for MBF files auto response scripts can use any or all of the following macros which override the values parsed from the original message SetSender ex SSetSender s mailbox host org MDaemon will treat this address as if it had sent the original message SetRecipient ex 3SetRecipient mailbox host org Sets the address that will receive the auto response message regardless of the original sender SetReplyTo ex SSetReplyTo mailbox host org Controls the value of the RFC 822 ReplyTo header SetActualTo ex SetActualTo mailbox host org Changes who MDaemon thinks the actual recipient of the mail message should be AUTO RESPONDERS 261 CHAPTER 23 AUTO RESPONDERS AND MBF FILES SetSubject ex SSetSubject Subject Text Replaces the value of the message s subject SetMessageld ex SSetMessageld ID String Changes the ID string of the message SetPartBoundary ex sSetPartBoundary s Boundary String Changes what MDaemon thinks is the part
408. s by using specially formatted email messages This allows greater administrative flexibility and empowers users by turning day to day simple account maintenance tasks such as changing passwords over to them Support for WebAdmin This is a free web based remote administration application that can be obtained from www altn com It integrates perfectly with MDaemon and WorldClient and enables your users to review and edit their account settings via their web browser You can designate which settings that your users may edit and assign access permissions on a per account basis WebAdmin can also be used by the Administrator and whomever else you wish to allow to review or edit any of MDaemon s settings and any other files that you wish to make available to the WebAdmin system for reviewing Included with MDaemon is the MDConfig Remote Configuration Client This utility makes it possible for a Network Administrator or Supervisor to access and change any of MDaemon s settings from a remote location by easily installing it on a remote machine Moreover because its interface is virtually identical to MDaemon s you won t have to familiarize yourself with a new set of controls With File Catalogs the email administrator can create password protected groups of files which users can have encoded and automatically sent to them through the use of specially formatted email messages INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 MDAEMON V6 0 Account mailbox forma
409. s by using the menu option File Open Filename If the file that you wish to edit is not listed on the Open menu then click the Generic Document option When you have finished editing the file click File Save or Save As Here is a list of all the documents currently listed on the Open menu a Current version release notes Server usage policy statement HELP message 314 CHAPTER 28 New user welcome message Account information message Transient delivery failure message Permanent delivery failure message Delivery return receipt message No valid command found message No such user here message MX cache database IP cache database IP shield database No cache database Relay control database Address alias database Header translation database MIME type definition database IP screen database Priority mail database ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES THE RAW MESSAGE SPECIFICATION V3 1 315 CHAPTER 28 ADDITIONAL MDAEMON FEATURES The RAW Message Specification v3 1 MDaemon Server v6 has inherent support for a simple and powerful mail message format known as RAW mail This specification was developed in 1994 for a corporation that needed a custom MTA focusing on easy mail client development The purpose of the RAW system is to provide a simple and standard format which software systems such as MDaemon can use to create the much more complex RFC 822 compliant message Use of mail transport agents such as R
410. s empty DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 55 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Force process to terminate Sometimes the process you need to run may not terminate on its own This switch will cause MDaemon to force the session to terminate once the time specified in Saspend All Operations For XX Seconds has elapsed This switch does not work if the elapsed time interval is set to 1 Run process in a hidden window Click this checkbox if you want the process to run in a hidden window 56 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Directories Primary Domain Configuration 24x Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Directories RAW formatted mail is picked up from this directory c MDAEMONSRAWFILESS Browse Bad messages parsing errors unknown users etc are placed here C MDAEMON BADMSGS Browse While collecting inbound mail work files should be stored here C MDAEMON SMTPIN Browse RFC 822 compliant remote message queue non local mail only C MDAEMON REMOTEGS Browse RFC 822 compliant local message queue local mail only c SMDAEMONSLOCALOS Browse Mailing list digests are stored here while waiting to be queued C MDAEMON DIGESTSS Browse Mailing list digests are archived here C MDAEMON ARCHIVES Browse Log transcript files are stored here do n
411. s include sending the email message back to the sender sending it to the Postmaster putting it in the Bad Message queue and forwarding the message to another host These controls may be set to act individually or in any combination See Hosting Multiple Domains page 62 Domain Gateways page 289 See Also DomainPOP Mail Collection page 152 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR 35 CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Domain ISP Primary Domain Configuration HEI Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Primary domain properties mj Domain name mycompany com Email addresses with this domain name are considered local mail HELO domain mycompany com When sending mail use this domain in SMTP HELO EHLO instruction Domain IP fi 2 3 4 Tl Bind listening sockets to this IP only If you do not know this computer s IP address then enter the default value of 127 0 0 1 or just leave it blank ISP or smart host properties Wy ISP or smart host s IP or domain name EA The value specified here is typically the domain name of your ISP or their SMTP server or your LAN s outgoing mail gateway Send every outbound email message to this host C Send only undeliverable outbound mail to this host Attempt to send all mail direct without using an intermediate host My ISP requires me to login before sending mail Retry queue setting
412. s requirement IV Messages sent to local recipients are exempt from this requirement IV Messages sent from trusted IPs are exempt from this requirement POP Before SMTP Local sender must have accessed mailbox within last XX minutes With this feature enabled whenever someone claims to be a local user they must have logged in and checked their local mailbox within the specified number of minutes before they will be allowed to send mail Messages collected via ATRN are exempt from this requirement Click this control if you want messages collected via ATRN to be exempt from the POP Before SMTP requirement Messages sent to local recipients are exempt from this requirement Click this checkbox if you want messages that are sent from one local user to another to be exempt from the Local sender must have accessed mailbox requirement Ordinarily MDaemon will enforce the POP before SMTP requirement as soon as the sender is known but when this control is enabled MDaemon will wait until the recipient of the message is revealed before determining whether or not it is required Messages sent from trusted IPs are exempt from this requirement If this checkbox is enabled messages arriving from a domain listed in the Currently defined domain IP pairs area of this dialog will be exempt from the Local sender must have accessed mailbox requirement 118 SPAM BLOCKER CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Spam Blocker Spam Blocker
413. sage from postmaster Mend restricted attachment notification message to Administrator Send restricted attachment notification message to Sender Send restricted attachment notification message to Recipient Send virus notification message to Administrators Send virus notification message to Sender Y Y Send virus notification message to Recipient Send AY update notification to Administrators This template is used by the content filter Note lines beginning with are comments The following message contained restricted attachment s w SENDER To RECIPIENT SUBJECT Use this tab to designate those whom should receive notification messages when a virus or restricted attachment is detected Notification Messages Notification message from Use this control for specifying the address from which you want the notification message to come Send virus notification message to When a message arrives with a file attachment containing a virus a warning message will be sent to the individuals designated in this section A customized warning message can be sent to the sender recipient and the administrators that you have designated on the Admins Attachments tab To customize the message for any of the three entries select one of them from the list and then edit the message that appeats on the bottom half of this tab Each entry has its own message
414. sages For example PRETTY EXE ILOVE VBS KAK HTA FIX200 EXE MINE TRY EXE SUPP EXE ha A Do not process restricted attachments for messages bound for these addresses in the Exclusions exclusion list Remove Cancel Use this tab to specify attachments that you wish to classify as restricted and automatically remove from messages There is also a section that corresponds to the Notifications tab used for designating email addresses as administrators Administrators Addresses listed in this area are considered administrators and correspond to the Administrator controls located on the Notifications tab These addresses will receive notification messages when one of the Administrator options is selected on that tab To add an address to this section type it into the space provided and then click Add To remove an address select it from the list and then click Remove Restricted Attachments Filenames specified in this list will be stripped from messages automatically when MDaemon encounters them After the attachment is stripped MDaemon will continue normally and delivery the message without it You can use the controls on the Notifications tab to cause a notification message to be sent to various addresses when one of these restricted attachments is encountered 172 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Wildcards are permitted in list entries An entry of exe
415. sible to define your own MIME types The MIME standard is also used by web servers to identify the files they are sending to web browsers Because web browsers support various MIME types this enables the browser to display or output files that are not in HTML format Further by updating the browser s lists of MIME Types and the software used for handling each type new file formats can be readily supported MIME is addressed in RFCs 2045 2049 which can be viewed at ttp www rfc editor org rfc rfc2045 txt ttp www rfc editor org rfc rfc2046 txt www cfc editor org rfc rfc2047 txt ttp www rfc editor org rfc rfc2048 txt oe oe er re t c ue ttp www rfc editor org rfc rfc2049 txt Mirror A server usually an FTP server that has a copy of the same files that are on another server Its purpose is generally to provide an alternate location from which the mirrored files can be downloaded should the original server go down or be overloaded The term mirror can also refer to a configuration whereby information is written to more than one hard disk simultaneously This is used as a redundancy measure so that if one disk fails the computer can continue to operate without losing any vital data Modem An acronym derived from modulator demodulator A modem is a device connected to a computer that enables the transfer of data to other computers over telephone lines The modem converts the computer s dig
416. sionally Auto Response messages may be sent to an address that returns an Auto Response of its own This can create a ping pong effect causing messages to be continually passed back and forth between the two servers You can use this feature to prevent an MDaemon Auto Responder from sending responses to one or more of these addresses by entering them here Del Click this button to delete selected entries from the list of excluded addresses Add After entering an address in the New Excluded Address text box click this button to add it to the list of excluded address New excluded address If you wish to add an address to the list of excluded addresses enter it here and then click the Add button Run a Program Run this program This field specifies the full path and filename to a program that will be launched when new mail arrives at the specified mailbox Care must be taken to ensure that this process terminates properly and can run unattended Optional command line parameters can be entered immediately following the executable path if desired Pass message to process Select this option and the process specified in the Ran This Process field will be passed the name of the triggering message as the first available command line parameter Note that by the time the message name is passed to the specified process the account s MBF file will already have been applied This is useful in that applying an MBF can reformat the message into
417. sions using the IMAP protocol are logged on this tab CFG All MDConfig activity is displayed on the CFG tab DPOP This tab displays MDaemon s DomainPOP activity Routing Displays the routing information To From Message ID and so on for each message that is parsed by MDaemon POP When users collect email from MDaemon using the POP3 protocol that activity is logged here RAW RAW or system generated message activity is logged on this tab MPOP This tab displays MDaemon s MultiPOP mail collection activities CF AV MDaemon s Content Filter and AntiVirus operations are listed on this tab Start MDaemon In the system tray Choose this option if you want MDaemon s interface to be minimized at startup Ina maximized window Choose this option if you want MDaemon s interface to be maximized at startup In a default window Choose this option if you want MDaemon s interface to appear in a default window at startup Create Session In a minimized window If this option is selected MDaemon will create new mail session windows in a minimized state Ina hidden window If this options is selected MDaemon will create new mail session windows that are completely hidden from view In a default window If this option is selected MDaemon will create new mail session windows using the default settings provided by Windows which relate to size and visibility 196 NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS CHAPTER 18 M
418. sources by not checking those sending messages to users on your server SECURITY SETTINGS 115 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Domain name Enter the domain name that you wish to associate with a specific IP address range IP address Enter the IP address that you wish to associate with a domain name You must enter this address in dotted decimal form Add Click the Add button to add the domain and IP address range to the listing Remove Click this button to remove the selected entries from the listing 116 SECURITY SETTINGS CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS SMTP Authentication Security Settings x IP Shielding SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication IV Authenticated senders are valid regardless of the IP they are using Select this switch and MDaemon will ignore the IP restrictions setup by the IP Shield when a message comes from an authenticated source IV Authenticated users are exempt from the POP Before SMTP requirement Select this switch and MDaemon will exempt authenticated sessions from any POP Before SMTP restrictions T Authentication is always required when mail is from local accounts When this option is enabled any message claiming to come from a local account will need to authenticate before being recognized Global AUTH password Password In some cases it is useful to provide a global password for authentication SMTP Authentication Authenticated senders are valid regardless of the
419. ss Advanced options Ra Add sender to this mailing list M ylist mycompany com x Remove sender from this list Auto Response Event Enable an auto responder for this account Enable this control to activate an auto responder for the account For more information on auto responders see Auto Responders and MBF Files page 259 Use this auto response script This field specifies the full path and filename of the response file RSP that will be processed and dispatched to the message sender This file will first be passed through the filtering mechanism associated with MBF files Any template string available for use in an MBF file will also be available for use in an auto response file See Creating Auto Response Scripts page 261 Creating and Using MBF Files page 263 ACCOUNT EDITOR 237 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Do not send auto response if message is from one of these addresses Here you can list addresses that you wish to be excluded from responses initiated by this Auto Responder Note Occasionally Auto Response messages may be sent to an address that returns an Auto Response of its own This can create a ping pong effect causing messages to be continually passed back and forth between the two servers You can use this feature to prevent an MDaemon Auto Responder from sending responses to one or more of these addresses by entering them here Del Click this button to delete selected entries from
420. ss entered into this field regardless of screening and shielding settings RAW server converts this many messages per interval Use this control if you wish to limit the number of RAW messages that may be converted during any given mail processing interval If the limit is reached then MDaemon will wait until the next processing interval before converting further messages Allow this many RCPT commands per message RFC says 100 Use this control if you wish to limit the number of RCPT commands that can be sent per message Kernel socket send buffer size in bytes 0 system default If you wish to designate a non system default socket send buffer size then you can use this control to do so Specify the new size in bytes in the space provided Data Transfer Limits Max acceptable SMTP message size Setting a value here will prevent MDaemon from accepting or processing SMTP delivered mail that exceeds a certain fixed size When this feature is acttve MDaemon will attempt to use the ESMTP SIZE command specified in RFC 1870 If the sending agent supports this SMTP extension then MDaemon will determine the message size prior to its actual delivery and will refuse the message instantly If the sending agent does not support this SMTP extension then MDaemon will have to begin acceptance of the message track its size periodically during transfer and finally refuse to deliver the message once the transaction has completed Kill connection if dat
421. ss you ate certain that you must do so Being able to configure the ports that MDaemon uses will allow you to configure the server to operate with proxy systems or other software setvices that require certain port numbers An IP address a machine has only one of each available port If another program attempts to gain access to a port that is already in use by another piece of software an error message will inform the user that the requested address IP PORT is already in use 42 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION DNS Primary Domain Configuration Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival DNS server settings 6 IV Tiy to use DNS servers defined in Windows TCP IP settings Primary DNS server IP fi alt Backup DNS server IP 2 2 2 2 Retry failed lookup attempts this many times 3 If a backup DNS IP is specified both will be attempted once per retry MX record processing V Query DNS servers for MX records when delivering mail V Use A record IP addresses found within MX record packets Note record IPs are not cached when taken from Mx record packets IV Send message to next MX host when an SMTP error occurs T Immediately return mail when DNS says domain does not exist Local lookup tables A HOSTS file C AWINNT system32 drivers etc hosts Edit MXCACHE Edit HOSTS
422. ssages spooled per session Enter 0 into this control and each session will continue until there are no more messages left in the outbound queues Maximum concurrent SMTP inbound sessions 100 Threshold before Server Too Busy message is sent to clients POP IMAP IMAP options available in PRO version only Maximum concurrent POP outbound sessions al This is the maximum number of simultaneous MultiPOP sessions MDaemon will use to collect this sort of mail Maximum concurrent POP inbound sessions 100 Maximum concurrent IMAP sessions 100 Threshold before Server Too Busy message is sent to clients Cancel Apply SMTP Maximum concurrent SMTP outbound sessions The value entered here represents the maximum possible outbound SMTP sessions that will be created when it is time to send outbound mail Each session will send outbound messages until either the queue is empty or the Max SMTP outbound messages spooled per session setting has been reached For example if the outbound mail queue has twenty messages waiting when it is time to send mail and the value of this setting is five then five sessions will be simultaneously created and each will consecutively deliver four messages You should experiment with the number of sessions that yield the best performance for your bandwidth It is possible to specify so many sessions that your bandwidth will be overloaded or your Windows machine will run out of resources and
423. sses Then do this with the message This control lists the available actions that can be performed if the result of the rule is true Here is a list of actions and what they do Don t deliver to this address Selecting this rule will prevent the message from being delivered to the specified address Send to user or group of users Selecting this action will bring up a dialog that will allow you to create a list of email addresses that should receive a copy of the message being processed 160 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CHAPTER 13 Foreign Mail DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION DomainPOP Mail Collection HEI Account Parsing Name Matching Processing Routing Rules Foreign Mail Security What to do with non local mail Forward summary of non local addresses to postmaster 4 summary of all non local addresses parsed using the currently configured parsing rules will be sent to the Postmaster Deliver non local mail to all remote recipients Go ahead and deliver a copy of the message to each non local address Unless Do not deliver mail addressed to non local addresses Any addresses parsed from downloaded mail that are not local should simply be ignored Unless FEF NOTE This option is completely safe Should MDaemon pickup a message and discover that it can t be delivered to anyone locally then the postmaster will always be informed OK Cancel Apply What to do with non local mail Forward
424. ssible configuration problems Additionally this report is displayed in a text editable format that makes it possible to Copy Paste the information it contains using the right click shortcut menu or add notations or other information to the file before saving it AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 303 CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Queue Page amp MDaemon Queue Stats Manager OF x i Queue Page User Page Log Page Report Page gt C MDAEMONSLOCALOS 4 messages 75542 bytes Filename From To Deliver To Subject Sie Date TA MD5000 Rip mycomp FThomas m MyHome m Gotta git dem cans 18907 2001 03 amp MD5000 HMudd myc FThomas m MyHome m I ve got something to sell 18918 2001 03 i MD5000 Jlovell forest Bubba putm Bubba put You put me in a bind 18931 2001 03 amp MD7500 MDaemon a tuser acom tuser acom Welcome to the email sy 18786 2001 03 Remote ca a Admin mycompany com Copy ws i FT homas company com HMudd mycompany com x Rely Queue MD aemon MyCompany com Maye LAN Queue MEIlis mike mail RAW Queue Bad Queue Delete halite Gateways E Queue Page list box When a queue or user is chosen from the Message Queues area or the user list box beside it a list of all message files contained within the selected queue will be displayed in the main list box on this page This list contains each message s file na
425. ssing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Domain ISP Ports l DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival SMTP ODMR server ports lt p Listen for inbound SMTP events on this TCP port Create outbound SMTP events using this TCP port Listen for inbound ODMA events on this TCP port 3 POP IMAP server ports IMAP available in PRO version only Listen for inbound POP events on this TCP port D m b pr o Create outbound POP events using this TCP port Listen for inbound IMAP events on this TCP port DNS LDAP server ports Query DNS servers using this UDP port ala ald LDAP port for database amp address book posting 38 Remote configuration server ports Listen for MDConfig connections on this TCP port 3002 Listen for WebConfig connections on this TCP port 3001 Return port settings to defaults Bind to new port values now coos ao SMTP ODMR Server Ports Listen for inbound SMTP events on this TCP port MDaemon will monitor this port for incoming connections from SMTP clients Create outbound SMTP events using this TCP port This port will be used when mail is sent to other SMTP servers Listen for inbound ODMR events using this TCP port MDaemon will monitor this port for incoming On Demand Mail Relay ODMR connections such as ATRN from Domain Gateways POP IMAP Server Ports IMAP Available in MDaemon Pro only Listen for inbound POP events on this TCP port MDaemon will monitor
426. sssssees Automatic domain gateways 300 Account Templates sssnsn2222 Automatically compressing decompressing Accounts 152 221 249 251 253 254 attachments scscesseeeseeenseeeeeeeeeeeeenes 174 POP mail accounts cssceseeeeeeeeeeeneeees AV 165 Additional Information Address AliaSeS ssssssnsnnn2 B Address bOOK sssssnssnu1s 2 Backing up files edited by MDConfig 69 Address Suppression ss Bad Messages s s s 38 Aliases 354 Beta Testing 1 cscsesseeceeenseeeeeeeeeeeeeenenee 334 Bind DN ccsscccesseeeeesseeeenseeeeeseeeeeneseensnsenens 95 C CaChe sssssnosiuosennnsononnonunosnesusunuunonnunonuonuunnnss 135 Caching IP addreSS eS ss 135 Catalog CONntrOl ssssssss1s22 5 5 319 Catalog EditOr ssssss12222 5 5 286 CatalogS ssssssss1111 1 1 286 Closing the RAS session 143 Collecting stored SMTP mail Compressing attachments 1 1 174 Configuring Domain GatewayS sssss s 288 IP Screen IP Shield ssnsnnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn MDaemon remotely nssss 1s11 5 67 Primary Domain Settings s s s 34 Connection ssssssss21212 5 146 Connection atteMptS 143 Connection Profile ssssss22222
427. st and place it into the catalog you specify For complete information on how to work with catalogs see Creating A New Catalog page 286 284 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Public Folder Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Public folder MDaemon PRO only IV Copy list messages to a public folder Click here and MDaemon will place a copy of each list message into the selected public IMAP folder you must enable Public IMAP Folder support Select a public folder Family subfolder Support Cancel New to this version of MDaemon is support for Public IMAP Folders Public folders are extra folders that are available to multiple IMAP users unlike personal IMAP folders which are typically only accessible by a single user The controls on this tab are used to cause all messages destined for this Mailing List to be automatically copied to one of your public folders For more information on Public Folders see page 102 Public Folder Copy list messages to a public folder Enable this control if you want this list s messages to be copied to one of your Public Folders in addition to being delivered to the list as usual Select a public folder Click the Public Folder that you wish to associate with this list s messages New Click the New button if you wish to create a new Public Fo
428. st mycompany com Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Notification options Send a message to FT homas example org Frank Thomas v IV When a user subscribes to this mailing list IV When a user unsubscribes from this mailing list I When a message arrives which exceeds the max size limit IV Notify non members of message rejection private lists only When non members of a private list send mail to the list MDaemon will inform them that the list is private This switch has no effect if the mailing list is not flagged for private use on the Options tab IV Notify subscribers unsubscribers on the status of their requests Returned mail Send all mail returned to the list to fist retums mycompany c x This is the address used in the return path when this list s mail is delivered Therefore any delivery notification messages sent back by other mail servers will go to this address Cancel Notification Options Send a message to This control lists an address that will be notified when the selected events take place When a user subscribes to this mailing list If selected a note will be sent to the address specified in the associated control each time someone subscribes to the mailing list When a user unsubscribes to this mailing list If selected a note will be sent to the address specified in the associated control each time
429. summary of non local addresses to postmaster If this option is selected MDaemon will send a single copy of the message to the postmaster along with a summary of the non local addresses that the parsing engine extracted using the current set of headers and parsing rules Deliver non local mail to all remote recipients If this option is selected MDaemon will deliver a copy of the message to any non local recipient that it finds within the inspected headers Do not deliver mail addressed to non local addresses If this option is selected MDaemon will remove from the recipient list any address that is non local It will be as if MDaemon never parsed remote addresses from the original downloaded message Note The various Unkss buttons allow you to define addresses which are exceptions to the rules DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 161 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Security DomainPOP Mail Collection C mdaemon mailsave Safety Options Place an extra copy of all downloaded mail into this directory This is a safety feature to ensure that you don t lose any mail due to unforeseen parsing or other errors that might occur when downloading mail in bulk quantities 162 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Name Matching DomainPOP Mail Collection HEI Routing Rules Foreign Mail Security Account Parsing Name Matching Processing Real name matching engine IV Activate real name match
430. t s members i e the addresses included in the list Alt N Technologies MDaemon server is equipped with an extensive suite of mailing list features that enable lists to be public or private anyone can post or join or only members can post or join moderated each message must be approved by someone before it will go to the list sent in digest format or as individual messages and used in a variety of other ways 346 GLOSSARY Megabyte Though technically 1 048 576 bytes or 1024 kilobytes a megabyte is more commonly rounded off and used to refer to a million bytes Megabyte is abbreviated MB as in 20 MB MIME Defined in 1992 by the Internet Engineering Task Force ETF Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME is the standard encoding method used for attaching non text files to standard Internet email messages Because typically only plain text files can be transferred via email non text files must first be encoding into a plain text format and then decoded after reaching their destination Thus an email program is said to be MIME Compliant if it can both send and receive files using the MIME standard When a MIME encoded message attachment is sent generally both the type of file being sent and the method that should be used to turn it back into its original form are specified as part of the message There ate many predefined MIME content types such as image jpeg and text plain However it is also pos
431. t In contrast to circuit switching such as in an analog telephone which sends the data in a continuous stream over a single path or circuit packet switching transmits the data broken up into packets which may not necessarily take the same route to get to their destination Further because the data is in separate units multiple users can send different files simultaneously over the same path Parameter A parameter is a characteristic or value In computing it is any value passed to a program by a user or another program Your name and password a preference setting font size and so on are all 349 GLOSSARY parameters In programming a parameter is a value that is passed to a subroutine or function for processing PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a highly compressed multi platform file format developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated that captures document formatting text and images from a variety of applications This makes it possible for the document to appear the same and print accurately on multiple computers and platforms unlike many word processors Viewing a PDF file requires the Adobe Acrobat Reader a free application distributed by Adobe Systems There is also a plug in for viewing PDF files with yout web browser This makes it possible to view PDF files posted on a web site directly instead of having to download them first and then view them with a separate program Parse In linguistics to parse is to divi
432. t is submitted to the server or when you want your pages to respond to user interaction with links or form elements It can also be used to control plug ins and applets based on user choices and to accomplish a large number of other functions JavaScript is included within the text of HTML documents and is interpreted by web browsers in order to perform the functions JPEG A graphics file format that is very efficient at compressing high color and photographic images much mote so than the GIF format While GIF is the best choice for images containing regular shapes and large areas of repeating color patterns JPEG is much more suited to images with irregular patterns and large numbers of colors JPEG is the most commonly used format for high color and photographic images on the Internet The acronym JPEG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group the group that developed the format Kbps Commonly used when referring to modem speeds e g 56 Kbps this acronym stands for Kilobits Per Second It is the number of kilobits 1000 bits of data being moved or processed every second Note that this is kilodis not kiloby es a kilobyte would be eight times more data than a kilobit Kilobyte A kilobyte K or KB is a thousand bytes of computer data Technically it is 1024 bytes 2 10 1024 but in normal usage it is usually rounded off to 1000 for simplicity LAN A Local Area Network LAN is a computer network limited to a singl
433. t which enables them to send email anywhere in the world Most email systems include some form of email client also referred to as a mail client or just dient which contains a text editor and other tools for composing messages and one or mote servers which receive the email from the clients and route it to its appropriate destination Typically a message is composed using the client passed to a server for delivery to the email address or addresses specified in the message and then routed by the server to another server that is responsible for storing messages destined for that address If the message s destination is a local address for which the original server is responsible then it may be stored on the original server rather than routed to another Last the recipient of the message will connect to their server and retrieve the message by using their email client This entire process of transferring an email message from your client to its destination server usually only takes a few seconds or minutes 339 GLOSSARY Besides containing simple text email messages may also include file attachments These attachments can be any type of file that you desire pictures text files program files other email messages and so on However since most email systems only support sending text files attachments must first be encoded converted to a text format before they can be sent and then decoded when they arrive at their final destination
434. t Manager page 214 New Account Defaults page 216 Creation an MDaemon User Account page 215 221 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Account Editor Account Account Editor Frank Thomas AES Web AutoResp IMAPMailRules MuliPOP SharedFolders Account Mailbox Forwarding Options Quotas Restrictions Personal information Full name Frank Thomas ex Frank Thomas This account was created on Mon 4ug 13 19 33 57 2001 This account was last accessed on lt unknown gt POP IMAP account information lt 9 Mailbox name Frank mycompany com z This value also doubles as the POP IMAP logon name I Allow this account to be accessed with POP IMAP mail clients Account password i The account is NOT currently using Dynamic NT Authentication The Mailbox name and Password values are used for authentication Notes comments on this account Watch this account closely Aliases Click here to edit any aliases configured for this account Aliases Personal Information Full name Enter the user s first and last name here When setting up a new mail account the templates are reapplied each time the value in this field is changed Real names cannot contain or POP IMAP Account Information Mailbox name This field specifies a unique name for the mailbox and is also used as the account s POP IMAP logon In addition the Mailbox must be unique and cannot contain spaces After entering
435. t Protocol e g as in TCP IP Internet protocols make it possible for data to be transferred between systems over the Internet Regardless of each machine s platform or operating system if the same Internet Protocol is used by each machine then they will be able to transfer data to 343 GLOSSARY each other The term IP is also commonly used as a further abbreviation of the term IP Address The current standard Internet Protocol is IP version 4 IPv4 Internet Protocol is addressed in RFC 791 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc791 txt IP Address Occasionally called an IP Number IP Address stands for Internet Protocol Address and is used to identify a particular TCP IP network and the hosts or machines on that network It is a 32 bit numeric address containing four numbers between 0 and 255 separated by dots e g 127 0 0 1 Within an isolated network each computer must have a unique IP address which can be assigned at random But every computer on the Internet must have a registered IP address to avoid duplication Each Internet IP address can be either static or dynamic Static addresses do not change and always represent the same location or machine on the Internet Dynamic IP addresses change and are usually assigned by an ISP to computers that are only on the Internet temporarily such as when a user with a dial up account accesses the Internet However it is still possible for a di
436. t is minimized or running in the tray When this control is cleared log data isn t copied to the router window when MDaemon is running in the system tray Consequently the most recent activity won t be listed on any of the router window s tabs when MDaemon is first opened The router will begin displaying newly logged information from that point forward Log detailed mail sessions A complete transcript of each mail transaction session will be copied to the log file when this option is active Log summarized mail sessions The option causes a summarized transcript of each mail transaction session to be copied to the log file Log sessions in real time Ordinarily session information is logged after the session is completed in order to conserve resources Click this option if you want session information to be logged as in occurs Log message parsing activities MDaemon periodically performs a great deal of message parsing activity when determining to whom a message should be delivered Enable this switch if you want this information to be included in the log file Log content filter activity Click this checkbox if you want to include Content Filter and MDaemon AntiVirus activity in the log file Include RAS transcripts Click this switch if you want MDaemon to copy RAS dialup dialdown activities into the log file This information is useful for diagnosing dialup problems Log multi line protocol responses Sometimes the resp
437. t is configured to ignore the LIST command as long as the list password is correct Parentheses around the list password ARE required Ex LIST MDSUPP THERIGHTPASSWORD listname address real name pass The originator is added to the membership of the specified list provided that list exists and allows remote subscriptions If an optional address is specified after the list name then that address is added to the list s membership rather than the address found in the FROM field of the subscription message A real name can be added for the subscriber by including it in braces e g Frank Thomas If the list s password follows this command parentheses around it are required then the command will be honored even if this list s subscribe function is switched off Ex SUBSCRIBE mdsupp Ex SUBSCRIBE mdsupp me mydomain com Frank Thomas Ex SUBSCRIBE mdsupp you yourdom com MDPASS listname address pass The originator is removed from the membership of the specified list provided that list exists and contains the originator as a current member If an optional address is specified after the list s name then that address is removed from the list s membership rather than the address found in the FROM field of the unsubscribe message If the list s password follows this command parentheses around it are required then the command will be honored even if this list s unsubscribe function is switched off Ex UNSUBSCRI
438. tem Mail will be processed and delivered each time an incoming SMTP session has completed This has the effect of instantaneous delivery of local messages Deliver remote mail immediately upon reception When this option is selected remote mail will be processed and delivered immediately each time an SMTP session has completed This has the effect of instantaneous delivery of remote messages Simple Scheduling There are numerous ways a remote mail session can be triggered in MDaemon Several of them will be discussed in this section of the manual The Simple Scheduling feature is handy when you wish to setup a remote mail processing interval that should occur at a regular time interval after the last one regardless of the trigger that initiates the session Unlike the rigidly fixed intervals used when setting up specific times or using the slide bar this feature s time interval will reset whenever mail is processed regardless of what caused the mail session to be initiated Note In order for Simple Scheduling to take effect for a given day at least one timed entry must exist for that day in the Scheduled Times list For example suppose you wanted to schedule 45 minutes between dialup sessions but only on Monday through Friday You would need to enable the Simple Scheduling option and enter 45 minutes into the control and then enter at least one scheduled time for each day Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday and Friday Since there would
439. the EMAIL macro as the value of the attribute in this control i e mai l SEMAILS will cause it to be replaced by the user s email address when their LDAP entry is created The user s DN will be comprised of the RDN plus the Base entry DN below Bind DN Enter the DN of the entry to which you have granted administrative access to your LDAP server so that MDaemon can add and modify your MDaemon user entries This is the DN used for authentication in the bind operation Bind Password This password will be passed to your LDAP server along with the Bind DN value for authentication Port Specify the port that your LDAP server is monitoring MDaemon will use this port when posting account information to it Base entry DN database Enter the base entry root DN that will be used in all of your MDaemon user entries when you are using the LDAP server as your user database rather than the USERLIST DAT file The Base entry DN is combined with the RDN see RDN filter above to make up each uset s distinguished name DN Base entry DN address book When mirroring account information to an LDAP database address book enter the base entry root DN that will be used in all of your MDaemon user address book entries The Base entry DN is combined with the RDN see RDN filter above to make up each uset s distinguished name DN Object class database Specify the object class to which each MDaemon user s user databas
440. the MDaemon will crack list mail option is chosen on the Routing tab of the mailing list editor enabling this control will cause the content filter rules to be applied to list messages before they are cracked and distributed to list members POP IMAP WorldClient passwords are case sensitive POP IMAP and WorldClient passwords will be case sensitive when this control is checked Deleting users via MDConfig also removes their mail directory Click this checkbox if you want users mail directories to be deleted when their account is deleted via MD Config Otherwise their account will be deleted but their messages and directories will remain List pruner deletes messages that don t contain parsable addresses When you have configured MDaemon to scan messages that are returned to a Mailing List in an attempt to delete list members that cannot be reached this control will cause those messages to be deleted that do not contain a parsable address For more information see the Automatically remove dead addresses from list membership control on the Members tab of the Mailing List editor page 271 List pruner saves messages which result in list member removal When MDaemon scans returned list messages in an attempt to remove member addresses that cannot be reached this control will cause messages that result in a list member s removal to be saved Honor lt List gt subscribe and lt List gt unsubscribe addresses Click this c
441. the Message Router This feature provides a limited yet useful secondary level of support for hosting multiple domains When a message arrives for a domain for which MDaemon is acting as a gateway it is separated from the main mail stream and delivered to the directory specified for it in the Gateway Editor Additionally attachments can be automatically extracted and placed in the specified attachment directory Further all mail is re formatted according to its specified MBF file You can host as many domains as you like using this method T he Gateway Editor is reached by clicking the Gateways New Gateway or Gateways Edit An example will prove useful here Suppose you want to partially host a domain for another department You want to collect its mail and deposit it in a directory but do not want to maintain its accounts on your server Let s use company com as its name The first thing you will do is enter company com in the Domain Name field on the Domain Settings tab of the Editor Then you will select and enter the disk directory where incoming mail messages and file attachments should be stored You don t have to use the auto extraction of attachments feature unless it is needed Finally either select an existing MBF file or install a new one The default RFC 822 MBF file will ensure that all mail stored for company com will be in RFC 822 format Once all the settings have been entered click Apps or Ok
442. the TO field This presents an immediate problem if the TO field contains the name of the mailing list then the potential exists for MDaemon to download this message parse the TO field which will yield the name of the mailing list and then dispatch the message right back to the same list This would in turn deliver another copy of the same message back to the POP mailbox from which MDaemon downloaded the original message thus starting the whole cycle over again To cope with such problems mail administrators must take care to use the tools and settings that MDaemon provides to either delete mailing list mail or perhaps alias it in such a way that it will be delivered to the proper local recipient s You could also utilize the Routing Rules or Content Filters to deliver the message to the correct recipient s Additional concerns when employing this sort of mail collection scheme revolve around the issue of unwanted message duplication It is very easy for mail that is delivered to the ISP s POP mailbox using SMTP to generate unwanted duplicates once it has been collected using DomainPOP For example suppose a message is sent to someone at your domain and a carbon copy is sent to another person at the same domain In this situation SMTP will deliver two copies of the same message to your ISP s mailbox one for each recipient Each of the two message files will contain references to both recipients one in the TO field and the other in the
443. the ability to be distributed across many servers LDAP may eventually make it possible for virtually any application on any platform to access directory information for locating email addresses organizations files and so on worldwide LDAP is addressed in RFC 2251 which can be viewed at http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2251 txt Link See Hyperlink above List server A server application that is used to distribute email messages to multiple recipients by simply addressing the message to a single address Simply put when an email message is addressed to a mailing list maintained by the list server it will be automatically broadcast to the members of the list Mailing lists typically have a single normal email address for example listname example com but that address refers to a whole list of recipients rather than to a specific person or mailbox When someone subscribes to a mailing list the list server will automatically add the address to the list and distribute future emails directed to the list to that address or member and all other members When someone unsubscribes the list server simply removes the address so that it will receive no further list messages Frequently the term listserv is used generically to refer to any mailing list server However Listserv is a registered trademark of L Soft international Inc and is a specific program developed by Eric Thomas for BITNET in 1986 Besides other list servers Alt N Technologies
444. the mail client supplied USER and PASS values using the NT database in real time Authenticate on this NT 2000 domain Enter the name of the Windows NT domain that MDaemon will use when authenticating connections dynamically This is not the machine name of the domain controller It is the actual name of the NT Domain Note When accounts are configured for dynamic authentication on an NT machine the name of the NT domain preceded by two backslash characters is used in the account s PASSWORD field and is stored unencrypted within the USERLIST DAT file For example if an account WINDOWS NT SECURITY ACCOUNT INTEGRATION 253 CHAPTER 21 IMPORTING ACCOUNTS is configured for dynamic authentication on an NT domain called ALTN the account s password field will contain the value ALTN The two backslash characters preceding the domain name trigger MDaemon that the password field actually contains the name of an NT domain and that MDaemon should attempt to authenticate the USER and PASS values provided by the mail client using that domain s account database It is an error for a password to start with two backslash characters unless it is configured for dynamic authentication as described above In other words you can t just have regular passwords that start with two backslashes Passwords beginning with two backslashes are always assumed to be providing an NT domain name and not a password It is perfectly acceptable to enter two backslashes
445. the name of the mailbox click the drop down list box and choose the domain to which this account s mailbox will apply MDaemon s Primary Domain will appear in this control by default Mailbox names cannot contain or ad iat 222 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Allow this account to be accessed with POP AIMAP mail clients This switch governs whether or not POP and IMAP access to the mailbox is allowed Account password Enter an account password in this field Below this field you will see a short statement that will tell you whether or not Dynamic NT Authentication is being used for this account see page 251 Note You should always provide Account Password information even if you do not wish to allow POP IMAP access to the mail account If you wish to disallow access then use the A ow This Account To Be Accessed switch rather than leaving the Account Password field blank In addition to POP session verification user and password values are used to allow remote account manipulation and remote file retrieval Notes Comments on this Account Use this text area for detailing any notes or comments regarding the account Aliases Aliases Click this button to open the Alias Editor which will have the current account displayed and any aliases assigned to the account listed You can use this dialog to edit previously configured aliases or create new ones ACCOUNT EDITOR 223 CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Mailbox
446. the same sequence within a custom string will result in instant server failure When creating custom POP strings pay close attention to the following 1 All POP default strings start with either OK or ERR see chart below Any replacement for these strings must also start with OK or ERR Failure to properly use OK or ERR text at the start of a custom string will result in server failure Some strings contain macros such as 8 or d These macros are dynamically filled in with data when the string is loaded and used Custom strings are not required to use these macros However a custom string may duplicate these macros provided they are placed in the same sequence as they appear in the default string Failure to place macros in the same sequence within a custom string will result in instant server failure Here is a list of the unique numbers and default string values used by MDaemon Only the following strings can be changed Attempting to change a string that is not listed here will result in server failure SMTP STRING CODES 7000 Ss ESMTP service ready d 7002 s Hello s pleased to meet you 7004 lt Ss gt Sender ok 7062 lt s gt Sender ok alias for s 7006 lt s gt Recipient ok 7008 lt s gt Recipient ok alias for s 327 APPENDIX D 7010 Enter mail end with lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt 7011 See ya in
447. ther host to which copies of mail for this domain should be sent IV Forward mail to this address notmycompanyforward someisp ne Enter the address to which copies of mail for this domain will be sent Use this address in SMTP envelope Postmaster notmycompany com This address should be used as the MAIL FROM parameter during the SMTP transactions with the remote host receiving the forwarded mail Forward mail using this TCP port 25 default 25 IV Retain a local copy of all forwarded messages Select this option if you wish MDaemon to retain local copies of forwarded message files Cancel Apply Forwarding Properties Forward mail to this host Sometimes it is advantageous to simply forward a copy of all messages for a domain as they arrive If you wish to configure MDaemon to do this then enter the name or IP address of the SMTP server to which copies of incoming mail for this domain should be sent Forward mail to this address Use this feature if you wish to forward to a specific email address all email messages destined for this client domain Use this address in SMTP envelope MDaemon will use this address in the SMTP Mail From transaction Forward mail using this TCP port MDaemon will forward this mail using this TCP port Retain a local copy of all forwarded messages Select this option if you wish MDaemon to retain a copy of a message locally once it has been forwarded 296 GATEWAY EDITOR CHAPTER 26
448. these messages to the list itself Enabling this control will prevent these messages from being posted to the list Move account mail to new directories when domain names change Tf this checkbox is enabled when you rename a domain that domain s existing account mail will be moved to directories with the new name Otherwise MDaemon will continue to use the old mail directory names MDaemon system account email address address This is the email address from which system generated messages will come Subscription confirmations Could not deliver messages various notification messages and so on are all system messages Default attachment extension NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 203 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS System generated messages will be created using this extension This will also be the extension assigned to attachments included with system generated messages For example if MDaemon generates a warning message to the postmaster about a specific message it will attach that message with an extension of md Default logon delimiter character string of 10 characters max When using an email address as the account logon parameter this character or string of characters can be used as an alternative to This may be necessary for some users that have email clients which do not support in the logon field For example if you used in this field then users could login using user domain com or
449. this control is enabled MDaemon will not refuse messages that receive a blacklisted result However those messages will have an X RBL Warning header inserted You can then use the Content Filter feature to search for messages with this header and do with them as you please Check Received headers within SMTP collected messages Click this switch if you want Spam Blocker to check the IP address stamped in the Received headers of messages received via SMTP Check only this many Received headers 0 all Specify the number of Received headers that you want Spam Blocker to check starting with the most recent A value of 0 means that all Received headers will be checked 120 SPAM BLOCKER CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Check Received headers within DomainPOP collected messages When this switch is enabled Spam Blocker will check the IP address stamped in the Received headers of downloaded messages Check only this many Received headers 0 all Specify the number of Received headers that you want Spam Blocker to check starting with the most recent A value of 0 means that all Received headers will be checked Skip Received headers within messages from exempted IPs When this option is enabled Spam Blocker will not check the Received headers within messages coming from IP addresses that you have designated as exceptions Click the Exceptions button below t
450. this control to specify the number days that you wish to allow IMAP messages that are flagged for deletion to remain in your users folders Messages flagged for deletion longer than this number of days will be purged from their mailboxes A value of 0 means that messages flagged for deletion will never be purged due to their age Delete old messages from IMAP folders as well Click this checkbox if you want the Delete messages older than control to apply to messages in IMAP folders as well When this control is disabled messages contained in IMAP folders will not be deleted regardless of their age 54 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION Pre processing Primary Domain Configuration HEI Domain ISP Ports DNS Timers Sessions Dequeue Archival Pruning Pre processing Directories POP Check Unknown Mail Local queue pre processing Just before processing the local mail queue run this program c Utils M ailProg exe Browse While this process is executing the server should suspend all operations for 1 seconds IM Don t execute when queue is empty T Force process to terminate J Bun process in a hidden window Remote queue pre processing Just before processing the remote mail queue run this program PO Browse While this process is executing the server should suspend all operations for 1 seconds T Don t execute when queue is empty J Force
451. tion was successful You can also examine the detailed portion of the log regarding any of the entries on the list by double clicking the desired entry This will display the portion of the log where that transaction was made Using the right click shortcut menu you can copy paste this detailed log portion to a text editor for saving or editing should you desire to do so The list box can be navigated by using the vertical and horizontal scroll bars or you can click anywhere within the list box and use the ARROW keys for navigation You can resize the list box s columns by positioning the pointer over the line between any of the column headings until it changes shape and then dragging the column to the desired width AUTOMATIC GATEWAY CREATION 309 CHAPTER 27 QUEUE AND STATISTICS MANAGER Note The Log Page will display log files that have been compiled using either the Log Detailed Mail Sessions or the Log Summarized Mail Sessions option located in MDaemon s Setup Log File menu selection However we highly recommend that you use the Log Detailed Mail Sessions option instead of the Summarized option When using the Log Summarized Mail Sessions format you will find that there is very little information that will be displayed in your Log Report Because the Log Page itself condenses the detailed log into a summaty view of MDaemon s activity while still providing the ability to look at the detailed view of every transaction when necessary
452. tlook fail to create a FROM header when you compose a message The FROM field information is instead placed in the SENDER field This can confuse downstream mail servers as well as the recipient of your message Select this switch and MDaemon will create the missing FROM field using the address found in the SENDER field Fix Netscape Messenger and Pegasus Mail bugs This switch adds support for correcting three bugs present in various versions of Netscape Messenger and Pegasus Mail Without this switch set messages collected with those clients have the potential to be mishandled by them When the option is checked r n n r and r r n will be stripped from the end of messages NETWORK RESOURCE ACCESS 201 CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS Strip NULLs EOF chars and allow LF LF to mark end of message Allow Nulls EOF characters and LF LF for end of message mark in addition to the normal CRLF CRLF sequence Use safe UIDL hash method When you have configured MDaemon to leave messages on the host server after it has downloaded them a UIDL hash method is used to identify those already retrieved messages Previously MDaemon s UIDL hash method was not compatible with Windows treatment of Daylight Savings Time All stored messages would appear to be new and thus downloaded again a single time Enable this feature if you want to switch to the new safe UIDL hash method that is unaffected by Daylight Savings Time Note Switching to
453. tn com as a DomainPOP host will connect to that host using the default outbound POP port while using mail altn com 523 will connect to that host on port 523 Logon name Enter your logon of the POP account used by DomainPOP 152 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Password or APOP shared secret Enter the POP account s password or APOP shared secret here Use APOP Click this box if you wish to use the APOP command and CRAM MD5 authentication when retrieving yout mail This makes it possible to authenticate yourself without having to send clear text passwords Mail Download Control Leave a copy of message on host server If selected MDaemon will not remove collected messages from your DomainPOP mail host Delete messages once xx or more have accumulated 0 no limit If you are leaving messages on your ISP server then they will be deleted once this number is reached Enter 0 if you want messages to remain on the server regardless of the number Note Some ISP s may limit the amount that you ate allowed to store in your mailbox Don t download messages larger than xx KB 0 no limit Messages greater than or equal to this size will not be downloaded from your DomainPOP mail host Enter 0 if you want MDaemon to download messages no matter the size Delete large messages from DomainPOP and MultiPOP hosts Click this switch and MDaemon will delete messages that exceed
454. tn com The content MAILING LIST EDITOR 281 CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS of the subject and message body is irrelevant Also when this feature is acttve MDaemon will insert the following header into all list messages List Unsubscribe lt mailto lt List gt Unsubscribe domain com gt Some mail clients can pick up on this and make an UNSUBSCRIBE button available to users automatically This new feature is located on the Misc tab of Miscellaneous Options page 210 Note Occasionally users will attempt to subscribe unsubscribe to lists via email by sending the commands to the list itself rather than to the MDaemon system account This results in the command being posted to the list rather than the user being subscribed or unsubscribed To prevent these sorts of messages from being posted to mailing lists enable the Pre process mailing list mail control on the System tab of Miscellaneous Options page 203 This will cause messages containing subscribe unsubscribe and signoff commands in the first line of the message body to be rejected when those commands contain the list name and are sent to the list s address rather than the system account 282 MAILING LIST EDITOR CHAPTER 24 MAILING LISTS Digest Mailing List Editor MyList mycompany com Options Members Routing Subscriptions Support Files Notifications Security Digest Public Folder Digest settings MV Enable digest support for this mai
455. to see if perhaps another program has initiated the selected RAS profile If so MDaemon will use the existing connection while it is available You can control the time interval between uses of an existing connection by entering a value in minutes into this control Use existing connection every 10 minutes Hangup Now Cancel Apply Dialup Profile Use any currently active dialup session Click this checkbox if you want MDaemon to be able to utilize other connection profiles when it detects that one is active Whenever it is time to dialup MDaemon will first check to see if there is an active connection that it can use rather than dialing Logon name The value specified here will be passed to the remote host during the authentication process Logon Password The value specified here will be passed to the remote host during the authentication process Use this RAS dialup profile This drop down list box allows you to select a session profile that has been previously defined through windows Dialup Networking or Remote Access Services Setup New profile Click this button to create a new Dialup Networking or Remote Access Services profile Edit profile Click this button to edit the currently selected Dialup Networking or Remote Access Services profile RAS DIALUP SETTINGS 145 CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP Maximized Use Maximize use of this connection profile This switch causes MDaemon to monitor your connecti
456. to exclude from the automatic compression features When a message attachment matches one of these filenames it will not be compressed regardless of the compression settings Wildcards are permitted in these entries Therefore you could specify exe for example and all files ending with exe would remain uncompressed Exclude these domains Click this button to specify recipient domains whose messages you wish to exclude from automatic compression Messages bound for these domains will not have their file attachments compressed regardless of your compression settings CONTENT FILTER EDITOR 175 CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS Inbound Decompression Enable decompression of attachments for inbound messages Click this checkbox if you want to enable automatic decompression of inbound remote mail message attachments When a message arrives with a zipped attachment MDaemon will decompress it before delivering it to the local user s mailbox Decompress inbound local domain attachments Enable this control if you want automatic decompression to apply to local mail as well 176 CONTENT FILTER EDITOR CHAPTER 14 CONTENT FILTER AND ANTI VIRUS AntiVirus Content Filter Admins Attachments File Compression Notifications Antivirus AntiVirus Updater Scanner configuration IV Enable Antivirus scanner T Enable background scanner WARNING If selected MDaemon will rely on pour background
457. tor The mailbox is the portion of the email address to the left of the symbol This macro resolves to the domain of the message originator This is the portion of the email address to the right of the symbol This macro resolves to the full address of the message recipient This macro resolves to the mailbox of the message recipient The mailbox is the portion of the email address to the left of the symbol This macro resolves to the domain of the message recipient The domain is the portion of the email address to the right of the symbol This macro resolves to the value of the RFC 822 Subject header This macro resolves to the value of the RFC 822 Message ID header This macro resolves to the value of the RFC 822 Content Type header This macro resolves to the value of the MIME Part Boundary value found in the RFC 822 Content Type header for multipart messages This macro expands to an RFC 822 style date time stamp line Some messages may contain an ActualTo field which generally represents the destination mailbox and host as it was entered by the original user prior to any reformatting or alias translation Some messages may contain an ActualFrom field which generally represents the origination mailbox and host prior to any reformatting or alias translation This macro resolves to the value found in the RFC 822 ReplyTo header This macro expands to the M
458. traditional and well known IM clients we have designed ComAgent s instant messaging system to minimize those deficiencies First of all our system is not peer to peer individual ComAgent clients do not connect directly to each other Further because every IM passes through the server each message is logged in a central location accessible to the MDaemon WorldClient administrator Thus a record of all conversations can be maintained for the security of both your company and your employees or users IM activity is logged in a file called InstantMessaging log located in the MDaemon LOGS directory The assurance of accountability is also the primary reason we do not support other IM clients such as ICQ AOL and MSN We may however add that capability as an optional feature in some future version of MDaemon Finally our IM system is secure in that each transaction is strongly encrypted from start to finish so that plain text is never transmitted For more information see ComAgent s Instant Messaging System page 70 WebAdmin Integration Support for Alt N s next generation of web based configuration tools has been fully integrated into MDaemon WebConfig has been removed from MDaemon 6 0 and now WebAdmin is the browser based tool of choice for remote server administration Though not included in the MDaemon installer WebAdmin is provided as a separate free download You can WebAdmin from Alt N s web site at www altn com Note If yo
459. ts can be abstracted using Mailbox Format Files MBF which allows for a wide range of mail system compatibility An internal message transport system known as RAW mail provides a simple method for placing messages into the mail stream and greatly simplifies custom mail software development Using RAW a complete mail system can be devised using a simple text editor and a couple of batch files A highly versatile Content Filtering system makes it possible for you to customize server behavior based on the content of incoming and outgoing email messages You can insert and delete message headers add footers to messages remove attachments route copies to other users cause an instant message to be sent to someone run other programs and more Complete support for virus scanning and protection through MDaemon AntiVirus This utility provides potent anti virus protection Messages can be scanned for viruses and cleaned or deleted automatically before ever reaching the intended recipients Further you can configure MDaemon to send a message to the administrator sender and recipient of the infected message notifying them of the virus MDaemon AntiVirus can be obtained from www altn com What s New in MDaemon Version 6 Expanded and Improved WorldClient New WorldClient Themes We ve added two new themes to WorldClient LookOut and Simple LookOut requires Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher and it has a look and feel simi
460. tworks it is common for machines to be both hosts and clients at the same time For example your machine may host your network s printer but also be used by you as a client to collect email and download files from another host HTML An acronym for Hypertext Markup Language It is the coding language used to create Hypertext documents used on the World Wide Web Simply put an HTML document is a plain text document that contains formatting codes and tags that the users web browser interprets and presents as a web page complete with formatted text and colors For example a browser receiving an HTML document containing the text lt B gt Text lt B gt would present the word Text in Bold Because plain text files are very small this makes it possible for them to be quickly transferred over the Internet HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP is the protocol used for transferring ypertext files between computers over the Internet HTTP requires a client program on one end usually a web browser and an HTTP server on the other end HTTP is addressed in RFC 2616 which can be viewed at 342 GLOSSARY http www rfc editor org rfc rfc2616 txt Hypertext Any text that contains a hyperlink or jump to another document or place within the same document is called hypertext Sometimes the text is also called a hypertext link or simply link Hypertext can be either a word or phrase and has the link embedded in it so that clicking it w
461. u are upgrading to MDaemon 6 0 from a previous version then you can safely remove the WebConfig folder from your MDaemon directory structure For complete information on WebAdmin see the WebAdmin user manual which can also be obtained from Alt N s web site at www altn com WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 19 CHAPTER 2 Enhanced IMAP Features 20 Improved IMAP Folder Sharing MDaemon version 6 supports the sharing of Public and User IMAP Folders Public folders are extra folders that do not belong to any particular account but can be made available to multiple IMAP users User folders are IMAP folders that belong to individual MDaemon accounts Not to be confused with public FTP or html folders MDaemon s Shared IMAP folders whether Public or User may not be accessed by everyone Each shared folder must have a list of MDaemon users associated with it and only members of that access list may access it via WorldClent or an IMAP email client When IMAP users access their list of personal folders shared public folders and shared user folders to which they have been given access will also be displayed In this way certain mail folders can be shared by multiple users but still require each user s individual logon credentials Furthermore having access to a folder doesn t necessarily mean having full read write or administrative access to it Specific access rights can be granted to individual users thus allowing you to set different
462. uccessfully resolved domain name lookup will display the domain s A Record and any MX Records that might be listed There is also a control that can be used to automatically add the results of a successful lookup to the IP Cache Lookup Host Host information altn com c Enter a domain name to resolve A record results M Add results to IP cache Domain name altn com Domain IP 127 0 0 1 MX record results P 010 D altn com M lt domain com cos Host Information Enter the domain name whose DNS information you wish to retrieve A Record Results Add results to IP cache Click this checkbox if you want the results of DNS lookups to be added to the IP Cache Domain name This is the name of the resolved domain name Domain IP This is the resolved domain s IP address MX Record Results This window will display any MX records listed for the resolved domain Lookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup for the domain name that you have listed in the Host Information section DNS LOOKUP 137 SCHEDULING AND DIALUP Chapter Scheduling and Dialup Using the Event Scheduler and RAS Dialup Dialdoun Engine lick the Setup gt Event scheduling menu selection to open MDaemon s Event Scheduler This dialog makes it possible for you to schedule MDaemon s Local Remote RAW and System mail processing events as extensively or as simply as you prefer You can schedul
463. uild the EVERYONE GRP mailing list Use this when you make modifications to the USERLIST DAT and need MDaemon to reload it This semaphore is used to update specific records within the USERLIST DAT file without a potentially time consuming complete rebuild To update a specific record within USERLIST DAT you first construct a complete replacement record according to the format specified in the Account Management Functions section of the MDaemon API see MD API htm1 in MDaemon s docs API subfolder The new record will reflect the changes that need to be updated within USERLIST DAT How does MDaemon know which record in USERLIST DAT to update This is accomplished by prepending the new record with the original record s email address followed by a comma The EDITUSER SEM file can contain multiple records to update each on its own line MDaemon will process the file one line at a time You can create EDITUSER LCK to lock the file while you are updating it and MDaemon will not touch EDITUSER SEM until EDITUSER LCK is deleted To see a sample EDITUSER SEM file open EDITUSER SMP in your APP directory with a text editor This semaphore creates new accounts It is used to force MDaemon to append new records to the end of the USERLIST DAT file without causing a potentially time consuming complete rebuild of the user database Each line in this file must be a complete account record of the form specified in the Account Management Functions sect
464. upervisor Name setting found on MDaemon s Remote Configuration dialog Password The value entered here must match the Password corresponding to the Logon being used This setting is also found on MDaemon s Remote Configuration dialog Use this port Enter the port on which you have configured MDaemon to listen for MDConfig connections Connect as version If you are connecting to an earlier version of MDaemon use this control to specify that version Notes maximum of 255 characters This text box can be used to display notes or descriptions related to each MDaemon server to which you connect Its contents will correspond to whichever entry you have selected in the Host name or IP address control For example if you use MDConfig to manage MDaemon installations on multiple servers with similar IP Addresses then you can type a description of each server in this box to help you remember which is which That way when you select a particular entry its description will appear in this area The notes for an entry will only be saved when the Remember these settings control is enabled and you have clicked the OR button Remember these settings Clear this checkbox if you do not want the current entry s settings to be retained for later use When this control is enabled then all information corresponding to the currently displayed Host name or IP address will be saved along with any previously saved entries Updating t
465. upport creating accounts on the fly while in the middle of entering sales figures Simply stop entering figures click button X enter a name and then continue entering more figures The other way that on the fly is used is in referring to something that can be generated dynamically or automatically instead of manually or statically For example by using the information stored in a cookie a customized web page might be generated on the fly when a user returns to a web site Rather than requiring someone to manually create a page customized to the uset s tastes it would be generated dynamically based upon that person s actions while browsing Original Equipment Manufacturer See OEM above Packet A unit of computer data sent over a network Any time you receive data from another computer on your LAN or over the Internet it comes to your computer in the form of packets The original file or message is divided into these packets transmitted and then recombined at the destination Each packet contains a header containing its source and destination a block of data content and an error checking code It is also numbered so that it can be connected to related packets being sent The process of sending and receiving packets is known as packet switching Packets are also commonly called datagrams Packet Switching The process of sending and receiving packets over a network or the Interne
466. utes Retry sending undeliverable mail once every 240 minutes IV Inform the sender when message is placed in retry queue D Inform the sender when subsequent delivery attempts fail Ultimate fate of undeliverable mail If a message is still undeliverable after 5 days then T Place the undeliverable message in the bad message queue IV Inform the sender that the message could not be delivered IV Inform the postmaster that the message could not be delivered IV unless it s an MDaemon auto generated message Cancel Retry Frequency Keep message in the primary queue for at least XX minutes This setting governs the length of time a message will remain in the primary queue before being removed and placed in the retry queue The primary queue will generally attempt to deliver the message quicker and more frequently than the retry queue Retry sending undeliverable mail once every XX minutes This setting determines how frequently the messages in the retry queue are processed Inform the sender when message is placed in retry queue This switch will inform the sender when his her message is removed and placed in the retry queue The text of this message can be found and edited in the DELWARN DAT file Inform the sender when subsequent delivery attempts fail If a delivery attempt of a message in the retry queue fails a message explaining this fact will be dispatched to the sender of the message The text of this message can be foun
467. vailable if that is your preference Further you can now select which IMAP folders you wish to subscribe to and which ones to hide Finally the folders WorldChent WHAT S NEW IN MDAEMON VERSION 6 17 CHAPTER 2 18 uses for Drafts Sent and Trash can be selected and renamed instead of being forced to use specific system folders When used in conjunction with WebAdmin Alt N s free remote server administration application WorldClient has been further enhanced to allow you to collect email from multiple mail sources and deposit it into your WorldClient folders WorldClient does this by interacting with MDaemon s MultiPOP system and then utilizing your IMAP Filters Your MultiPOP and IMAP Filters are reached from within WorldClient by clicking MDaemon Settings on the Options page This link launches WebAdmin in a separate browser window from which you can modify your settings In this way control is given to users while still being policed by the MDaemon administrator All of these new capabilities can be configured by individual users via various controls on the Personalize Folders and MDaemon Settings pages within WorldClient Options They can also be configured globally and per domain like all other user settings in the Domains ini file The keys of interest are Default UserDefaults HideUnsubscribedFolders No Use IMAPDelete No DraftsFolderName Drafts SentFolderName Sent TrashFolderName Trash Run WorldClie
468. value used in the bind operation In most cases you should leave this set to lt USER gt see Bind DN above so that each user s unique password will be required Base entry DN Enter the base entry root DN that will be used for the address book For the Public Address Book this should be a static rather than dynamic value so that all users will see the same public addresses If you are using the LDAP Options tab page 94 to mirror your MDaemon accounts to an LDAP address book the Public Base entry DN will usually be the same as the Base entry DN address book value on that tab The Private Address Book s Base entry DN should normally be set to lt USER gt This will cause it to have a dynamic value so that each user can have an individual private address book that only he or she can access If you set the Private Base entry DN to a static value then that will effectively cause all users to share a single private address book Search filter The value of this option should normally be set to the ObjectClass of the entries that you want to be searched when using the Search feature in WorldClient s Address Book The Search filter s default setting is ObjectClass MDaemonContact 86 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES CHAPTER 6 WORLDCLIENT SERVER Match settings to those MDaemon uses when creating LDAP entries Click this button to change the Bind DN and Bind password values of the Public and Private address books to their correspondin
469. waiting for delivery to their final destination or to the mail gateway All mail placed in this directory must be RFC 822 compliant and have an extension of MSG in order to be processed by MDaemon Mail in this queue is destined for domains hosted by other servers RFC 822 compliant local message queue local mail only Enter the directory path that MDaemon should use as the local mail queue This directory will contain only processed RFC 822 format messages that are waiting for delivery to their final destination or to a mail gateway All mail placed in this directory must be RFC 822 compliant and have an extension of MSG in order to be processed by MDaemon Mail in this queue is destined for local mailboxes If you are using the LAN Domains feature messages destined for other servers on your local LAN will be stored in a subdirectory of the this Local Message Queue called Lndomain See LAN Domains page 148 Mailing list digests are stored here while waiting to be queued Enter the directory path where MDaemon should store Digest mail waiting to be queued for delivery Mailing list digests are archived here Enter the directory path where MDaemon should Archive Digests Log transcript files are stored here Enter the directory where transaction and event logs are stored 58 DOMAIN CONFIGURATION EDITOR CHAPTER 3 PRIMARY DOMAIN CONFIGURATION s POP Check Primary Domain Configuration m POP Before SMTP Perform a PO
470. ware and freeware from many sites on the Internet Hopefully you won t have to unzip the utility before you can install it index j Alt N MDaemon for Windows ss0se0ss000 15 A Alt N Technologies sc0sceecseeeneeee 333 334 Account Access and Control AntiVirus Account alias databaSe Scheduler c ccssceseeeeeeeenseeeseneeeeees Account Alias Editor cccscsssseesseeeeeeeeeneee Testing cesssecsesstonssersnsnonssensneusnnsossnensecuene Account Aliases scccseseneneneneneneneneneneeens Updater cscseseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee Account Editor Viewing update report s ACCOUNT 2 sceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 221 Anti virus Support sssss Forwarding sssesceeseeeeeeenseeeeeeseneeeeenenees 226 ArChiVal ssssssssns22 5 Mailbox Archiving mail in a pre parsed state Options sssssnnnnnn21 ATRN 2c sceseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 41 49 51 294 Quotas L0 Attachment restricting 000 eee 172 ReSstrictions c1ccsceeeseseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 50 51 294 Account information message 258 261 262 Account Integration csccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Auto Response Script Examples 5 262 Account Manager cscsesesseeseneeeeeeeeeneeeeens Auto Response Scripts csscsesseseeseeeeees 261 Account Template Editor 0scss
471. which you can designate IP addresses that will be exempt from Spam Blocker lookups You should always include your local IP address range to prevent lookups on it 127 0 0 1 is already exempt and therefore doesn t need to be added to the list SPAM BLOCKER 121 CHAPTER 9 SECURITY SETTINGS Spam Blocker Hosts Spam Blocker 24x Spam Blocker Engine Spam Blocker Hosts Spam Blocker Caching Spam Blocker hosts The spam blocking engine works by querying each host below and seeing if the IP address of an incoming SMTP connection has been blacklisted for propogating spam For complete details on how this works check out http www ordb org or http www mail abuse org tbl maps vix com mail from IP refused by RBL see http www mail abuse relays mail abuse org mail from IP refused by ASS see http www mail Remove When a match is found to one of these hosts the corresponding message will be tracked into the log and reported during the SMTP session New host Message Add Cancel Apply Spam Blocker Hosts MDaemon will query each of these hosts when performing a Spam Blocker lookup on an IP address If a host replies to the query with a positive result MDaemon will refuse to accept the message from that IP address and will also send the short message associated with the host that blacklisted the address Remove Select an entry from the Spam Blocker Hosts list and click this button to remove
472. within that message and builds a collection of potential recipients Every email address found in the headers that MDaemon inspects is included in the collection Once this process is complete MDaemon s collection of recipients is divided into local and remote sets Further all addresses that are parsed and placed into the collection of potential recipients are processed through the Address Alias translator before being divided into local and remote sets Every member of the local set addresses with a domain that matches either MDaemon s Primary domain or one of the Secondary domains will receive a copy of the message What happens to the remote set is governed by the settings in this dialog You can elect to simply ignore these addresses forward a summary listing of them to the postmaster or honor them in which case MDaemon will actually deliver a copy of the message to the remote recipient Only under rare circumstances would the need to deliver these messages to remote recipients be warranted 150 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION Care must be taken to prevent duplicate messages or endlessly looping mail delivery cycles A common problem that results from the loss of the SMTP envelope manifests itself with mailing list mail Typically messages distributed by a mailing list do not contain within the message body any reference to the addresses of the recipients Rather the list engine simply inserts the name of the mailing list into
473. y can manage their own account rules and settings that you have given them permission to manage Thus by using WebAdmin you can give your users total control over their own rules and avoid having to manage those functions for them Existing IMAP Mail Rules This box displays the list of all rules that have been created for the user s account Rules are processed in the order in which they are listed until a match is found Therefore as soon as a message matches one of the rules it will be moved to the folder specified in that rule and then rule processing for that message will cease Use the Up and Down buttons to move rules to different positions in the list 240 ACCOUNT EDITOR CHAPTER 20 ACCOUNT EDITOR Remove Click a rule in the list and then click Remove to delete it from the list Clear all Clicking this button will delete all of the user s IMAP Mail Rules Up Click a rule in the list and then click this button to move it to a higher position in the list Down Click a rule in the list and then click this button to move it to a lower position in the list New IMAP Mail Rule Use the controls in this section to create new IMAP Mail Rules for the users Ifthe message header header Type a message header into this box or choose one from the drop down list MDaemon will search this header in all of the account s incoming messages for the text contained in the This ex control below Then based upon the type of
474. y create a Domain Gateway page 289 for a previously unknown domain when another source attempts to deliver that domain s messages to MDaemon and a DNS query lists MDaemon s location as a valid MX record GATEWAY EDITOR 289 CHAPTER 26 DOMAIN GATEWAYS Domain Settings Gateway Editor notmycompany 24x Mail Forwarding POP IMAP Quotas Domain Settings ESMTPETRN ATRN AUTH Domain name mi notmycompary x Messages arriving destined for all users of this domain will be placed into a common mailbox directory Wildcards and are ok Mail directory Place message files for all users of this domain here c MDaemon GATE WAYS NotMyCompany Browse I Automatically extract embedded attachments Extracted attachments will be stored in the FILES directory stemming from the message directory MV Deliver messages at each scheduled remote mail processing interval Click here and MDaemon will try to deliver these messages each time outbound mail is processed Apply this MBF file to incoming messages aez o Messages which arrive for this RFC822 domain will be translated according to this MBF script Cancel Apply Domain Name Enter the name of the domain for which you wish MDaemon to act as an email gateway Mail Directory Place message files for all users of this domain here Enter the directory where you want to store incoming mail for the domain Automatically extract embedded
475. yFax it will place it directly into RelayFax s incoming queue rather than deliver it using SMTP If RelayFax resides on the same machine on which MDaemon is running you may leave the file path field blank Otherwise you must specify the network path to RelayFax s app directory 92 WORLDCLIENT RELAYFAX PROPERTIES LDAEMON ADDRESS BOOK OPTIONS Chapter LDaemon Address Book Options Using LDAP and Supporting Global Address Books Click Setup LDaemon Address book options to open the LDAP Options dialog used for configuring MDaemon to keep your LDAP server up to date on all of its user accounts This makes it possible for users with mail clients that support LDAP to share a global address book that will contain entries for all of your MDaemon users as well as any other contacts that you include You can use your LDAP server as the MDaemon user database rather than its local USERLIST DAT system You might want to use this method of maintaining your user information if you have multiple MDaemon servers at different locations but want them to share a single user database Each MDaemon server would be configured to connect to the same LDAP server in order to share user information rather than storing it locally M Daemon version 6 supports Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP functionality You can also use this dialog for managing Alt N s LDaemon LDAP server You can obtain this standards based LDAPv3 server free of c
476. your maximum set size The messages will simply be removed from the DomainPOP and MultiPOP mail hosts and will not be downloaded Warn postmaster about large DomainPOP messages Click this switch and MDaemon will send a warning to the postmaster whenever a large message is discovered in the DomainPOP mailbox Download messages according to size small messages first Enable this checkbox if you want the message downloading order to be based on size beginning with the smallest and proceeding to the largest Note This option retrieves smaller messages quicker but requires a larger amount of internal sorting and processing Over Quota Accounts Warn account holder and delete over quota message DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION 153 CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION When this option is chosen and a message is collected for an account that is over its quota designated on the Quotas tab of the account editor MDaemon will delete the message and send a warning to the user letting them know that their account is over its limit Warn account holder and forward over quota message to Postmaster When this option is chosen and a message is collected for an account that is over its quota designated on the Quotas tab of the account editor MDaemon will forward the message to the Postmaster and send a warning to the user letting them know that their account is over its limit 154 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION CHAPTER 13 DOMAINPOP MAIL COLLECTION

Alt-N MDaemon Server for Windows v6.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents